Warrior Service

XV1700P
XV1700PC
SERVICEMANUAL
LIT-11616-15-37 5PX-28197-10
EAS00001
XV1700P/XV1700PC
SERVICE MANUAL
©2001 by Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
First edition, October 2001
All rights reserved.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use
without the written permission of
Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
is expressly prohibited.
Printed in U.S.A.
P/N LIT-11616-15-37
EAS00003
NOTICE
This manual was produced by the Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. primarily for use by Yamaha deal-
ers and their qualified mechanics. It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in
one manual. Therefore, anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamaha
vehicles should have a basic understanding of mechanics and the techniques to repair these types
of vehicles. Repair and maintenance work attempted by anyone without this knowledge is likely to
render the vehicle unsafe and unfit for use.
This model has been designed and manufactured to perform within certain specifications in regard
to performance and emissions. Proper service with the correct tools is necessary to ensure that the
vehicle will operate as designed. If there is any question about a service procedure, it is imperative
that you contact a Yamaha dealer for any service information changes that apply to this model. This
policy is intended to provide the customer with the most satisfaction from his vehicle and to conform
to federal environmental quality objectives.
Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. is continually striving to improve all of its models. Modifications and
significant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha deal-
ers and will appear in future editions of this manual where applicable.
NOTE:
_
Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
EAS00004
IMPORTANT MANUAL INFORMATION

Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following.
The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR
SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
WARNING Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to
the motorcycle operator, a bystander or a person checking or repairing the
motorcycle.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damage
to the motorcycle.
NOTE: A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.
EAS00007
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual is intended as a handy, easy-to-read reference book for the mechanic. Comprehensive
explanations of all installation, removal, disassembly, assembly, repair and check procedures are
laid out with the individual steps in sequential order.
1 The manual is divided into chapters. An abbreviation and symbol in the upper right corner of
each page indicate the current chapter.
Refer to “SYMBOLS”.
2 Each chapter is divided into sections. The current section title is shown at the top of each page,
except in Chapter 3 (“PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS”), where the sub-section
title(s) appears.
3 Sub-section titles appear in smaller print than the section title.
4 To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of
each removal and disassembly section.
5 Numbers are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A circled number indicates a
disassembly step.
6 Symbols indicate parts to be lubricated or replaced.
Refer to “SYMBOLS”.
7 A job instruction chart accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names of
parts, notes in jobs, etc.
8 Jobs requiring more information (such as special tools and technical data) are described sequen-
tially.
EAS00009
1 2 SYMBOLS
The following symbols are not relevant to
GEN
INFO SPEC every vehicle. Symbols 1 to 8 indicate the
subject of each chapter.
3 4
1 General information
2 Specifications
CHK CHAS 3 Periodic checks and adjustments
ADJ 4 Chassis
5 Engine
5 6 6 Fuel injection system
7 Electrical system
8 Troubleshooting
ENG FI
7 8
ELEC – + TRBL
SHTG
Symbols 9 to F indicate the following.
9 0
9 Serviceable with engine mounted
0 Filling fluid
A Lubricant
B Special tool
A B C Tightening torque
D Wear limit, clearance
E Engine speed
F Electrical data
C D
T.
R.
E F
Symbols G to L in the exploded diagrams

G H I
indicate the types of lubricants and lubrication
points.
E G M G Engine oil
H Gear oil
J K L I Molybdenum-disulfide oil
J Wheel-bearing grease
B LS M K Lithium-soap-based grease
L Molybdenum-disulfide grease
Symbols M to N in the exploded diagrams
M N
indicate the following.
New M Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®)

LT N Replace the part
EAS00013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION GEN
INFO 1
SPECIFICATIONS SPEC 2
PERIODIC CHECKS AND
ADJUSTMENTS CHK
ADJ 3
CHASSIS CHAS 4
ENGINE ENG 5
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FI 6
– +
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ELEC 7

TROUBLESHOOTING TRBL
SHTG 8
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................1-1

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER .....................................................1-1
MODEL LABEL..........................................................................................1-1
FEATURES ......................................................................................................1-2
OUTLINE ...................................................................................................1-2
FI SYSTEM ................................................................................................1-3
COMPONENTS .........................................................................................1-5
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ....................................................................1-17
FIRST IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM ...........................................................1-28
COMPONENTS .......................................................................................1-29
IMPORTANT INFORMATION........................................................................1-32
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY .........................1-32
REPLACEMENT PARTS .........................................................................1-32
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS ..................................................1-32
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS ...................................1-33
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS ..................................................................1-33
CIRCLIPS ................................................................................................1-33
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS ................................................................1-34
SPECIAL TOOLS ..........................................................................................1-35
CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................2-1
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................................2-2
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................2-13
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................2-17
CONVERSION TABLE ..................................................................................2-20
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ...............................2-20

TIGHTENING TORQUES ..............................................................................2-21
ENGINE TIGHTENING TORQUES .........................................................2-21
CHASSIS TIGHTENING TORQUES .......................................................2-24
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES.....................................2-27

ENGINE ..................................................................................................2-27
CHASSIS ................................................................................................2-28
ENGINE OIL LUBRICATION CHART ...........................................................2-29
ENGINE OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS ..................................................................2-30
TRANSFER GEAR OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS .................................................2-34
CABLE ROUTING .........................................................................................2-36
CHAPTER 3
PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................3-1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART

FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................................3-1
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART ............................3-2
SEAT AND SIDE COVERS .............................................................................3-4
HEADLIGHT AND METER ASSEMBLIES......................................................3-5
BATTERY ........................................................................................................3-6
FUEL TANK .....................................................................................................3-7
AIR FILTER CASE...........................................................................................3-8
SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE .......................................................................3-9

ENGINE..........................................................................................................3-11
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE.................................................3-11
SYNCHRONIZING THE THROTTLE BODIES ........................................3-15
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED ...........................................3-17
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY...............................3-18
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS ...........................................................3-20
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING .......................................................3-22
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE ..................................3-23
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL ....................................................3-26
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL................................................................3-27
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ........................................3-31
CHECKING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL LEVEL ...................................3-32
CHANGING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL ...............................................3-33
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY ...................................3-35
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENTS .............................................3-36
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINTS.........................................3-37
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES ..............................................................3-37
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD BREATHER HOSE AND
OIL TANK BREATHER HOSE................................................................3-38
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM ....................................................3-39
CHASSIS .......................................................................................................3-40
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE..........................................................3-40
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE ............................................................3-41
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL .................................................3-42
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS ................................................3-43
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS...................................................3-43
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH .................................3-44
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE HOSES ..........................3-44
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM....................................3-45
ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL ............................................................3-47
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE BELT SLACK .................................................3-47
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD .........................3-50
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK .............................................................3-52
ADJUSTING THE FRONT FORK LEGS .................................................3-53
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ..................3-54
CHECKING THE TIRES ..........................................................................3-55
CHECKING THE WHEELS .....................................................................3-58
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES.....................................3-58
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS .........................................3-59
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND ...........................................................3-59
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION .............................................3-59
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.................................................................................3-60
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY .......................................3-60
CHECKING THE FUSES.........................................................................3-65
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB ....................................................3-68
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM ...................................................3-69
INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS..........................................................................3-70
ODOMETER AND TRIPMETER..............................................................3-70
ADJUSTING THE METER LIGHT ...........................................................3-71
ADJUSTING THE CLOCK .......................................................................3-71
CHAPTER 4
CHASSIS
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS ............................................................4-1

REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL ............................................................4-4
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL ............................................................4-4
CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS ..............................................................4-6
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL ..........................................................4-7
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC BALANCE............................4-9
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC, AND REAR WHEEL PULLEY.....................4-11

REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL ............................................................4-17
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL .............................................................4-17
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL DRIVE HUB ........................................4-18
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE REAR WHEEL PULLEY................4-18
ASSEMBLING THE REAR WHEEL ........................................................4-18
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL ...........................................................4-19
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC BALANCE ............................4-22
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES.......................................................................4-23

FRONT BRAKE PADS ............................................................................4-23
REAR BRAKE PADS ...............................................................................4-24
REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS ..............................................4-25
REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS .................................................4-27
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ....................................................4-30
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ......................................................4-33
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .......................4-37
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER..........................4-37
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS ..4-37
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER..............................................................................4-38
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER..............................................................................4-41
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS ....................................................................4-43
REAR BRAKE CALIPER .........................................................................4-45
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS ..............................4-47
DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER...................................4-48
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS.....................4-49
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS .....4-50
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER ..........4-52
FRONT FORK................................................................................................4-55
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS ..................................................4-58
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS ........................................4-58
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS...................................................4-60
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS ..............................................4-62
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS.................................................4-67
HANDLEBAR.................................................................................................4-69
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR ..............................................................4-71
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR...............................................................4-71
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR.............................................................4-71
STEERING HEAD..........................................................................................4-75
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET .....................................................4-77
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD .......................................................4-77
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD .....................................................4-78
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM ...........................................4-80

HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ........................................4-84
DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
AND GAS CYLINDER.............................................................................4-84
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM..........4-85
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ........................................4-86
CHECKING THE RELAY ARM AND CONNECTING ARM .....................4-86
CHECKING THE SWINGARM ................................................................4-86
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM ........4-87
DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE SPROCKET ........................................................4-89

REMOVING THE DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE SPROCKET......................4-90
CHECKING THE DRIVE BELT................................................................4-90
INSTALLING THE DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE SPROCKET ....................4-91
CHAPTER 5
ENGINE
ENGINE............................................................................................................5-1
INSTALLING THE ENGINE .......................................................................5-9
INSTALLING THE MUFFLER AND EXHAUST PIPES............................5-10
ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS AND VALVE LIFTERS ..............................5-11

REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS AND
VALVE LIFTERS.....................................................................................5-16
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND ROCKER ARM SHAFTS.........5-16
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARM BASES ...............................................5-18
CHECKING THE PUSH RODS ...............................................................5-18
CHECKING THE VALVE LIFTERS AND VALVE LIFTER CASES..........5-18
BLEEDING A VALVE LIFTER .................................................................5-19
CHECKING THE PUSH ROD COVER ....................................................5-21
INSTALLING THE VALVE LIFTERS .......................................................5-21
INSTALLING THE ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS .........................5-22
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD COVERS .....................................5-23
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET COVER AND
ENGINE LEFT SIDE COVER .................................................................5-23
CAMSHAFTS.................................................................................................5-25
REMOVING THE CAMSHAFTS ..............................................................5-27
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFTS ..............................................................5-28
CHECKING THE DECOMPRESSION SYSTEM .....................................5-30
CHECKING THE OIL DELIVERY PIPE ...................................................5-30
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFTS ............................................................5-31
CYLINDER HEADS .......................................................................................5-34

REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEADS ....................................................5-36
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEADS .....................................................5-36
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD .....................................................5-37
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS .................................................................5-39

REMOVING THE VALVES ......................................................................5-40
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES...................................5-41
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS ............................................................5-43
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS ........................................................5-46
INSTALLING THE VALVES.....................................................................5-47
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS .........................................................................5-49

REMOVING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS ......................................5-50
CHECKING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS.......................................5-51
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS ...........................................................5-52
CHECKING THE PISTON PINS ..............................................................5-53
INSTALLING THE PISTONS AND CYLINDERS.....................................5-54
CLUTCH.........................................................................................................5-56
CLUTCH COVER ....................................................................................5-56
CLUTCH ..................................................................................................5-59
REMOVING THE CLUTCH .....................................................................5-61
REMOVING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR ............................................5-62
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES .....................................................5-62
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES .......................................................5-62
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATE SPRING ...........................................5-63
CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING ....................................................5-63
CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS ...........................................................5-63
CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE ....................................................5-64
CHECKING THE PULL LEVER SHAFT AND PULL ROD.......................5-64
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE ........................................................5-64
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND
PULL LEVER SHAFT .............................................................................5-64
INSTALLING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR ...........................................5-65
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH ....................................................................5-66
SHIFT SHAFT AND STOPPER LEVER ........................................................5-70

CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT .............................................................5-71
CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER.......................................................5-71
INSTALLING THE STOPPER LEVER AND SHIFT SHAFT ....................5-71
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH......................................................5-73

STATOR COIL ASSEMBLY ....................................................................5-73
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH ................................................5-75
REMOVING THE GENERATOR .............................................................5-76
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH ....................................................5-76
INSTALLING THE GENERATOR ............................................................5-77
TRANSFER GEAR CASE .............................................................................5-79

FUEL PUMP ............................................................................................5-82
REMOVING THE FUEL PUMP ...............................................................5-83
INSTALL THE FUEL PUMP ....................................................................5-83
SUB FUEL TANK.....................................................................................5-84
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT ...........................................5-88
CHECKING THE MIDDLE DRIVE ...........................................................5-88
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER............................................................5-89
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP ...................................................................5-89
CHECKING THE OIL PIPE......................................................................5-90
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP ...............................................................5-90
INSTALLING THE TRANSFER GEAR CASE .........................................5-91
CRANKCASE ................................................................................................5-93
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE ....................................................5-96
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE ..............................................................5-97
CHECKING THE BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS ......................................5-98
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL PUMP DRIVE.........................................5-98
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE ..........................................................5-99
ENGINE OIL PUMP .....................................................................................5-102

CHECKING THE OIL PUMP .................................................................5-105
CHECKING THE RELIEF VALVE .........................................................5-105
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER..........................................................5-106
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP .............................................................5-106
INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP ...............................................................5-107
INSTALLING THE OIL STRAINER........................................................5-108
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS ...............................................5-109

REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT..........................................................5-110
REMOVING THE CONNECTING RODS...............................................5-110
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS .............5-110
INSTALLING THE CONNECTING RODS .............................................5-116
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT ........................................................5-118
TRANSMISSION..........................................................................................5-119
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS ...........................................................5-122
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY ........................................5-123
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION .......................................................5-123
INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION .....................................................5-124
INSTALLING THE SHIFT FORKS AND SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY.....5-124
CHAPTER 6
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ............................................................................6-1

WIRING DIAGRAM....................................................................................6-2
ECU’S SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ...................................................6-4
SUBSTITUTE CHARACTERISTICS OPERATION CONTROL
(FAIL-SAFE ACTION)...............................................................................6-8
TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................6-9
THROTTLE BODIES ...............................................................................6-37
CHECKING THE INJECTOR...................................................................6-41
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY ......................................................6-41
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP AND
PRESSURE REGULATOR OPERATION...............................................6-42
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM ............................................................................6-43
AIR INJECTION .......................................................................................6-43
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE .............................................................................6-43
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM HOSES........................................................6-44
REED VALVES........................................................................................6-45
CHECKING THE PRESSURE REGULATOR..........................................6-46
CHECKING THE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM ..........................................6-46
CHAPTER 7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS........................................................................7-1
ARRANGEMENT OF THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND

COUPLERS ....................................................................................................7-3
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY ................................................................7-8
CHECKING THE SWITCHES ........................................................................7-10
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS ........................................7-12

TYPES OF BULBS ..................................................................................7-12
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULBS......................................7-12
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB SOCKETS......................7-14
CHECKING THE LEDs ............................................................................7-15
IGNITION SYSTEM........................................................................................7-16
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................7-16
TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................7-17
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ..................................................................7-22

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................7-22
STARTING CIRCUIT CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATION ........................7-23
STARTER MOTOR ........................................................................................7-28

CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR .....................................................7-31
ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR .................................................7-33
CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................................................................7-35

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................7-35
LIGHTING SYSTEM ......................................................................................7-38
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................7-38
CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................................................7-40
SIGNALING SYSTEM....................................................................................7-44
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................7-44
CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM .................................................7-47
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ..........................................................................7-54

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................7-54
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP ................................................................7-64
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ..................................................7-64
CHAPTER 8
TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTING FAILURES ....................................................................................8-1

ENGINE .....................................................................................................8-1
FUEL SYSTEM ..........................................................................................8-1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ..........................................................................8-2
INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING SPEED...........................................................8-2

ENGINE .....................................................................................................8-2
FUEL SYSTEM ..........................................................................................8-2
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE .................................8-3

ENGINE .....................................................................................................8-3
FUEL SYSTEM ..........................................................................................8-3
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING ..............................................................................8-3

SHIFTING IS DIFFICULT ..........................................................................8-3
SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE ............................................................8-3
JUMPS OUT OF GEAR .............................................................................8-3
FAULTY CLUTCH ...........................................................................................8-3

CLUTCH SLIPS .........................................................................................8-3
CLUTCH DRAGS ......................................................................................8-3
OVERHEATING ...............................................................................................8-4
ENGINE .....................................................................................................8-4
FUEL SYSTEM ..........................................................................................8-4
CHASSIS ...................................................................................................8-4
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE................................................................8-4
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS........................................................................8-4

LEAKING OIL ............................................................................................8-4
MALFUNCTION .........................................................................................8-4
UNSTABLE HANDLING..................................................................................8-5
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM..............................................8-6

HEADLIGHT DOES NOT COME ON ........................................................8-6
HEADLIGHT BULB BURNT OUT ..............................................................8-6
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON ............................................8-6
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT LED BURNT OUT ....................................................8-6
TURN SIGNAL DOES NOT COME ON.....................................................8-6
TURN SIGNAL BLINKS SLOWLY .............................................................8-6
TURN SIGNAL REMAINS LIT ...................................................................8-6
TURN SIGNAL BLINKS QUICKLY ............................................................8-6
HORN DOES NOT SOUND ......................................................................8-6
GEN
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION INFO
EAS00014
GENERAL INFORMATION
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION
EAS00017
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number 1 is
stamped into the right side of the steering head
pipe. 1
EAS00018
MODEL LABEL
The model label 1 is affixed to the frame. This
information will be needed to order spare
parts.
1-1
GEN
FEATURES INFO
FEATURES
OUTLINE
The main function of a fuel supply system is to provide fuel to the combustion chamber at the opti-
mum air-fuel ratio in accordance with the engine operating conditions and the atmospheric tempera-
ture.
In the conventional carburetor system, the air-fuel ratio of the mixture that is supplied to the com-
bustion chamber is created by the volume of the intake air and the fuel that is metered by the jet that
is used in the respective chamber.
Despite the same volume of intake air, the fuel volume requirement varies by the engine operating
conditions, such as acceleration, deceleration, or operating under a heavy load. Carburetors that
meter the fuel through the use of jets have been provided with various auxiliary devices, so that an
optimum air-fuel ratio can be achieved to accommodate the constant changes in the operating con-
ditions of the engine.
As the requirements for the engine to deliver more performance and cleaner exhaust gases
increase, it becomes necessary to control the air-fuel ratio in a more precise and finely tuned man-
ner. To accommodate this need, this model has adopted an electronically controlled fuel injection
(FI) system, in place of the conventional carburetor system. This system can achieve an optimum
air-fuel ratio required by the engine at all times by using a microprocessor that regulates the fuel
injection volume according to the engine operating conditions detected by various sensors.
The adoption of the FI system has resulted in a highly precise fuel supply, improved engine
response, better fuel economy, and reduced exhaust emissions.
3 45 6 7
8 9
0
A
B
C
H G 8 FE D
1 Liner control valve 7 Throttle position sensor C Lean angle cut-off switch
2 Intake air pressure sensor 2 8 Spark plug D Oil temperature sensor
3 Intake air temperature sensor 9 Relay unit E Decompression solenoid
4 Intake air pressure sensor 1 0 ECU F Crankshaft position sensor
5 Engine temperature sensor A Battery G Cylinder identification sensor
6 Atmospheric pressure sensor B Fuel pump H Ignition coil
1-2
GEN
FEATURES INFO
FI SYSTEM
The fuel pump delivers fuel to the injector via the fuel filter. The pressure regulator maintains the
fuel pressure that is applied to the injector at only 2.55 kg/cm2 higher than the intake manifold pres-
sure. Accordingly, when the energizing signal from the ECU energizes the injector, the fuel passage
opens, causing the fuel to be injected into the intake manifold only during the time the passage
remains open. Therefore, the longer the length of time the injector is energized (injection duration),
the greater the volume of fuel that is supplied. Conversely, the shorter the length of time the injector
is energized (injection duration), the lesser the volume of fuel that is supplied.
The injection duration and the injection timing are controlled by the ECU. Signals that are input from
the throttle position sensor, crankshaft position sensor, intake air pressure sensor, atmospheric
pressure sensor, intake temperature sensor, engine temperature sensor, and oil temperature sen-
sor enable the ECU to determine the injection duration. The injection timing is determined through
the signals from the crankshaft position sensor and the cylinder identification sensor. As a result,
the volume of fuel that is required by the engine can be supplied at all times in accordance with the
driving conditions.
Illustration is for reference only.
2
È
1
#2 #1
A 3 É
5
4 7
9
6
8 Ê
0 B
1 Fuel pump 7 Intake air pressure sensor È Fuel system

2 Pressure regulator 8 ECU É Air system
3 Fuel injector 9 Atmospheric pressure sensor Ê Control system
4 Throttle body 0 Engine temperature sensor
5 Intake temperature sensor A Cylinder identification sensor
6 Throttle position sensor B Crankshaft position sensor
1-3
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Fuel control block
The fuel control block consists of the following main components:
Component Function
Control block ECU Total FI system control
Throttle body Air volume control
Pressure regulator Fuel pressure adjustment
Sensor block Intake air pressure sensor Intake air pressure detection
Atmospheric pressure sensor Atmospheric pressure detection
Engine temperature sensor Engine temperature detection
Intake temperature sensor Intake temperature detection
Throttle position sensor Throttle angle detection
Oil temperature sensor Engine oil temperature detection
Cylinder identification sensor Reference position detection
Crankshaft position sensor Crankshaft position detection and engine
RPM detection
Speed sensor Speed detection
Actuator block Injector Fuel injection
Fuel pump Fuel feed
Air Induction system, air cut valve Induction of secondary air
Liner control valve First idle control (see page 1-28)
An FI warning light is provided on meter panel.
1-4
GEN
FEATURES INFO
COMPONENTS
ECU (Electronic Control Unit)
The ECU is mounted underneath the seat, above the battery box. The main functions of the ECU
are ignition control, fuel control, self-diagnosis, and load control.
• ECU’s internal construction and functions
The main components and functions of the ECU can be broadly divided into the following four
items:
A. Power supply circuit
The power supply circuit obtains power from the battery (12 V) to supply the power (more than
5 V) that is required for operating the ECU.
B. Input interface circuits
The input interface circuits convert the signals output by all the sensors into digital signals,
which can be processed by the CPU, and input them into the CPU.
C. CPU (Central Processing Unit)
The CPU determines the condition of the sensors in accordance with the level of the signal that
is output by the respective sensor. Then, the signals are temporarily stored on the RAM in the
CPU. Based on those stored signals and the basic processing program on the ROM, the CPU
calculates the fuel injection duration, injection timing, and ignition timing, and then sends con-
trol commands to the respective output interface circuits.
D. Output interface circuits
The output interface circuits convert the control signals output by the CPU into actuating sig-
nals for the respective actuators in order to actuate them. They also output commands to the
indicator and relay output circuits as needed.
Battery
ECU
Power
supply
Input circuit Output
interface circuit interface circuit
Waveform Injector drive

Hall sensor CPU Injector
shaping circuit output circuit
signal
(for cylinder
identification)
Waveform
Pickup coil signal Ignition output circuit Ignition coil
shaping circuit
(for identifying the
crankshaft position)
Lamp drive
Switches Digital input circuit Indicating lamp
output circuit
RAM/ROM
MEMORY
A/D converter Relay drive
Sensors Relay
input circuit output circuit
1-5
GEN
FEATURES INFO
• Ignition control
The ignition timing control uses the signals from the throttle position sensor (to detect the angle of
the throttle), and the crankshaft position sensor (to detect the speed of the engine) and the speed
sensor. This control establishes an ignition timing that suits the operating condition of the engine
through compensations made to the basic ignition timing control map. The ignition energizing
duration control establishes the energizing duration to suit the operating conditions by calculating
the energizing duration in accordance with the signal received from the crankshaft position sensor
and the battery voltage.
• Fuel control
The fuel control function of the ECU controls the injection timing and injection duration. The injec-
tion timing control controls the injection timing during the starting of the engine and the injection
timing during the normal operation of the engine, based on the signals received from the crank-
shaft position sensor and the cylinder identification sensor. The injection duration control deter-
mines the duration of injection based on the signals received from the atmospheric pressure
sensors, temperature sensors, and the position sensors, to which compensations are made to suit
various conditions such as the weather, atmospheric pressure, starting, acceleration, and deceler-
ation.
• Load control
The ECU effects load control in the following manner:
1. Stopping the fuel pump and injectors when the motorcycle overturns
The ECU turns OFF the fuel injection system relay when the lean angle cut-off switch is tripped.
2. Operating the headlight illumination relay
The ECU controls the headlight relay in accordance with the engine speed as required by the
daytime illumination specification.
3. Operating the liner control valve
The ECU controls the liner control valve to increase the intake air volume for starting the engine
under cold conditions.
4. Operating the automatic decompression solenoid valve
The ECU controls the operation of the automatic decompression solenoid valve when the
engine is started.
1-6
GEN
FEATURES INFO
• Self-diagnosis function
The ECU is equipped with a self-diagnosis function to ensure that the engine control system is
operating normally. The ECU mode functions include a diagnosis mode in addition to the normal
mode.
Normal mode
• To check for any blown bulbs, this mode illuminates a warning light while the main switch is
turned ON, and while the starter switch is being pressed.
• If the starting disable warning is activated, this mode alerts the rider by blinking the warning light
while the start switch is being pressed.
• If a malfunction occurs in the system, this mode provides an appropriate substitute characteristic
operation, and alerts the rider of the malfunction by illuminating a warning light. After the engine
is stopped, this mode displays a fault code on the clock LCD.
Diagnosis mode
• In this mode, a diagnostic code is input into the ECU through the operation of the operating
switch on the meter, and the ECU displays the values output by the sensors or actuates the
actuators in accordance with the diagnostic code. Whether the system is operating normally can
be checked by observing the illumination of the warning light, the values displayed on the meter,
or the actuating state of the actuators.
1-7
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Fuel pump
The fuel pump, which is mounted in the fuel tank, draws the fuel directly from the tank and pumps it
to the injector.
A filter that is provided in the fuel pump prevents any debris in the fuel tank from entering the fuel
system downstream of the pump.
The pump consists of a pump unit, electric motor, filter, and valves.
The pump unit is a Wesco type rotary pump that is connected to the motor shaft.
A relief valve is provided to prevent the fuel pressure from rising abnormally if the fuel hose
becomes clogged. This valve opens when the fuel pressure at the discharge outlet reaches
between 440 and 640 kpa, and returns the fuel to the fuel tank.
4
5
È É 4 3
5
3 Ê
1 1
1 Fuel filter È From main fuel tank

2 Fuel inlet strainer É To injectors
3 Fuel inlet Ê To main fuel tank
4 Fuel outlet
5 Air vent pipe
1-8
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Pressure regulator
It regulates the fuel pressure that is applied to the injectors that supply fuel to the cylinders in order
to maintain a constant pressure.
The fuel that is delivered by the fuel pump fills the fuel chamber through the fuel inlet of the regulator
and exerts pressure on the diaphragm in the direction for opening the valve.
A spring that is provided in the spring chamber exerts pressure on the diaphragm in the direction for
closing the valve, in contrast to the pressure of the fuel. Thus, the valve cannot open unless the fuel
pressure overcomes the spring force.
By the atmospheric pressure applied to the spring chamber and when the fuel pressure exceeds the
sum of the atmospheric pressure and spring force, the diaphragm opens the valve, allowing fuel to
return to the fuel tank from the return hose.
Therefore, the fuel pressure applied to the injectors by the pressure regulator is controlled by the
atmospheric pressure and the spring force to maintain the fuel pressure in accordance to the
changes of the atmospheric pressure.
1 2
3
8
7
4
1 Spring chamber 4 Fuel inlet 7 Valve È Spring pressure

2 Spring 5 Fuel outlet 8 Atmospheric pressure É Fuel pressure
3 Diaphragm 6 Fuel chamber sensor
1-9
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Fuel injector
Upon receiving injection signals from the ECU, the fuel injector injects fuel. In the normal state, the
core is pressed downward by the force of the spring, as illustrated. The needle that is integrated
with the bottom of the core keeps the fuel passage closed.
When the current flows to the coil in accordance with the signal from the ECU, the core is drawn
upward, allowing the flange that is integrated with the needle to move to the spacer. Since the dis-
tance of the movement of the needle is thus kept constant, the opening area of the fuel passage
also becomes constant. Because the pressure difference of the fuel to the intake manifold pressure
is kept constant by the pressure regulator, the fuel volume varies in proportion to the length of time
the coil is energized. The injector that has been recently adopted has a four-hole type injection ori-
fice that enhances the atomization of fuel and improves combustion efficiency.
7 4
1 Fuel 5 Needle
2 Coil 6 Inject
3 Core 7 Flange
4 Spacer
1 - 10
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Crankshaft position sensor
The crankshaft position sensor uses the signals of the crankshaft position sensor that is mounted on
the left side of the crankshaft. When the rotation of the pickup rotor that is attached to the crankshaft
causes the projections on the rotor to pass by the crankshaft position sensor, an electromotive force
is generated in the coil. The voltage of this force is then input into the ECU, which calculates the
position of the crankshaft and the speed of the engine. The ignition timing is then determined in
accordance with the calculated data, in order to determine the corresponding injection timing.
Based on the changes in the time intervals of the signals generated by the crankshaft position sen-
sor, the ECU calculates the ignition timing advance to suit the operating conditions. The injection
timing is also advanced in accordance with the ignition timing in order to supply fuel to the engine at
an optimal timing.
È
I
1
IT
00
10˚ X-
H
5P
2 3
#1 Ë Ì Í Î Ë Ì Í
#2 Í Î Ë Ì Í Î
4 5
Ê
1 Pickup rotor È Direction of rotation

2 Identification of cylinder #1 (82° BTDC) É Compression stroke of cylinder #1 (10° BTDC)
3 Ignition of cylinder #1 (10° BTDC) Ê Crankshaft position sensor
4 Identification of cylinder #2 Ë Compression
5 Ignition of cylinder #2 Ì Combustion
Í Exhaust
Î Intake
1 - 11
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Cylinder identification sensor
The cylinder identification sensor is installed on the camshaft drive gear cover. When the cam of cyl-
inder #1 rotates, the pickup rotor installed on the cam also rotates. When the pickup rotor passes by
the sensor, trigger poles on the rotor generate a signal and send it to the ECU. Based on this signal
and the signal from the crankshaft position sensor, the ECU then actuates the injectors to supply
fuel.
Cylinder identification
When the crank angle is 110 degrees or higher, no signals are transmitted from the crankshaft posi-
tion sensor to the ECU. Once the crank angle is less than 110 degrees, the first signal that the ECU
receives from the sensor identifies cylinder #1 at 82° BTDC. When the ECU receives a signal from
the cylinder identification sensor, cylinder #1 is at 82° BTDC on the exhaust stroke. When the ECU
does not receive a signal from the cylinder identification sensor, cylinder #1 is at 82° BTDC on the
compression stroke.
3 2 1
#1 Ê Ë Ì Í Ê Ë Ì Í
#2 Ì Í Ê Ë Ì Í Ê Ë
4 5
È
1 Front cylinder camshaft È Crankshaft position sensor signal

2 Front cylinder camshaft end cover É Cylinder identification sensor signal
3 Cylinder identification sensor Ê Compression
4 Exhaust stroke of cylinder #1 (82° BTDC) Ë Combustion
5 Compression stroke of cylinder #1 (82° BTDC) Ì Exhaust
Í Intake
1 - 12
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor measures the intake air volume by detecting the position of the throttle
valve. It detects the mechanical angle of the throttle valve through the positional relationship
between the moving contact that moves in unison with the throttle shaft and the resistor board. In
actual operation, the ECU supplies 5 V power to both ends of the resistor board and the voltage that
is output by the throttle position sensor is used to determine the angle of the throttle valve.
È
5.0
1
4.0
3.88
3.0
2
2.0
3
1.0
0.68 V
Ê Ë
17˚ 97˚
É
1 Moving contact È Output voltage

2 Resistor board É Idling output position
3 Spring Ê Full close
Ë Full open
1 - 13
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Intake air pressure sensor and atmospheric pressure sensor
• Intake air pressure sensor
The intake air pressure sensor is used for measuring the intake air volume. The intake air volume of
every intake stroke is proportionate to the intake air pressure. Therefore, the intake air volume can be
measured by measuring the intake air pressure. The intake air pressure sensor converts the mea-
sured intake air pressure into electrical signals and sends those signals to the ECU. When the intake
air pressure is introduced into the sensor unit, which contains a vacuum chamber on one side of the
silicon diaphragm, the silicon chip that is mounted on the silicon diaphragm converts the intake air
pressure into electrical signals. Then, an integrated circuit (IC) amplifies and adjusts the signals and
makes temperature compensations, in order to generate electrical signals that are proportionate to
the pressure.
• Atmospheric pressure sensor
The atmospheric pressure sensor is used for making compensations to the changes in the air
density caused by the changes in the atmospheric pressure (particularly at high altitudes). The
operating principle and function of the atmospheric pressure sensor are the same as those of the
aforementioned intake air pressure sensor.
4
2
3
7 8 9
0
6
A
(V)
5
4.00
È
B
C 1.842
0.789
D
P É 20 46 101
1 EMI shield 6 Silicon diaphragm A Lead pin È Output voltage

2 Sensor unit 7 Vacuum chamber B Stem É Input pressure
3 Through condenser 8 Solder C Pressure induction pipe
4 Hybrid IC 9 Silicon chip D Atmospheric pressure,
5 Cap 0 Gold wire intake air pressure
1 - 14
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Engine temperature sensor
The signals from the engine temperature sensor are used primarily for making fuel volume compen-
sations during starting and warm-up. The engine temperature sensor converts the temperature of
the engine into electrical signals and sends them to the ECU.
2 È
67.0
1
10.0
0.99
4
5
-20(-4) 0(32) 20(68) 40(104) 60(140) 100(212) É
1 Connector 5 Holder
2 Terminal È Resistance kΩ
3 Tube É Temperature °C (°F)
4 Thermistor
Intake temperature sensor

The intake temperature sensor corrects the deviation of the air-fuel mixture that is associated with
the changes in the intake air density, which are created by the changes in the intake air temperature
that occur due to atmospheric temperatures. This sensor uses a semi-conductor thermistor that has
a large resistance at low temperatures and a small resistance at high temperatures. The thermistor
converts the temperature-dependent changes in resistance into electrical resistance values, which
are then input into the ECU.
1 È
2
6.0
0.34
4
5 -20(-4) 0(32) 20(68) 40(104) 60(140) 80(212) É
1 Connector 5 Holder
2 Terminal È Resistance kΩ
3 Tube É Temperature °C (°F)
4 Thermistor
1 - 15
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Lean angle cut-off switch
The lean angle cut-off switch stops the supply of fuel to the engine in case the motorcycle overturns.
When the motorcycle is in the normal state, the cut-off switch outputs a constant voltage of approxi-
mately 1.0 V (low level). When the motorcycle tilts, the float in the switch tilts in proportion to the tilt
of the motorcycle. However, the voltage output to the ECU remains unchanged at the low level.
When the tilt of the motorcycle exceeds 70 degrees (according to the tilt of the float), the signal from
the sensor increases to approximately 4.0 V (high level). When the ECU receives the high-level volt-
age, it determines that the motorcycle has overturned, and stops the delivery of fuel to the engine by
turning OFF the fuel injection system relay that powers the fuel pump and the injectors. Once the
cut-off switch is tripped, the ECU maintains this state; therefore, even if the motorcycle has recov-
ered its upright position, this state will not be canceled unless the main switch is turned OFF, and
then turned back ON.
˚ 65
65 ˚
ON ON
1
3 4
È V
É 4.0
Ì
Ê 1.0
20˚ 40˚ 60˚ 80˚ Ë

65˚
1 Shaft È Output voltage

2 Float É High level
3 Magneto Ê Low level
4 IC unit Ë Cut-off switch tilt angle
Ì Fuel injection system relay OFF
1 - 16
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Operation and control
The fuel injection timing, injection duration, ignition timing, and the coil energizing duration are con-
trolled by the ECU. To determine the basic injection timing, the ECU calculates the intake air volume
through the signals from the intake air pressure sensor, throttle position sensor, cylinder identifica-
tion sensor, and crankshaft position sensor.
Furthermore, the ECU calculates the final injection timing by adding the following compensations to
the aforementioned basic injection duration: those obtained from the state of acceleration, as well
as those based on the signals from various sensors such as the engine temperature, intake temper-
ature, atmospheric. At the same time, the ECU assesses the crankshaft position through the signals
from the cylinder identification sensor and the crankshaft position sensor. Then, when the ECU
determines that it is time to inject fuel, it sends an injection command to the injectors. Furthermore,
the ECU also controls the length of time the coil is energized by calculating the ignition timing and
the coil energizing duration based on the signals from these sensors.
Determining the basic injection duration
The intake air volume determines the basic injection duration. In order to operate the engine in an
optimal condition, it is necessary to supply fuel at an air-fuel ratio that corresponds appropriately to
the volume of intake air that is constantly changing, and to ignite it an appropriate timing. The ECU
controls the basic injection duration based on the intake air volume and engine speed data.
Detection of intake air volume

The intake air volume is detected primarily through the signals from the throttle position sensor and
the intake air pressure sensor. The intake air volume is determined in accordance with the signals
from the atmospheric pressure sensor, intake temperature sensor, and the engine speed data.
Composition of basic injection duration
Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï Ì
Ñ
È
Ð
Ó
Ò
É
È RPM Ì Idle Ð Start

É Injection duration Í Acceleration Ñ After start
Ê Cranking Î Constant Ò Basic injection duration
Ë Warm-up Ï Deceleration Ó Voltage compensation duration
1 - 17
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Fuel injection duration during linear control valve operation
The linear control valve supplies air to the intake manifold when starting or during engine warm up.
The intake air volume determines the basic injection duration. As the intake air increases through
the linear control valve, the intake air volume corrects the basic injection duration.
The correction volume changes according to the position of the valve at starting and when the valve
position changes to accommodate the engine temperature and engine oil temperature as the intake
air volume increases.
When the engine oil temperature reaches 80 °C (176 °F) or higher, the linear control valve fully
closes to stop the air volume from increasing and control returns to basic injection control.
Composition of basic injection duration during linear control valve operation
Ñ
È
Ð
Ò Ó
Ô
É
È Engine speed (r/min) Ï Deceleration

É Injection duration Ð Starting
Ê Cranking Ñ After starting
Ë Warm up Ò Basic injection duration
Ì Idling Ó Voltage compensation duration
Í Acceleration Ô Correction volume
Î Fixed
1 - 18
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Determining the final injection duration
The intake air volume determines the basic injection duration. However, at a given intake air vol-
ume, the volume of fuel that is required varies by the engine operating conditions such as accelera-
tion or deceleration, or by weather conditions. This system uses various sensors to precisely check
these conditions, applies compensations to the basic injection duration, and determines the final
injection duration based on the operating condition of the engine.
Intake air pressure Atmospheric

Battery voltage
pressure
Engine rpm
Basic injection Injection
Compensation
quantity command
Degree of
opening of Engine Intake air
throttle temperature temperature
The fuel is cut off under conditions that do not require fuel, in order to stop the injection.
Composition of final injection duration
Ñ
È
Ð
1
4
2 5
É
3
6 7
1 Injection at start *1 7 Voltage compensation duration Í Acceleration

2 After-start enrichment *2 Î Constant
3 Warm-up enrichment *3 È RPM Ï Deceleration
4 Acceleration compensation *5 É Injection duration Ð Start
5 Fuel cut-off Deceleration Ê Cranking Ñ After start
compensation *5 Ë Warm-up
6 Basic injection duration Ì Idle
1 - 19
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Reactive injection duration:
A lag is created between the time the ECU outputs a fuel injection signal to the injector and the time
the injector actually opens. Therefore, the ECU calculates this lag in advance before sending the
actuation signal to the injector. The battery voltage determines the reactive injection duration.
• High voltage → short reactive injection duration
• Low voltage → long reactive injection duration
LIST OF FUEL INJECTION COMPENSATIONS

Compensation item Check item Sensor used
Starting injection *1 Engine temperature Engine temperature sensor
After-start injection:
After-start enrichment *2 Engine temperature Engine temperature sensor
Warm-up enrichment *3 Engine temperature Engine temperature sensor
Intake temperature compensation *4 Intake temperature Intake temperature sensor
Acceleration compensation/ Intake air pressure Intake air pressure sensor
deceleration compensation *5
Throttle position Throttle position sensor
Engine temperature Engine temperature sensor
1 - 20
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Fuel control during normal driving
In synchronous injection during normal driving, fuel is injected on a cylinder-by-cylinder basis when
all of the conditions below are met:
1 Other than the stop mode
2 Cylinder identification completed
3 Other than overrun
To determine the injection timing, the ECU calculates the injection timing through the use of the 3D
control map provided in the ECU, which is based on the throttle position and the engine speed.
The injection duration is based on the basic injection duration (obtained through the throttle position,
intake air pressure, and engine speed) to which injection duration compensation (based on the sig-
nals from various sensors such as the intake temperature sensor, atmospheric pressure sensor) is
added to determine the final injection duration. As a result, fuel is supplied to the cylinders.
• Normal synchronous injection
3 4
È
É
Ê
1
Ë
#1 Ì Í Î Ï Ì Í Î
Ê
2
Ë
#2 Í Î Ï Ì Í Î Ï Ì
1 Injector #1 È Crankshaft position sensor Ì Combustion

2 Injector #2 É Crankshaft identification signal Í Exhaust
3 Identification of cylinder #1 Ê Injection Î Intake
4 Identification of cylinder #2 Ë Stop Ï Compression
1 - 21
GEN
FEATURES INFO
• Fuel injection control during normal driving
É Ê
È #1 cylinder fuel injection timing

É Basic injection duration
Ê Various types of fuel injection duration compensations
Ë Final injection duration (É + Ê)
1 - 22
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Fuel injection compensation control
• Starting injection control
The engine temperature is used for determining the injection duration in order to ensure proper start
ability. To suit the engine’s operating conditions, the starting injection duration is determined by
applying a starting compensation coefficient to the basic injection duration, which forms the basis of
the injection duration.
(Starting injection duration = basic injection duration × injection compensation coefficient)
During starting, injection cylinder control is effected together with injection duration compensation.
The injectors of all cylinders inject only once immediately after receiving a signal from the crankshaft
position sensor during the cranking of the engine. This is called asynchronous injection, in contrast
to the synchronous injection, which is a normal cylinder injection that is effected on a cylinder-by-
cylinder basis.
After the asynchronous injection is completed, and until the ECU receives signals from the cylinder
identification sensor with the engine speed at 400 r/min or higher, the injectors are actuated in pairs
in sync with the signals from the crankshaft position sensor: cylinder #1 and cylinder #2. Controlling
both the injection duration and the injection cylinders in this manner enables a precise supply of fuel
in accordance with the starting conditions of the engine.
• Starting injection duration
1 Basic injection duration
2 After-start compensation injection duration
3 Low
4 High
È Ê
2
È Injection duration
1 É Engine temperature
0 (˚C) Ê Extended duration
É
3 4
• Starting cylinder control
45
È
É
1
Ê
É
2
Ê
3
Ë
1 Injector #1 È Crankshaft position sensor

2 Injector #2 É Injection
3 Starting asynchronous injection Ê Stop
4 Identification of cylinder #1 Ë Synchronous injection
5 Identification of cylinder #2
1 - 23
GEN
FEATURES INFO
• After-start enrichment
After-start enrichment provides enrichment compensation during a prescribed duration following the
starting (firing) of the engine. While the amount of fuel enrichment is determined by the after-start
enrichment coefficient, the coefficient varies by the engine temperature. Although the engine tem-
perature determines the initial starting enrichment coefficient, the coefficient subsequently changes
in accordance with the damping factor. The enrichment ratio is the highest immediately after the
engine is started, and diminishes gradually. The enrichment of fuel in this manner ensures a stable
engine operation immediately after the engine is started.
Changes in compensation coefficient and compensation injection duration
Engine speed Long After-start enrichment

Injection
Stopped Basic injection
Cranking duration
duration
Short
Initial starting enrichment Starting enrichment coefficient
coefficient (determined by Duration
engine temperature)
Changes in compensation coefficient

Compensation injection
duration
1 - 24
GEN
FEATURES INFO
• Warm-up enrichment
When the engine temperature is low, a warm-up coefficient is applied in accordance with the signals
from the engine temperature sensor in order to effect fuel enrichment. Because the engine temper-
ature determines the coefficient, the coefficient changes with the fluctuations in the engine tempera-
ture. The coefficient increases with the decrease in the engine temperature, and decreases with the
increase in the engine temperature. The ratio of fuel enrichment also changes with the changes in
the coefficient.

Large
Enrichment
coefficient
Long Warm-up enrichment

Injection
duration
Short Basic injection duration
Small
1.0
60 (˚C) Duration
Engine temperature
Low High
Changes in compensation coefficient Compensation injection duration
1 - 25
GEN
FEATURES INFO
• Acceleration enrichment
Acceleration enrichment is provided in accordance with the signals from the throttle position sensor.
As the rider operates the accelerator to accelerate the motorcycle from a constant speed, the throt-
tle position sensor actuates in unison with the accelerator. The ECU interprets that acceleration has
taken place through the throttle position sensor signal and executes acceleration enrichment. The
enrichment volume is determined by the acceleration enrichment coefficient. The coefficient
increases with the changes in the throttle position sensor, which also increases the actual enrich-
ment volume. The enrichment volume is executed in accordance with the acceleration enrichment
coefficient when the movement of the throttle position sensor has met the acceleration condition as
defined by the ECU. Thereafter, the enrichment volume is regulated by the coefficient that changes
in accordance with the damping rate.
(Acceleration injection duration = basic injection duration × acceleration compensation coef-

ficient)
Changes in acceleration
compensation coefficient
Acceleration enrichment volume
Large
Long
Changes in
throttle position
sensor angle Injection
duration
Small Short Basic injection duration

Duration Duration
Starting of acceleration
Starting of acceleration
Compensation injection duration
1 - 26
GEN
FEATURES INFO
• Deceleration control
Deceleration control is effected in accordance with the signals from the throttle position sensor. As
the rider operates the accelerator to decelerate the motorcycle that is in motion, the throttle position
sensor actuates in unison with the accelerator. When the engine speed is greater than a prescribed
value with the throttle fully closed (thus applying engine braking), the ECU executes a deceleration
fuel cut-off. The injection of fuel to all the cylinders is stopped when fuel cut-off control is executed,
thus improving fuel economy.
Ì
É
Ê
È Engine speed
É Duration
Ê Fuel cut-off control (stopping fuel injection)
Ë Basic injection duration
Ì Basic injection duration
• Over-revolution control
The over-revolution control of the ECU operates the ignition control and fuel cut-off control when the
engine speed becomes greater than the specified value. The over-revolution control first operates
the ignition control to reduce the ignition of each cylinder to keep the engine speed from rising. If the
engine speed increases after the ignition control is activated, the fuel cut-off control is activated. The
fuel cut-off control is first activated in cylinder #1, then in cylinder #2 as the engine speed increases
further.
In addition, specified engine speeds are set at each gear position, therefore, over-revolution control
can be achieved more accurately.
1 - 27
GEN
FEATURES INFO
FIRST IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM
This system temporarily increases the fuel injection volume of the injectors when starting a cold
engine and until the engine is warm. The system improves startability and stabilizes engine speed
during engine warm up.
Basic operation
The ECU receives a signal from the engine temperature sensor and determines the temperature of
the engine with the collected data. Based on this data, the ECU regulates the linear control valve.
The linear control valve sends air from the silencer air filter case to the intake manifold to increase
the intake air volume. When the engine is started and during engine warm up, the fuel injection vol-
ume is increased to compensate the increase in the air volume.
A signal from the ECU and the temperature of the engine immediately after starting, determine the
air volume introduced by the linear control valve. When the engine is running, the engine oil temper-
ature controls the linear control valve. If the temperature is low, the intake air volume increases. If
the temperature is high, the intake air volume decreases. Furthermore, if the temperature reaches
80 °C or higher, the valve fully closes to stop the intake air volume from increasing.
È
Ê
É
1 Liner control valve

È From silencer air filter case
É To intake manifold - cylinder #2
Ê To intake manifold - cylinder #1
1 - 28
GEN
FEATURES INFO
COMPONENTS
Linear control valve
The linear control valve sends air from the silencer box to the intake manifold to increase the intake
air volume.
The linear control valve consists of a stepper motor that operates the valve, a valve unit that is
attached to the motor, and a main body that distributes the intake air. The stepper motor has been
adopted to deduce malfunctions during operation and for high-precision control. The main body
contains air passages, which are opened and closed by the motor, which operates the valve. In
addition, a pipe to introduce air from the silencer air filter case and air pipes to distribute air to each
cylinder are installed on the linear control valve.
The stepper motor used in the XV1700 rotates exactly 15 degrees per step (1 pulse input). With
each step, the valve moves approximately 0.041 mm. The stepper motor is set to make a total of
146 steps, thus the total range of the valve, from fully closed to fully open, is approximately 6.08
mm.
The linear control valve is operated when the engine is started and adjusts its opening to accommo-
date the temperature of the engine. When the engine is started, the control data transfers from the
engine temperature to the engine oil temperature and adjusts the valve opening to accommodate
the engine oil temperature. When the engine oil temperature reaches 80 °C (176 °F) or higher, the
valve fully closes to stop the intake air volume from increasing.
In addition, the linear control valve fully closes when the main switch is turned off, but maintains its
current position if the engine is stopped with the engine stop switch or if the engine stalls. When the
engine is restarted, control starts at the maintained position.
È
1
1 Valve
È To intake manifold - cylinder #1
É From silencer air filter case
Ê To intake manifold - cylinder #2
1 - 29
GEN
FEATURES INFO
Instrument panel
Function indication
The indications of the self-diagnosis function can be checked and inspection operations can be per-
formed through the use of the tachometer on the instrument panel.
Based on the signals received from the sensors, the ECU inputs the signals into the tachometer.
Then, the conditions of the sensors appear on the clock and trip/odometer display of the tachome-
ter.
1. ECU transmission data and meter display
Mode ECU transmission data Meter indication Display description
Vehicle speed Tripmeter 4 digits including decimals
Engine warning Indicator lamp ON/OFF
Common to all
indicator lamp
modes
Self-diagnostic fault Clock LCD Shows trouble code in numbers
code
Normal mode Engine temperature Indicator lamp Engine temperature
Diagnostic code Clock LCD Shows diagnostic code in
DIAG mode numbers
Diagnosis sensor value Trip LCD Shows data for sensors
Note: If the exchange of data between the ECU and the meters is abnormal, the clock LCD shows
error “Er-1~4”. The clock LCD reverts to showing the time after the error has been corrected.
2
1
3
5 4
6
7
1 Tachometer 5 SELECT button

2 Clock 6 Speedometer assembly
3 Odometer/tripmeter/fuel reserve tripmeter 7 Engine trouble warning light
4 RESET button
1 - 30
GEN
FEATURES INFO
2. DIAG mode inspection and adjustment (multi-function meter)
Mode Selection (Make sure to disconnect the coupler from the fuel pump.)
DIAG mode Normal mode

1. While keeping both the SELECT and Turn “ON” the main switch.
RESET buttons pressed, turn “ON” the * The self-diagnostic function starts a sys-
main switch. Keep the buttons pressed for tem check.
8 seconds or more.
* All the segments are “OFF” except the System normal Malfunction detection
clock and the trip LCD. Normal meter display A fault code number
* “DIAG” appears on the clock LCD. appears on the clock
2. Simultaneously press the SELECT and LCD.
RESET buttons for 2 seconds or more to The engine trouble
select an item. warning light illumi-
nates.
(The engine cannot be started in this mode.)
Diagnosis mode
Enables the verification of the operation of the
actuator and various sensors.
* Turn the engine stop switch to “OFF”.
(Turn it “ON” when the diagnostic code is
09 or 03.)
1. Press the SELECT and RESET buttons to
select the Diagnosis mode.
* RESET button = decrement
* SELECT button = increment
* A diagnostic code number appears on the
clock LCD.
2. Checking the operation of the actuator
* Turn “ON” the engine stop switch to start
the operation.
3. Checking the operation of various sensors
* The condition of the operation appears on
the TRIP LCD.
4 3
1 Clock 3 RESET button

2 Odometer/tripmeter/fuel reserve tripmeter 4 SELECT button
1 - 31
GEN
IMPORTANT INFORMATION INFO
EAS00020
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND
DISASSEMBLY
1. Before removal and disassembly, remove all
dirt, mud, dust and foreign material.
2. Use only the proper tools and cleaning

equipment.
Refer to the “SPECIAL TOOLS”.
3. When disassembling, always keep mated
parts together. This includes gears, cylin-
ders, pistons and other parts that have been
“mated” through normal wear. Mated parts
must always be reused or replaced as an
assembly.
4. During disassembly, clean all of the parts

and place them in trays in the order of dis-
assembly. This will speed up assembly and
allow for the correct installation of all parts.
5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.
EAS00021
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all
replacements. Use oil and grease recom-
mended by Yamaha for all lubrication jobs.
Other brands may be similar in function and
appearance, but inferior in quality.
EAS00022
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS
1. When overhauling the engine, replace all
gaskets, seals and O-rings. All gasket sur-
faces, oil seal lips and O-rings must be
cleaned.
2. During reassembly, properly oil all mating
parts and bearings and lubricate the oil seal
lips with grease.
1 - 32
GEN
IMPORTANT INFORMATION INFO
EAS00023
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER
PINS
After removal, replace all lock washers/plates
1 and cotter pins. After the bolt or nut has
been tightened to specification, bend the lock
tabs along a flat of the bolt or nut.
EAS00024
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS
Install bearings and oil seals so that the manu-
facturer’s marks or numbers are visible. When
installing oil seals, lubricate the oil seal lips
with a light coat of lithium-soap-based grease.
Oil bearings liberally when installing, if appro-
priate.
1 Oil seal
CAUTION:
_
Do not spin the bearing with compressed

air because this will damage the bearing
surfaces.
1 Bearing
EAS00025
CIRCLIPS
Before reassembly, check all circlips carefully
and replace damaged or distorted circlips.
Always replace piston pin clips after one use.
When installing a circlip 1, make sure the
sharp-edged corner 2 is positioned opposite
the thrust 3 that the circlip receives.
4 Shaft
1 - 33
GEN
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS INFO
EAS00026
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS

Check the leads, couplers, and connectors for
stains, rust, moisture, etc.
1. Disconnect:
• lead
• coupler
• connector
2. Check:
• lead
• coupler
• connector
Moisture → Dry with an air blower.
Rust/stains → Connect and disconnect sev-
eral times.
3. Check:
• all connections
Loose connection → Connect properly.
NOTE:
_
If the pin 1 on the terminal is flattened, bend it

up.
4. Connect:
• lead
• coupler
• connector
NOTE:
_
Make sure all connections are tight.
5. Check:
• continuity (with the pocket tester)
Pocket tester
YU-03112
NOTE:
_
• If there is no continuity, clean the terminals.

• When checking the wire harness, perform
steps (1) to (3).
• As a quick remedy, use a contact revitalizer
available at most part stores.
1 - 34
GEN
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO
EAS00027
SPECIAL TOOLS
The following special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Use
only the appropriate special tools as this will help prevent damage caused by the use of inappropri-
ate tools or improvised techniques. Special tools, part numbers or both may differ depending on the
country.
When placing an order, refer to the list provided below to avoid any mistakes.
Tool No. Tool name/Function Illustration
Mity vac
YB-35956
This tool used to measure the vacuum
pressure.
Alternator rotor puller
YM-01080-A
This tool is used to remove the genera-
tor rotor.
Damper rod holder
YM-01423
This tool is used to hold the damper rod
assembly when loosening or tightening
the damper rod assembly bolt.
Rod holder
YM-01434
This tool is used to support the damper
adjusting rod.
Rod puller
Rod puller
YM-01437
These tools are used to pull up the front
fork damper rod.
Fork spring compressor
YM-01441
This tool is used to disassemble or
assemble the front fork legs.
Fork seal driver
YM-01442
This tool is used to install the front fork’s
oil seal and dust seal.
1 - 35
GEN
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO
Valve spring compressor set
YM-04019
This tool is used to remove or install the
valve assemblies.
Bearing driver
YM-04058
This tool is needed when installing the
crankshaft journal bearing.
Valve guide remover (ø6)
YM-04064-A
This tool is used to remove or install the
valve guides.
Valve guide installer (ø6)
YM-04065-A
This tool is used to install the valve
guides.
Valve guide reamer (ø6)
YM-04066
This tool is used to rebore the new
valve guides.
Bearing remover and installer
YM-28898
This tool is needed when removing or
installing the crankshaft journal bearing.
Timing light
YM-33277-A
This tool is used to check the ignition
timing.
Belt tension gauge
YM-03170
This tool is used to measure the drive
belt slack.
1 - 36
GEN
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO
Dynamic spark tester
YM-34487
This tool is used to check the ignition
system components.
Valve adjuster
YM-8035
This tool is used to adjust the valve
clearance.
Universal clutch holder
YM-91042
This tool is used to hold the clutch boss
when removing or installing the clutch
boss nut.
Primary sheave holder
This tool is used to hold the generator

YS-01880-A
rotor when removing or installing the
generator rotor bolt, generator shaft bolt
or crankshaft position sensor rotor bolt.
Piston pin puller
YU-01304
This tool is used to remove the piston
pins.
Micrometer (75 ~ 100 mm)
YU-03009
This tool is used to measure the piston
skirt diameter.
Cylinder bore gauge (50 ~ 100 mm)
YU-03017
This tool is used to measure the cylin-
der bore.
Pocket tester
YU-03112
This tool is used to check the electrical
system.
1 - 37
GEN
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO
Carburetor synchronizer
YU-08030
This gauge is needed for throttle bodies
synchronization.
Compression gauge set 14/18 mm
Compression gauge Compression gauge adapter 12 mm
YU-33223
Compression gauge
adapter
YU-33223-3 These tools are used to measure
engine compression.
Spanner wrench
YU-33975
This tool is used to loosen or tighten the
steering stem ring nuts.
Oil filter wrench
YU-38411
This tool is needed to loosen or tighten
the oil filter cartridge.
Inductive tachometer
YU-8036-A
This tool is used for check engine
speed.
Quick Gasket®
ACC-11001-05-01
This sealant is used to seal two mating
surfaces (e. g., crankcase mating sur-
faces).
Pressure gauge
Gauge Oil pressure adaptor E
YU-03153
Oil pressure adaptor E
YM-03129 These tools are needed to measure
engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure adapter
YM-03176
This tool is needed to measure fuel
pressure.
1 - 38
GEN
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO
Pivot shaft wrench
YM-01485
This tool is needed to loosen or tighten
the spacer bolt.
1 - 39
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Model code 5PX1 (USA) ----
5PX2 (California) ----
5PX3 (CDN) ----
Dimensions
Overall length 2,385 mm (93.9 in) ----
Overall width 955 mm (37.6 in) ----
Overall height 1,120 mm (44.1 in) ----
Seat height 725 mm (28.5 in) ----
Wheelbase 1,665 mm (65.6 in) ----
Minimum ground clearance 155 mm (6.10 in) ----
Minimum turning radius 3,400 mm (133.9 in) ----
Weight
Wet (with oil and a full fuel tank) 295 kg (650 lb) ----
Dry (without oil and fuel) 278 kg (613 lb) ----
Gross vehicle weight ratio (GVWR) 480 kg (1,058 lb) ----
Bias weight (dry) front 133 kg (293 lb) ----
Bias weight (dry) rear 145 kg (320 lb) ----
Maximum load (total of cargo, rider, 185 kg (408 lb) ----
passenger, and accessories)
2-1
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Engine
Engine type Air-cooled, 4-stroke, OHV ----
Displacement 1,670 cm3 (101.9 cu.in) ----
Cylinder arrangement
Bore × stroke
Compression ratio
V-type 2-cylinder
97 × 113 mm (3.82 × 4.45 in)
8.36 : 1
----
----
----
1
Engine idling speed 850 ~ 950 r/min ----
CO% 4.0 ~ 5.0 % ----
Vacuum pressure at engine idling
speed
50 kPa (375 mm Hg, 14.8 in Hg) ----
2
Standard compression pressure 1,200 kPa ----
(at sea level) (12.0 kg/cm2, 171 psi) at 200 r/min
Minimum compression pressure 1,000 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 145 psi) ----
Maximum compression pressure 1,400 kPa (14.0 kg/cm2, 203 psi) ----
Engine dry weight 108 kg (238 lb) ----
Fuel
Recommended fuel Unleaded fuel only (USA and California) ----
Regular unleaded gasoline only (CDN) ----
Fuel tank capacity
Total (including reserve) 15 L (13.2 Imp qt, 15.86 US qt) ----
Reserve only 3 L (2.64 Imp qt, 3.17 US qt) ----
Engine oil
Lubrication system Dry sump ----
Recommended oil Yamalube 4 (20W40) or SAE 20W40 type ----
SE motor oil (40 °F/5 °C or above)
(Non-Friction modified)
Quantity
Total amount 5.0 L (4.40 Imp qt, 5.29 US qt) ----
Engine 2.0 L (1.76 Imp qt, 2.11 US qt) ----
Oil tank 3.0 L (2.64 Imp qt, 3.17 US qt) ----
Without oil filter cartridge replace- 3.7 L (3.26 Imp qt, 3.91 US qt) ----
ment
With oil filter cartridge replacement 4.1 L (3.61 Imp qt, 4.33 US qt) ----
Oil pressure (hot) 60 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2, 8.5 psi) at 900 r/min ----
Relief valve opening pressure 600 kPa (6.0 kg/cm2, 85 psi) ----
Oil temperature 70 ~ 90 °C (158 ~ 194 °F) ----
2-2
Item Standard Limit
Transfer gear oil
Recommended oil SAE 80 API “GL-4” hypoid gear oil ----
Total amount 0.49 L (0.43 Imp qt, 0.52 US qt) ----
Periodic oil replacement 0.4 L (0.35 Imp qt, 0.42 US qt) ----
Oil filter
Oil filter type Cartridge (paper) ----
Bypass valve opening pressure 80 ~ 120 kPa ----
(0.8 ~ 1.2 kg/cm2, 11.3 ~ 17.1 psi)
Engine oil pump
Oil pump type Trochoid ----
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance 0 ~ 0.12 mm (0 ~ 0.0047 in) 0.17 mm
(0.0067 in)
Outer rotor to oil pump housing 0.03 ~ 0.08 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0031 in) 0.13 mm
clearance (feed pump) (0.0051 in)
Outer rotor to oil pump housing 0.06 ~ 0.11 mm (0.0024 ~ 0.0043 in) 0.16 mm
clearance (scavenging pump) (0.0063 in)
Transfer oil pump
Oil pump type Trochoid ----
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance 0.07 ~ 0.12 mm (0.0028 ~ 0.0047 in) 0.17 mm
(0.0067 in)
Outer rotor to oil pump housing clear- 0.03 ~ 0.08 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0031 in) 0.16 mm
ance (0.0063 in)
Bypass valve opening pressure 80 ~ 120 kPa ----
(0.8 ~ 1.2 kg/cm2, 11.3 ~ 17.1 psi)
Relief valve opening pressure 600 kPa (6.0 kg/cm2, 85 psi) ----
Oil pressure (hot) 60 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2, 8.5 psi) at 900 r/min ----
Starting system type Electric starter ----
Electric fuel injection
Model IMP-732 ----
Manufacturer NIPPON INJECTOR ----
Quantity 2 ----
Spark plugs
Model DPR7EA-9/X22EPR-U9 ----
Manufacturer NGK/DENSO ----
Quantity 4 ----
Spark plug gap 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0354 in) ----
Cylinder heads
Volume 98.6 ~ 103.6 cm3 (6.02 ~ 6.32 cu.in) ----
Max. warpage ---- 0.03 mm
(0.0012 in)
2-3
Item Standard Limit
Camshafts
Drive system Gear drive ----
Crankcase hole inside diameter 25.000 ~ 25.021 mm (0.9843 ~ 0.9851 in) ----
Camshaft cover hole inside diameter 28.000 ~ 28.021 mm (1.1024 ~ 1.1032 in) ----
Camshaft journal diameter 24.937 ~ 24.950 mm (0.9818 ~ 0.9823 in) ----
(crankcase side)
Camshaft journal diameter 27.967 ~ 27.980 mm (1.1011 ~ 1.1016 in) ----
(camshaft cover side)
Camshaft to crankcase clearance 0.050 ~ 0.084 mm (0.0020 ~ 0.0033 in) ----
Camshaft to camshaft cover clear- 0.020 ~ 0.054 mm (0.0008 ~ 0.0021 in) ----
ance
Camshaft intake cam dimensions
Measurement A 38.231 ~ 38.331 mm (1.5052 ~ 1.5091 in) 38.131 mm

(1.5012 in)
Measurement B 32.013 ~ 32.113 mm (1.2604 ~ 1.2643 in) 31.913 mm
(1.2564 in)
Camshaft exhaust cam dimensions
Measurement A 38.232 ~ 38.332 mm (1.5052 ~ 1.5091 in) 38.132 mm

(1.5013 in)
Measurement B 31.995 ~ 32.095 mm (1.2596 ~ 1.2636 in) 31.895 mm
(1.2557 in)
2-4
Item Standard Limit
Rocker arms, Rocker arm shafts
Rocker arm inside diameter 18.000 ~ 18.018 mm (0.7087 ~ 0.7094 in) 18.036 mm
(0.7101 in)
Rocker arm shaft outside diameter 17.976 ~ 17.991 mm (0.7077 ~ 0.7083 in) 14.970 mm
(0.5894 in)
Rocker arm to rocker arm shaft clear- 0.009 ~ 0.042 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0017 in) 0.08 mm
ance (0.003 in)
Lift ratio (Y/X) 40.4/29.5 = 1.37 ----
Valves, valve seats, valve guides
Valve clearance (cold) ----
Intake 0 ~ 0.04 mm (0 ~ 0.0016 in) ----
Exhaust 0 ~ 0.04 mm (0 ~ 0.0016 in) ----
Valve dimensions
B C
D
A
Head Diameter Face Width Seat Width Margin Thickness
Valve head diameter A

Intake 33.9 ~ 34.1 mm (1.3346 ~ 1.3425 in) ----
Exhaust 27.9 ~ 28.1 mm (1.0984 ~ 1.1063 in) ----
Valve face width B
Intake 1.3 ~ 2.3 mm (0.0512 ~ 0.0906 in) ----
Exhaust 1.2 ~ 2.4 mm (0.0472 ~ 0.0945 in) ----
Valve seat width C
Intake 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 2.0 mm
(0.079 in)
Exhaust 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 2.0 mm
(0.079 in)
Valve margin thickness D
Intake 0.7 ~ 1.3 mm (0.0276 ~ 0.0512 in) 0.4 mm
(0.016 in)
Exhaust 0.7 ~ 1.3 mm (0.0276 ~ 0.0512 in) 0.4 mm
(0.016 in)
2-5
Item Standard Limit
Valve stem diameter
Intake 5.975 ~ 5.990 mm (0.2352 ~ 0.2358 in) 5.945 mm
(0.2341 in)
Exhaust 5.960 ~ 5.975 mm (0.2346 ~ 0.2352 in) 5.920 mm
(0.2331 in)
Valve guide inside diameter
Intake 6.000 ~ 6.012 mm (0.2362 ~ 0.2367 in) 6.05 mm
(0.2382 in)
Exhaust 6.000 ~ 6.012 mm (0.2362 ~ 0.2367 in) 6.05 mm
(0.2382 in)
Valve stem-to-valve guide clear-
ance
Intake 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) 0.08 mm
(0.0031 in)
Exhaust 0.025 ~ 0.052 mm (0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in) 0.1 mm
(0.0039 in)
Valve stem runout ---- 0.01 mm
(0.0004 in)
Valve seat material

Intake PB 6 ----
Exhaust V557W ----
Valve springs
Inner springs
Free length
Intake 38.26 mm (1.51 in) 36.26 mm
(1.43 in)
Exhaust 38.26 mm (1.51 in) 36.26 mm
(1.43 in)
Spring rate-intake (K1) 7.3 N/mm (41.68 lb/in) ----
Spring rate-exhaust (K1) 7.3 N/mm (41.68 lb/in) ----
Installed length (valve closed)
Intake 29.0 mm (1.14 in) ----
Exhaust 29.0 mm (1.14 in) ----
2-6
Item Standard Limit
Compressed spring force
(installed)
Intake 63 ~ 73 N (6.3 ~ 7.3 kg, 13.9 ~ 16.1 lb) ----
Exhaust 63 ~ 73 N (6.3 ~ 7.3 kg, 13.9 ~ 16.1 lb) ----
Spring tilt
Intake ---- 2.5°/2.4 mm

(2.5°/0.094 in)
Exhaust ---- 2.5°/2.4 mm
(2.5°/0.094 in)
Winding direction (top view)
Intake Counterclockwise ----
Exhaust Counterclockwise ----
Outer springs
Free length
Intake 43.25 mm (1.70 in) 41.26 mm
(1.62 in)
Exhaust 43.25 mm (1.70 in) 41.26 mm
(1.62 in)
Installed length (valve closed)
Intake 31.0 mm (1.22 in) ----
Exhaust 31.0 mm (1.22 in) ----
Compressed spring force
(installed)
Intake 139 ~ 161 N ----
(13.9 ~ 16.1 kg, 30.6 ~ 35.5 lb)
Exhaust 139 ~ 161 N ----
(13.9 ~ 16.1 kg, 30.6 ~ 35.5 lb)
2-7
Item Standard Limit
Spring tilt
Intake ---- 2.5°/2.4 mm

(2.5°/0.094 in)
Exhaust ---- 2.5°/2.4 mm
(2.5°/0.094 in)
Winding direction (top view)
Intake Clockwise ----
Exhaust Clockwise ----
Valve lifters
Valve lifter outside diameter 22.9680 ~ 22.9744 mm ----
(0.9043 ~ 0.9045 in)
Valve lifter case inside diameter 23.000 ~ 23.021 mm (0.9055 ~ 0.9063 in) ----
Valve lifter-to-valve lifter case clear- 0.0256 ~ 0.0530 mm (0.0010 ~ 0.0021 in) ----
ance
Valve push rods
Valve push rod 1 length 288.5 mm (11.358 in) ----
Valve push rod 2 length 290.5 mm (11.437 in) ----
Valve push rod runout 0.3 mm (0.012 in) ----
Cylinders
Material Aluminum alloy ----
Sleeve type Ceramic composite plated ----
Bore 97.000 ~ 97.010 mm (3.8189 ~ 3.8193 in) ----
Max. taper ---- 0.05 mm
(0.00197 in)
Max. out of round ---- 0.05 mm
(0.00197 in)
2-8
Item Standard Limit
Pistons
Piston-to-cylinder clearance 0.025 ~ 0.050 mm (0.001 ~ 0.002 in) 0.15 mm
(0.006 in)
Diameter D 96.960 ~ 96.975 mm (3.8173 ~ 3.8179 in) ----
H
D
Height H 5 mm (0.20 in) ----

Piston pin bore (in the piston)
Diameter 22.004 ~ 22.015 mm (0.8663 ~ 0.8667 in) 22.045 mm
(0.8679 in)
Offset 1.0 mm (0.0394 in) ----
Piston pins
Outside diameter 21.991 ~ 22.000 mm (0.8658 ~ 0.8661 in) 21.971 mm
(0.8650 in)
Piston pin-to-piston pin bore clear- 0.004 ~ 0.024 mm (0.00016 ~ 0.00094 in) 0.074 mm
ance (0.0029 in)
Piston rings
Top ring
B
T
Ring type Barrel ----

Dimensions (B × T) 1.2 × 3.8 mm (0.047 × 0.150 in) ----
End gap (installed) 0.30 ~ 0.45 mm (0.012 ~ 0.018 in) 0.65 mm
(0.026 in)
Ring side clearance 0.03 ~ 0.08 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0031 in) 0.12 mm
(0.0047 in)
Plating/coating Chrome plated/parkerizing ----
2-9
Item Standard Limit
2nd ring
B
T
Ring type Taper ----

End gap (installed) 0.30 ~ 0.45 mm (0.012 ~ 0.018 in) 0.8 mm
(0.031 in)
Ring side clearance 0.03 ~ 0.07 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) 0.12 mm
(0.0047 in)
Plating/coating Parkerizing ----
Oil ring
B
T

End gap (installed) 0.2 ~ 0.7 mm (0.008 ~ 0.028 in) ----
Plating/coating Chrome plated/parkerizing ----
Connecting rods
Crankshaft pin-to-big end bearing 0.037 ~ 0.074 mm (0.0015 ~ 0.0029 in) ----
clearance
Bearing color code 1 = Blue, 2 = Black, 3 = Brown, 4 = Green, ----
5 = Yellow.
Connecting rod length 191.95 ~ 192.05 mm (7.557 ~ 7.561 in) ----
Crankshaft
C C
E
D
A
Width A 132.8 ~ 133.2 mm (5.228 ~ 5.244 in) ----
Max. runout C ---- 0.04 mm
(0.0016 in)
Big end side clearance D 0.320 ~ 0.474 mm (0.0126 ~ 0.0187 in) ----
Big end radial clearance E 0.037 ~ 0.074 mm (0.0015 ~ 0.0029 in) 0.09 mm
(0.0035 in)
Crankshaft journal-to-crankshaft- 0.030 ~ 0.060 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0024 in) 0.1 mm
journal bearing clearance (0.0039 in)
2 - 10
Item Standard Limit
Clutch
Clutch type Wet, multiple disc ----
Clutch release method Outer pull, rack and pinion (pull rod type) ----
Clutch release method operation Cable operation ----
Operation Left-hand operation ----
Clutch cable free play (at the end of 10 ~ 15 mm (0.39 ~ 0.59 in) ----
the clutch lever)
Friction plates
Thickness 2.9 ~ 3.1 mm (0.114 ~ 0.122 in) 2.8 mm
(0.110 in)
Plate quantity 9 ----
Clutch plates
Thickness 2.2 ~ 2.4 mm (0.087 ~ 0.094 in) ----
Plate quantity 8 ----
Max. warpage ---- 0.2 mm
(0.008 in)
Clutch springs
Free length 7 mm (0.276 in) ----
Spring quantity 1 ----
Min. length ---- 6.5 mm
(0.256 in)
Clutch housing thrust clearance 0.10 ~ 0.37 mm (0.0039 ~ 0.0146 in) ----
Clutch housing radial clearance 0.017 ~ 0.053 mm (0.0007 ~ 0.0021 in) ----
Primary reduction gear backlash tol- A-A, B-B, C-C, D-D, E-E ----
erance
Primary drive gear backlash Number A, B, C, D, E, F ----
Primary driven gear backlash Num- A, B, C, D, E, F ----
ber
2 - 11
Item Standard Limit
Transmission
Transmission type Constant mesh, 5-speed ----
Primary reduction system Spur gear ----
Primary reduction ratio 72/47 (1.532) ----
Secondary reduction system Belt drive ----
Secondary reduction ratio 35/32 × 70/32 (2.393) ----
Operation Left-foot operation ----
Gear ratios
1st gear 38/16 (2.375) ----
2nd gear 30/19 (1.579) ----
3rd gear 29/25 (1.160) ----
4th gear 29/31 (0.935) ----
5th gear 24/30 (0.800) ----
Max. main axle runout ---- 0.08 mm
(0.003 in)
Max. drive axle runout ---- 0.08 mm
(0.003 in)
Shifting mechanism
Shift mechanism type Guide bar ----
Max. shift fork guide bar bending ---- 0.025 mm
(0.001 in)
Shift fork thickness 6.26 ~ 6.39 mm (0.2465 ~ 0.2516 in) ----
Air filter type Wet element ----
Fuel pump
Pump type Electrical ----
Model (manufacturer) 5PX (MITSUBISHI) ----
Output pressure 392 ~ 588 kPa ----
(3.92 ~ 5.88 kg/cm2, 55.7 ~ 83.6 psi)
Throttle bodies
Model (manufacturer) × quantity AC40-B204 (MIKUNI) × 2 ----
Throttle cable free play (at the flange 4 ~ 6 mm (0.16 ~ 0.24 in) ----
of the throttle grip)
ID mark XV1700PC 5PX1 00 (USA and CAN) ----
XV1700PC 5PX2 10 (California) ----
Throttle valve size #100 ----
2 - 12
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Frame
Frame type Double cradle ----
Caster angle 29.5° ----
Trail 130 mm (5.12 in) ----
Front wheel
Wheel type Cast wheel ----
Rim
Size 18 M/C × MT 3.50 ----
18 × MT 3.50
Material Aluminum ----
Wheel travel 135 mm (5.31 in) ----
Wheel runout
Max. radial wheel runout ---- 1 mm
(0.04 in)
Max. lateral wheel runout ---- 0.5 mm
(0.02 in)
Rear wheel
Wheel type Cast wheel ----
Rim
Size 17 M/C × MT 6.00 ----
17 × MT 6.00
Material Aluminum ----
Wheel travel 110 mm (4.33 in) ----
Wheel runout
Max. radial wheel runout ---- 1 mm
(0.04 in)
Max. lateral wheel runout ---- 0.5 mm
(0.02 in)
Front tire
Tire type Tubeless ----
Size 120/70 ZR 18 M/C (59 W) ----
120/70 ZR 18 (59 W)
Model (manufacturer) D220FST (DUNLOP)/ ----
BT020FG (BRIDGESTONE)
Tire pressure (cold)
0 ~ 90 kg (0 ~ 198 lb) 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) ----
2
90 kg (198 lb) ~ Maximum load* 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm , 36 psi) ----
High-speed riding 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) ----
* Load is the total weight of the cargo,
rider, passenger and accessories.
Min. tire tread depth ---- 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
2 - 13
Item Standard Limit
Rear tire
Tire type Tubeless ----
Size 200/50 ZR 17 M/C (75 W) ----
200/50 ZR 17 (75 W)
Model (manufacturer) D220ST (DUNLOP)/ ----
BT020R (BRIDGESTONE)
Tire pressure (cold)
0 ~ 90 kg (0 ~ 198 lb) 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) ----
2
90 kg (198 lb) ~ Maximum load* 290 kPa (2.9 kgf/cm , 42 psi) ----
2
High-speed riding 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm , 36 psi) ----
* Load is the total weight of the cargo,
rider, passenger and accessories.
Min. tire tread depth ---- 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
Front brakes
Brake type Dual-disc brake ----
Operation Right-hand operation ----
Brake lever free play (lever end) 2 ~ 5 mm (0.08 ~ 0.20 in) ----
Recommended fluid DOT 4 ----
Brake discs
Diameter × thickness 298 × 5 mm (11.73 × 0.20 in) ----
Min. thickness ---- 4.5 mm
(0.18 in)
Max. deflection ---- 0.1 mm
(0.004 in)
Brake pad lining thickness 5.5 mm (0.22 in) 0.5 mm
(0.02 in)
Master cylinder inside diameter 14 mm (0.55 in) ----

Caliper cylinder inside diameter 27 mm (1.06 in) and 30.2 mm (1.19 in) ----
2 - 14
Item Standard Limit
Rear brake
Brake type Single-disc brake ----
Operation Right-foot operation ----
Brake pedal free play (P) 0 mm (0 in) ----
Brake pedal position 80 mm (3.2 in) ----
(from the top of the rider footrest to
the top of the brake pedal)
Recommended fluid DOT 4 ----
Brake discs
Diameter × thickness 282 × 6 mm (11.10 × 0.24 in) ----
Min. thickness ---- 5.5 mm
(0.22 in)
Max. deflection ---- 0.15 mm
(0.006 in)
Brake pad lining thickness 5.8 mm (0.23 in) 0.8 mm
(0.03 in)
Master cylinder inside diameter 12.7 mm (0.5 in) ----

Caliper cylinder inside diameter 41.3 mm (1.63 in) ----
Steering
Steering bearing type Taper roller bearings ----
Lock to Lock angle (left) 35° ----
Lock to Lock angle (right) 35° ----
Front suspension
Suspension type Telescopic fork ----
Front fork type Coil spring/oil damper ----
Front fork travel 135 mm (5.31 in) ----
Spring
Free length 296 mm (11.65 in) 291 mm
(11.46 in)
Spring rate (K1) 6.4 N/mm (0.64 kg/mm, 36.54 lb/in) ----
Spring rate (K2) 7.8 N/mm (0.78 kg/mm, 44.54 lb/in) ----
Spring stroke (K1) 0 ~ 85 mm (0 ~ 3.35 in) ----
Spring stroke (K2) 85 ~ 135 mm (3.35 ~ 5.31 in) ----
Optional spring available No ----
Fork oil
Recommended oil Suspension oil “01” ----
Quantity (each front fork leg) 476 cm3 (16.8 Imp oz, 16.1 US oz) ----
Level (from the top of the outer 100 mm (3.94 in) ----
tube and damper rod, with the outer
tube fully compressed, and without
the fork spring)
Inner tube outer diameter 41 mm (1.61 in) ----
2 - 15
Item Standard Limit
Rear suspension
Suspension type Swingarm (link suspension) ----
Rear shock absorber assembly type Coil spring/gas-oil damper ----
Rear shock absorber assembly travel 50 mm (1.97 in) ----
Spring
Free length 188 mm (7.4 in) 183 mm
(7.2 in)
Installed length 172 mm (6.77 in) ----
Spring rate (K1) 137 N/mm (13.7 kg/mm, 782.27 lb/in) ----
Spring stroke (K1) 0 ~ 50 mm (0 ~ 1.97 in) ----
Optional spring available No ----
Standard spring preload gas/air pres- 1,000 kPa (10 kg/cm2, 142 psi) ----
sure
Swingarm
Free play (at the end of the swin-
garm)
Radial ---- 1 mm
(0.04 in)
Axial ---- 1 mm
(0.04 in)
Drive belt
Model (manufacturer) UBD-0568 ----
Drive belt slack (on a sidestand) 6 ~ 8 mm (0.24 ~ 0.31 in) ----
Drive belt slack (on a suitable stand) 7 ~ 9 mm (0.28 ~ 0.35 in) ----
2 - 16
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
System voltage 12 V ----
Ignition system
Ignition system type Transistorized coil ignition (digital) ----
Ignition timing 10° BTDC at 900 r/min ----
Advancer type Electric ----
Crankshaft position sensor 248 ~ 372 Ω/Gy–B ----
resistance/color
Transistorized coil ignition unit model F8T914 (MITSUBISHI) ----
(manufacturer)
Ignition coils ----
Model (manufacturer) J0447 (DENSO) ----
Minimum ignition spark gap 6 mm (0.24 in) ----
Primary coil resistance 1.31 ~ 1.79 Ω ----
Secondary coil resistance 12 ~ 18 kΩ ----
Spark plug caps
Material Resin ----
Resistance 10 kΩ ----
Charging system
System type AC magneto ----
Model (manufacturer) F5PX/YAMAHA ----
Nominal output 14 V/31 A at 5,000 r/min ----
Stator coil resistance/color 0.12 ~ 0.20 Ω/W–W ----
Rectifier/regulator
Regulator type Semiconductor, short circuit ----
Model (manufacturer) FH001 (SHINDENGEN) ----
No-load regulated voltage 14.1 ~ 14.9 V ----
Rectifier capacity 35 A ----
Withstand voltage 200 V ----
Battery
Battery type (manufacturer) GT14B-4 (GS) ----
Battery voltage/capacity 12 V/12 AH ----
Specific gravity 1.320 ----
Ten hour rate amperage 1.2 A ----
Headlight type Halogen bulb ----
Indicator light
(voltage/wattage × quantity)
Meter light LED × 13 ----
Neutral indicator light LED × 1 ----
Turn signal indicator light LED × 2 ----
Fuel indicator light LED × 1 ----
High beam indicator light LED × 1 ----
Engine trouble warning light LED × 1 ----
2 - 17
Item Standard Limit
Bulbs (voltage/wattage × quantity)
Headlight 12 V 60 W/55 W × 1 ----
Licence plate light 12 V 5 W × 2 ----
Tail/brake light LED ----
Front turn signal/position light 12 V 23 W/8 W × 2 ----
Rear turn signal light 12 V 23 W × 2 ----
Speedometer light LED × 1 ----
Tachometer light LED × 1 ----
Electric starting system
System type Constant mesh ----
Starter motor
Model (manufacturer) 5PX (YAMAHA) ----
Power output 0.9 kW ----
Armature coil resistance 0.0081 ~ 0.0099 Ω ----
Brushes
Overall length 9.8 mm (0.39 in) 5 mm
(0.2 in)
Spring force 7.36 ~ 11.04 N (736 ~ 1,104 g) ----
Commutator diameter 28.5 mm (1.12 in) 27.5 mm
(1.08 in)
Mica undercut 1.5 mm (0.06 in) ----
Starter relay
Model (manufacturer) MS5F-631 (JIDECO) ----
Amperage 180 A ----
Coil resistance 4.18 ~ 4.62 Ω ----
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Model/manufacturer G8R-30Y-S/OMRON ----
Coil resistance 162 ~ 198 Ω ----
Horn
Horn type Eddy ----
Model (manufacturer) × quantity YP-12 (NIKKO) × 2 ----
Max. amperage 2A ----
Performance 95 ~ 115 db/2 m ----
Turn signal relay
Relay type Semi-transistor ----
Model (manufacturer) FB257H (DENSO) ----
Self-cancelling device built-in Yes ----
Hazard flasher device Yes ----
Turn signal blinking frequency 75 ~ 95 cycles/min. ----
Wattage 23 W × 2 + 3.4 W ----
2 - 18
Item Standard Limit
Headlight relay
Model/manufacturer ACM33211 M04/MATSUSHITA ----
Fuel injection system relay
Model/manufacturer G8R-30Y-S/OMRON ----
Coil resistance 162 ~ 198 Ω ----
Resistance 4 ~ 6 kΩ/L-B ----
Output voltage (at idle) 0.605 ~ 0.755 V ----
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker type Fuse ----
Fuses (amperage × quantity)
Main fuse 30 A × 1 ----
Fuel injection system fuse 15 A × 1 ----
Headlight fuse 15 A × 1 ----
Signaling system fuse 10 A × 1 ----
Ignition fuse 10 A × 1 ----
ECU fuse 10 A × 1 ----
Decompression solenoid fuse 15 A × 1 ----
Backup fuse (odometer and clock) 7.5 A × 1 ----
Reserve fuse 30 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A × 1 ----
Engine temperature sensor
Model/manufacturer 5PX/DENSO ----
Resistance 895.38 ~ 1,098.02 Ω at 100 °C (212 °F) ----
2 - 19
CONVERSION TABLE/
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
EAS00028 EAS00030
CONVERSION TABLE GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE

All specification data in this manual are listed SPECIFICATIONS
in SI and METRIC UNITS. This chart specifies tightening torques for stan-
Use this table to convert METRIC unit data to dard fasteners with a standard ISO thread
IMPERIAL unit data. pitch. Tightening torque specifications for spe-
Ex. cial components or assemblies are provided
for each chapter of this manual. To avoid
METRIC MULTIPLIER IMPERIAL
warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in
** mm 0.03937 ** in a crisscross pattern and progressive stages
2 mm 0.03937 0.08 in until the specified tightening torque is reached.
Unless otherwise specified, tightening torque
CONVERSION TABLE specifications require clean, dry threads. Com-
METRIC TO IMPERIAL
ponents should be at room temperature.
Metric unit Multiplier Imperial unit
m·kg 7.233 ft·lb
Tighten-
ing torque m·kg 86.794 in·lb
cm·kg 0.0723 ft·lb
cm·kg 0.8679 in·lb
kg 2.205 lb
Weight
g 0.03527 oz
Speed km/hr 0.6214 mph
km 0.6214 mi
m 3.281 ft
Distance m 1.094 yd A: Distance between flats
cm 0.3937 in
B: Outside thread diameter
mm 0.03937 in
cc (cm3) 0.03527 oz (IMP lip.) General tightening
Volume/ cc (cm3) 0.06102 cu.in A B torques
Capacity lt (liter) 0.8799 qt (IMP liq.) (nut) (bolt)
lt (liter) 0.2199 gal (IMP liq.) Nm m•kg ft•lb
kg/mm 55.997 lb/in
kg/cm2 14.2234 psi (lb/in2)
10 mm 6 mm 6 0.6 4.3
Misc.
Centigrade 9/5+32 Fahrenheit (°F) 12 mm 8 mm 15 1.5 11
(°C)
14 mm 10 mm 30 3.0 22
17 mm 12 mm 55 5.5 40
19 mm 14 mm 85 8.5 61
22 mm 16 mm 130 13.0 94
2 - 20
TIGHTENING TORQUES SPEC
TIGHTENING TORQUES
ENGINE TIGHTENING TORQUES
Thread Tightening torque

Item Fastener Q’ty Remarks
size Nm m·kg ft·lb
Spark plug — M12 4 18 1.8 13
Front cylinder head cover Bolt M6 14 10 1.0 7.2
Rear cylinder head cover Bolt M6 14 10 1.0 7.2
Front rocker arm base Bolt M8 2 24 2.4 17
Front rocker arm base Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Rear rocker arm base Bolt M8 2 24 2.4 17
Rear rocker arm base Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Cylinder head Nut M12 8 60 6.0 43 E
Cylinder head Nut M10 4 39 3.9 28 E
Engine temperature sensor — M12 1 20 2.0 14 See NOTE *1.

Cylinder head (exhaust pipe) Stud bolt M8 4 15 1.5 11
Camshaft driven gear Nut M14 1 52 5.2 37
Camshaft driven gear Bolt M10 1 30 3.0 22
Camshaft cover Bolt M6 6 10 1.0 7.2
Decompression solenoid Bolt M4 2 7 0.7 5.1
Camshaft sprocket cover 1 Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
Engine left side cover Bolt M6 6 10 1.0 7.2
Rocker arm adjusting screw Nut M7 4 20 2.0 14
Valve lifter case Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Engine oil checking bolt Bolt M5 3 4 0.4 2.9
Front cylinder camshaft end cover Bolt M5 2 5 0.5 3.6
Engine oil drain bolt (crankcase) — M14 1 43 4.3 31
Engine oil drain bolt (oil tank) — M14 1 43 4.3 31
Oil filter cartridge — M20 1 17 1.7 12 E
Oil filter bolt Union bolt M20 1 70 7.0 50

Oil filter bracket Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Oil delivery pipe Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Oil delivery pipe
Union bolt M10 2 21 2.1 15
(cylinder head-to-crankcase)
Oil delivery pipe
Union bolt M8 1 18 1.8 13
(cylinder head-to-crankcase)
Oil strainer Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Engine oil pump assembly Bolt M6 3 10 1.0 7.2
Oil pump housing cover Screw M4 4 2 0.2 1.4
Dipstick — M33 1 2 0.2 1.4
2 - 21
Intake manifold Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Throttle body joint Screw M4 2 4 0.4 2.9
Pressure regulator Bolt M5 2 7 0.7 5.1
Intake vacuum hose bracket Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Intake air pressure sensor bracket 2 Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
A.I.S. bracket Bolt M5 4 4 0.4 2.9
Resonator Screw M5 2 2 0.2 1.4
Air cut-off valve assembly Bolt M8 1 24 2.4 17
Air cut-off valve assembly Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Air filter case Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
Air filter case clamp Screw M4 1 3 0.3 2.2
Front exhaust pipe Nut M8 2 20 2.0 14
Rear exhaust pipe Bolt M8 2 24 2.4 17
Rear exhaust pipe joint cover Screw M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
Rear exhaust pipe joint Nut M8 2 20 2.0 14
Muffler Bolt M10 1 53 5.3 38
Muffler Bolt M8 2 20 2.0 14
Muffler clamp Bolt M8 2 12 1.2 8.7
Crankcase (cylinder head) Stud bolt M12 8 See NOTE *1. E
Crankcase (cylinder head) Stud bolt M10 4 See NOTE *2. E
Crankcase (transfer gear case) Stud bolt M8 1 See NOTE *3. E
Right crankcase Bolt M8 3 24 2.4 17

Right crankcase Bolt M6 3 10 1.0 7.2
Left crankcase Bolt M6 15 10 1.0 7.2
Crankshaft position sensor Screw M6 2 7 0.7 5.1 LT
Crankshaft position sensor lead

Screw M6 7 7 0.7 5.1 LT
holder
Stator coil assembly Screw M6 3 7 0.7 5.1 LT
Stator coil assembly Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2 LT
Starter clutch Bolt M8 6 24 2.4 17 LT
Generator cover Bolt M6 11 10 1.0 7.2

Generator rotor Bolt M12 1 130 13.0 94 LT
Generator shaft Bolt M8 1 28 2.8 20

Generator shaft end cover Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Crankshaft position sensor rotor Bolt M12 1 100 10.0 72
Clutch cover Bolt M6 11 10 1.0 7.2
Use a lock
Clutch boss Nut M20 1 85 8.5 61
washer.
Clutch spring plate Bolt M6 6 8 0.8 5.8
Pull lever Bolt M6 1 12 1.2 8.7
Transfer gear oil drain bolt — M8 1 18 1.8 13
Use a lock
Middle drive gear Nut M22 1 100 10.0 72
washer.
2 - 22
Cover Bolt M8 2 24 2.4 17
Cover Bolt M6 5 10 1.0 7.2
Oil tank left cover Bolt M6 16 10 1.0 7.2
Oil tank left cover Bolt M6 3 10 1.0 7.2
Oil strainer Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Transfer gear case Bolt M8 4 30 3.0 22
Transfer gear case cover Nut M8 1 30 3.0 22
Transfer gear oil checking bolt Bolt M6 1 8 0.8 5.8
Transfer gear oil pump cover Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Transfer gear oil pump Bolt M6 3 10 1.0 7.2
Drive sprocket case Bolt M10 3 50 5.0 36
Drive sprocket case Bolt M10 5 50 5.0 36
Use a lock
Drive sprocket Nut M22 1 100 10.0 72
washer.
Drive sprocket cover Bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
Shift arm Bolt M6 1 12 1.2 8.7
Shift rod locknut Nut M8 2 12 1.2 8.7
Shift shaft spring stopper Bolt M8 1 22 2.2 16 LT
Shift drum assembly Screw M6 1 12 1.2 8.7

Shift drum assembly plate Screw M5 1 4 0.4 2.9
Stopper lever Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2 LT
Neutral switch Bolt M6 2 4 0.4 2.9

Speed sensor Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Intake air pressure sensor Bolt M5 2 5 0.5 3.6
Intake air temperature sensor — M8 1 15 1.5 11
Oil temperature sensor — M12 1 20 2.0 14 See NOTE *1.
Oil gallery bolt Bolt M8 3 20 2.0 14
Oil gallery bolt Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Oil gallery bolt Bolt M5 3 9 0.9 6.5
NOTE:
*1:Do not tighten the engine temperature sensor and oil temperature sensor beyond the specified
torques.
*2:When installing the crankcase stud bolts (cylinder head), make sure that their installed length is
141.5 mm (5.57 in).
*3:When installing the crankcase stud bolts (transfer gear case), make sure that their installed
length is 69.3 mm (2.73 in).
2 - 23
CHASSIS TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
Item Thread size Remarks
Nm m·kg ft·lb
Upper bracket and outer tube M8 26 2.6 19
Lower bracket and outer tube M8 23 2.3 17
Upper bracket and steering shaft M28 115 11.5 85
Handlebar holder (lower) and handlebar holder
M8 28 2.8 20
(upper)
Ring nut (steering shaft) M30 4 0.4 2.9 See NOTE.
Brake hose joint and lower bracket M6 7 0.7 5.1
Brake master cylinder reservoir cap M4 2 0.2 1.4
Turn signal light bracket and lower bracket M6 7 0.7 5.1
Turn signal light bracket pinch bolt — 7 0.7 5.1
Headlight bracket and lower bracket M8 23 2.3 17
Headlight bracket and brake hose joint M6 7 0.7 5.1
Handlebar holder (lower) M12 40 4.0 29
Front brake master cylinder M6 10 1.0 7.2
Union bolt (brake hose) M10 32 3.2 23
Engine mounting:
Spacer bolt M18 18 1.8 13
Upper mounting bolt (upper engine bracket and
M10 48 4.8 35
engine)
Upper engine bracket and frame M10 48 4.8 35
Lower front mounting nut (frame and engine) M12 105 10.5 75
Lower rear mounting nut (frame and engine) M12 88 8.8 64
Rear engine bracket and frame M10 53 5.3 38
Rear engine bracket and engine M12 98 9.8 71
Front engine bracket and frame M10 48 4.8 35
Front engine bracket and engine M12 88 8.8 64
Transfer gear case and transfer gear case
M10 63 6.3 45
bracket
Transfer gear case bracket and frame M10 53 5.3 38
Muffler bracket and frame M10 53 5.3 38
Muffler bracket and muffler M8 20 2.0 14
Ignition coil M6 7 0.7 5.1
Swingarm pivot shaft M18 125 12.5 90
Relay arm and swingarm M12 59 5.9 43
Relay arm and connecting rod M12 59 5.9 43
Relay arm and rear shock absorber M10 40 4.0 29
Rear shock absorber, connecting rod and frame M12 59 5.9 43
Upper drive belt cover and swingarm M6 7 0.7 5.1
Lower drive belt cover and swingarm M6 7 0.7 5.1
2 - 24
Tightening torque
Nm m·kg ft·lb
Rear fender bracket and frame M10 40 4.0 29
Rear fender bracket and rear fender M8 23 2.3 17
Fuel tank and fuel filter M6 7 0.7 5.1
Fuel tank bracket and frame M6 10 1.0 7.2
Fuel tank and frame M8 19 1.9 7.2
Sub fuel tank and frame M6 10 1.0 7.2
Seat bracket and frame M8 16 1.6 11
Side cover and side cover bracket M6 4 0.4 2.9
Side cover bracket and frame M6 13 1.3 9.4
Side cover and seat bracket M6 7 0.7 5.1
Starter relay and battery positive lead M6 7 0.7 5.1
Starter relay and starter motor lead M6 7 0.7 5.1
Battery box and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1
Sidestand bracket and frame M10 63 6.3 45
Sidestand and bolt M12 122 12.2 88
Sidestand and nut M12 88 8.8 64
Footrest bracket and frame M10 48 4.8 35
Rear footrest and frame M10 48 4.8 35
Front brake master cylinder holder M6 10 1.0 7.2
Rear brake master cylinder and rear brake master
M8 23 2.3 17
cylinder bracket
Rear brake master cylinder cover and frame M8 23 2.3 17
Rear brake fluid reservoir M6 7 0.7 5.1
Union bolt (rear brake hose) M10 30 3.0 22
Brake rod and rear brake master cylinder M8 16 1.6 11
Front wheel axle M18 72 7.2 52
Front wheel axle pinch bolt M8 23 2.3 17
Rear wheel axle nut M18 150 15.0 110
Front brake caliper M10 40 4.0 29
Rear brake caliper M10 27 2.7 19
Brake disc and wheel M6 18 1.8 13 LT
Caliper bleed screw (front) M8 6 0.6 4.3

Caliper bleed screw (rear) M7 6 0.6 4.3
Rear wheel sprocket and rear wheel drive hub M12 95 9.5 68
Rear brake caliper bracket and swingarm M10 30 3.0 22
Front fork guard and front fork M8 16 1.6 11
Front fork guard and front fork M6 13 1.3 9.4
Front fender and front fork leg M8 16 1.6 11
Cap bolt and outer tube — 23 2.3 17
2 - 25
Tightening torque
Nm m·kg ft·lb
Damper rod assembly bolt — 40 4.0 29
Reflector bracket (front) M6 8 0.8 5.8
Footrest bracket and rear brake bracket M8 16 1.6 11
Footrest bracket and shift rod bracket M8 16 1.6 11
Rear brake bracket and brake pedal M8 19 1.9 13
Shift shaft and shift pedal M6 12 1.2 8.7
NOTE:
1. First, tighten the ring nut approximately 52 Nm (5.2 m • kg, 37 ft • lb) by using the torque wrench,
then loosen the ring nut completely.
2. Retighten the ring nut to specification.
2 - 26
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES SPEC
EAS00031
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

ENGINE
Lubrication point Lubricant

Oil seal lips LS
O-rings LS
Bearings E
Connecting rod bolts and nuts M

Connecting rod small end and big end E
Crankshaft pins E
Crankshaft journals E
Piston surfaces E
Piston pins E
Camshaft cam lobes and camshaft journals M
Valve push rods E
Valve push rod end balls E
Valve stems (intake and exhaust) M
Valve stem ends (intake and exhaust) E
Valve lifters E
Rocker arms E
Rocker arm shafts E
Oil pump rotors (inner and outer) and oil pump housing E
Oil strainer E
Starter clutch idle gear inner surface E
Starter clutch idle gear shafts E
Starter clutch roller and starter clutch gears outer surface E
Crankshaft big end bearing (upper and lower) E
Clutch pull rod M

Pressure plate bearing E
Transmission gears (wheel and pinion) M
Shift drum E
Shift forks and shift fork guide bars E
Shift shaft LS
Shift pedal LS
Shift lever joint LS
Crankcase mating surface Sealant

(Quick Gasket®)
Stator coil lead grommet Sealant
(Quick Gasket®)
Crankshaft position sensor lead grommet Sealant
(Quick Gasket®)
2 - 27
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES SPEC
EAS00032
CHASSIS
Lubrication point Lubricant

Steering bearings and bearing races (upper and lower) LS
Steering bearing cover LS
Steering head pipe lower oil seal LS
Front wheel oil seal (right and left) LS
Rear wheel oil seal LS
Rear wheel drive hub mating surface LS
Rear brake pedal shaft LS
Shift pedal LS
Rear footrest pivot LS
Sidestand sliding surface LS
Tube guide (throttle grip) inner surface LS
Brake lever pivot bolt, contact surface LS
Clutch lever pivot bolt, contact surface LS
Swingarm pivot shaft LS
Swingarm pivot bearing LS
Swingarm pivot oil seal LS
Relay arm bearing (inner) LS
Rear shock absorber bearing (inner) LS
Connecting rod bearing (inner) LS
2 - 28
ENGINE OIL LUBRICATION CHART SPEC
ENGINE OIL LUBRICATION CHART
Pressure feed
Rear cylinder intake valve
Front cylinder intake valve
Rear cylinder
Crankshaft journal
Piston Connecting rod Crank pin
(left)
Valve stem Rocker Push Valve Rear
end arm rod lifter camshaft
Front cylinder
Valve stem Rocker Push Valve Front
end arm rod lifter camshaft
Crankshaft journal
Piston Connecting rod Crank pin
(right)
Camshaft lobe faces

Crankshaft journal
Camshaft journal (camshaft cover side)
Starter clutch Generator shaft journal (right)
Generator shaft journal (left)
Clutch
Main axle gears Main axle Bypass valve
Oil pump drive gear Oil filter cartridge
Drive axle gears Drive axle
Oil pump
Check ball
Relief valve
Oil tank
Rotor 2 Oil strainer
Rotor 1 Drain bolt
Oil strainer
Drain bolt
2 - 29
ENGINE OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS SPEC
ENGINE OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS
1 Oil tank
2 Dipstick
3 Oil delivery pipe
4 Push rod
5 Oil filter cartridge
4
3
2 - 30
1 Valve lifter
2 Push rod
3 Rocker arm shaft
4 Crankshaft
2 - 31
1 Engine oil pump
2 Oil strainer
3 Engine oil drain bolt (engine)
3 2
2 - 32
1 Main axle È To oil filter cartridge
2 Drive axle
3 Engine oil pump
4 Oil strainer
1 2
4 3
2 - 33
TRANSFER GEAR OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS SPEC
TRANSFER GEAR OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS
1 Middle driven shaft
2 Transfer gear oil pump
2 - 34
TRANSFER GEAR OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS SPEC
1 Transfer gear oil pump
2 Middle driven shaft
2 - 35
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
EB206000
CABLE ROUTING
1 Brake hose È Fasten the rectifier/regulator Ê Fasten the rear brake light
2 Clutch cable lead, horn lead, and rear brake switch lead, horn lead, and sta-
3 Rectifier/regulator light switch lead with a plastic tor coil assembly lead with a
4 Rectifier/regulator lead locking tie to the frame. plastic locking tie to the frame.
5 Rear brake light switch lead É Fasten the stator coil assembly Ë Fasten the stator coil assembly
6 Horn lead lead, rectifier/regulator lead, lead, horn lead, and rear brake
7 Stator coil assembly lead and the end of the boot with a light switch lead with a plastic
plastic band. locking tie to the frame.
1
2
1 1
Ë È
7
Ê
6
3
4
5
É
2 - 36
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Clutch cable È Fasten the left handlebar switch lead with a plas-
2 Left handlebar switch lead tic holder.
3 Right handlebar switch lead É Fasten the right handlebar switch lead with a
4 Throttle cable 1 plastic holder.
5 Throttle cable 2 Ê 20 ~ 30 mm (0.8 ~ 1.2 in)
6 Brake hose Ë 50 ~ 70 mm (2.0 ~ 2.8 in)
2 - 37
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Throttle cables È Pass throttle cable 1 and throttle cable 2 through
2 Clutch cable the cable guide, and then fasten them with a
3 Atmospheric pressure sensor plastic holder.
4 Spark plug cap (ignition coil 1-L spark plug lead) É Fasten the engine stop switch lead, horn lead,
5 Horn lead and oil temperature sensor lead with a plastic
6 Crankshaft position sensor lead locking tie.
7 Horn 2 Ê Fasten the sidestand switch lead, starter motor
8 Sidestand switch lead lead, crankshaft position sensor lead, decom-
9 Starter motor lead pression solenoid lead, cylinder identification
0 Spark plug cap (ignition coil 2-L spark plug lead) sensor lead, speed sensor lead, and neutral
switch lead with a plastic locking tie.
1 2
È
3
4
Ï Ê
Ð
5
Î
Í 9 Ë
Ì 8 7
2 - 38
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
Ë Fasten the engine stop switch lead, crankshaft position sensor lead, and horn lead with a plastic locking
tie.
Ì Fasten the starter motor lead, and side stand switch lead with a plastic locking tie to the frame.
Í Fasten the starter motor lead, fuel tank drain hose, and fuel tank/air filter breather hose with a plastic band
to the frame.
Be sure not to pinch the fuel tank drain hose or the fuel tank/air filter breather hose.
Î Fasten the starter motor lead with the plastic clamp.
Ï Clamp the clutch cable between the locknut and washer with a plastic clamp.
Ð To the engine.
1 2
È
3
4
Ï Ê
Ð
5
Î
Í 9 Ë
Ì 8 7
2 - 39
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Ignition coil 1 È To the rectifier/regulator, horn 1 and rear brake
2 Atmospheric pressure sensor lead light switch.
3 Ignition coil 2 É 30 ~ 50 degrees
4 Ignition coil 2 lead Ê 40 ~ 60 degrees
5 Rear brake light switch coupler
6 Rectifier/regulator lead and horn lead
7 Linear control valve lead
8 Ignition coil 1 lead
9 Fuel return hose
0 Fuel inlet hose
D
B C
2
1
8
6
È 9 0
3 É Ê
D-D
5 B C
4
A
2 - 40
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Tail/brake light lead È Be sure to position the ECU leads and sensor
2 Fuel pump lead leads toward the left side of the frame, and then
3 Sidestand switch lead fasten the wire harness protector with a plastic
4 Starter motor lead locking tie.
É Route the negative battery lead on top of the
other leads.
Ê To the tail/brake light.
A A
É
È
1
Ì 3 4
Í
Ë
B
Ê
2 A-A
2 - 41
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
Ë Fasten the decompression solenoid lead, speed sensor lead, cylinder identification sensor lead, sidestand
switch lead, crankshaft position sensor lead, neutral switch lead, and fuel pump lead with a plastic band.
Ì Position the gray mark on the starter motor lead at the center of the bolt. Fit the starter motor lead and sid-
estand switch lead into the groove in the frame, and then fasten them with a plastic locking tie.
Í 10 ~ 30 mm (0.4 ~ 1.2 in)
A A
É
È
1
Ì 3 4
Í
Ë
B
Ê
2 A-A
2 - 42
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Fuse box A Cut-off relay
2 ECU lead B Turn signal relay
3 Battery C Headlight relay
4 Starter motor lead
5 ECU ground lead È Clamp the fuel tank/air filter breather hose, and
6 Fuel tank/air filter breather hose fuel tank/air filter drain hose with a plastic clamp.
7 Fuel tank/air filter drain hose É 45 ~ 60 degrees
8 Regulator lead Ê 15 ~ 30 degrees
9 Horn lead
0 Rear brake light switch lead
A A
D
C
C
B
B
1
2
1
4 6 7
6
7
Ê È
É
5 0
B-B 9 8
4
C-C A
3
3 C
A-A D B
2 - 43
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Roll over valve A Fuel tank drain hose
2 Fuel tank breather hose B Fuel tank/air filter breather hose
3 Fuel hose joint 1 C Ignition coil 1
4 Fuel hose
5 Fuel inlet hose È Make sure that the white paint mark is facing for-
6 Fuel outlet hose ward.
7 Fuel hose joint 2
8 Fuel hose
9 Fuel pump coupler
0 Sub fuel tank
2 4
1 5
6
B 7
A 9
0
A
4
C A
B È
A-A B
2 - 44
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Oil temperature sensor 9 Intake air pressure sensor 2 H Ignition coil 1-R spark plug lead
2 Fuel hose 0 Throttle cables I Lean angle cut-off switch lead
3 Spark plug cap (ignition coil 1-R A Brake hose J Crankshaft position sensor lead
spark plug lead) B Spark plug cap (ignition coil 2-R K Sidestand switch lead
4 Injector lead spark plug lead) L Starter motor lead
5 Throttle position sensor lead C Engine temperature sensor lead M Horn 2 lead
6 Intake air pressure sensor 1 D Stator coil lead
7 Intake air temperature sensor E Neutral switch lead
coupler F Speed sensor lead
8 Intake air pressure sensor lead G Main wire harness
8 9
Ì 6 7
45 Ê Ë Í
É C 0
3 B
2 A
1 A
A C
Ñ
È Î
Ð
Ï
B
A
Ö
× C
F
E Õ Ô
D Ó Ò
G G
G
Ø
H J
H
2 M
A-A B-B C-C I
L
A
K
2 - 45
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
È To the battery box. Í Fasten the main wire harness, intake air pres-
É Fasten the main wire harness, and fuel hose sure sensor lead #2, ignition coil 1-R spark plug
with a plastic locking tie to the frame. lead, and intake air temperature sensor coupler
Ê Fasten the main wire harness, and spark plug with a plastic locking tie.
lead #3 with a plastic locking tie to the frame. Î Fasten the rear brake light switch lead, and igni-
Ë Fasten the throttle position sensor lead, engine tion coil lead #2 with a plastic band.
temperature sensor lead, and injector lead with Ï Fasten the main wire harness, and intake vac-
a plastic locking tie to the fuel delivery pipe. uum hose with a plastic locking tie.
Ì Fasten the main wire harness, and spark plug
lead #3 with a plastic locking tie.
8 9
Ì 6 7
45 Ê Ë Í
É C 0
3 B
2 A
1 A
A C
Ñ
È Î
Ð
Ï
B
A
Ö
× C
F
E Õ Ô
D Ó Ò
G G
G
Ø
H J
H
2 M
A-A B-B C-C I
L
A
K
2 - 46
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
Ð To the injector sub lead. × To the speed sensor.
Ñ To the engine temperature sensor. Ø Fasten the crankshaft position sensor lead, side-
Ò 10 ~ 30 mm (0.4 ~ 1.2 in) stand switch lead, lean angle cut-off switch lead,
Ó Position the gray mark on the stator coil lead at starter motor lead, and horn lead with a plastic
the center of the bolt, and then fasten it with a locking tie.
plastic locking tie.
Ô To the stator coil.
Õ To the decompression solenoid, and cylinder
identification sensor.
Ö To the neutral switch.
8 9
Ì 6 7
45 Ê Ë Í
É C 0
3 B
2 A
1 A
A C
Ñ
È Î
Ð
Ï
B
A
Ö
× C
F
E Õ Ô
D Ó Ò
G G
G
Ø
H J
H
2 M
A-A B-B C-C I
L
A
K
2 - 47
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Ignition coil 2-R spark plug lead 8 ECU
2 Ignition coil 1-R spark plug lead 9 Fuel hose
3 Main wire harness 0 Ignition coil 1-L spark plug lead
4 Negative battery ground lead A Ignition coil 2-L spark plug lead
5 Fuse box
6 Main fuse coupler È 40 ~ 60 mm (1.6 ~ 2.4 in)
7 Positive battery lead
1
A
0
2
8
6
7
2 - 48
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
1 Canister (California only) 0 Pressure regulator
2 Canister purge hose (California only) A A.I.S. vacuum hose
3 Intake vacuum hose B Silencer air filter case drain hose
4 Liner control valve inlet hose
5 Liner control valve outlet hose
6 Throttle position sensor
7 Fuel hose
8 Throttle stop screw
9 Fuel inlet hose
2
1
4
B
A 5
6
0
7
9
2 - 49
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
Canister (California only)
1 Canister charge hose È To the fuel tank.
2 Canister purge hose É To the silencer air filter case.
3 Starter motor lead Ê To the throttle bodies.
4 Canister
5 Fuel tank drain hose
6 Regulator lead
7 Horn lead
8 Rear brake light switch lead
É
A Ê
1
5
2
A
A-A
1
2
1 2
B
5
B
6
7 3 C
8
B-B
4
2
C 5
2 - 50
INTRODUCTION/PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART CHK
FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ADJ
EAS00036
PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended checks and adjustments.
If followed, these preventive maintenance procedures will ensure more reliable vehicle operation, a
longer service life and reduce the need for costly overhaul work. This information applies to vehicles
already in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared for sale. All service technicians
should be familiar with this entire chapter.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM
INITIAL ODOMETER READINGS
600 mi 4,000 mi 8,000 mi 12,000 mi 16,000 mi 20,000 mi
No. ITEM ROUTINE (1,000 km) (7,000 km) (13,000 km) (19,000 km) (25,000 km) (31,000 km)
or or or or or or
1 month 6 months 12 months 18 months 24 months 30 months
Valve clearance • Check valve clearance when engine is cold.
1 * Every 16,000 mi (25,000 km)
(See page 3-11.) • Adjust if necessary.
• Check condition.
• Adjust gap and clean.
Spark plugs
2 * • Replace at 8,000 mi (13,000 km) or √ Replace. √ Replace. √
(See page 3-20.)
12 months and thereafter every 8,000 mi
(13,000 km) or 12 months.
Crankcase ventila-
• Check ventilation hose for cracks or damage.
3 * tion system √ √ √ √ √
• Replace if necessary.
(See page 3-38.)
Fuel line • Check fuel hose for cracks or damage.
4 * √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-37.) • Replace if necessary.
• Check for leakage.
Exhaust system
5 * • Retighten if necessary. √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-39.)
• Replace gasket(s) if necessary.
Electrical Fuel • Check and adjust engine idle speed and syn-
6 * Injection System chronization. √ √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-15.) • Adjust cable free play.
Evaporative
Emission control • Check control system for damage.
7 * √ √
system (For • Replace if necessary.
California only)
* Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, have a Yamaha dealer perform the service.
3-1
CHK
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART ADJ
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART
600 mi 4,000 mi 8,000 mi 12,000 mi 16,000 mi 20,000 mi
No. ITEM ROUTINE TYPE (1,000 km) (7,000 km) (13,000 km) (19,000 km) (25,000 km) (31,000 km)
or or or or or or
Engine oil
1 • Change. — √ √ √ √ √ √
1
(See page 3-27.)
Engine oil filter
2 * • Replace. — √ √ √
cartridge
• Check condition and for
Air filter elements
3 * damage. — √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-36.)
• Replace if necessary.
4 *
Front brake
(See page 3-40.)
• Check operation and
fluid leakage. (See
NOTE page 3-3.)
• Correct if necessary.
— √ √ √ √
Replace
brake
fluid.
√ 2
Replace
Rear brake fluid leakage. (See
5 * — √ √ √ √ brake √
3
(See page 3-41.) NOTE page 3-3.)
fluid.
Clutch
6 * free play. — √ √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-35.)
• Check vehicle for leak-
age.
Transfer case oil SAE 80 API “GL-4”
7 * • Replace every Change. Check. Change.
(See page 3-32.) hypoid gear oil
16,000 mi (25,000 km)
or 24 months.
Yamaha chain and
Control cables • Apply chain lube thor-
8 * cable lube or √ √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-58.) oughly.
engine oil 10W-30
• Check bearing assem-
bly for looseness.
Rear arm pivot
• Moderately repack Lithium-soap-
9 * bearing √ Repack.
every 16,000 mi based grease
(See page 4-86.)
(25,000 km) or
24 months.
Brake and clutch Lithium-soap-
• Lubricate.
10 lever pivot shafts based grease (all- √ √ √ √ √
• Apply grease lightly.
(See page 3-59.) purpose grease)
Brake pedal and Lithium-soap-
• Lubricate.
11 shift pedal shafts based grease (all- √ √ √ √ √
• Apply grease lightly.
(See page 3-59.) purpose grease)
• Check operation and Lithium-soap-
Sidestand pivot
12 * lubricate. based grease (all- √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-59.)
• Apply grease lightly. purpose grease)
Sidestand switch • Check and clean or
13 * — √ √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-59.) replace if necessary.
Front fork • Check operation and for
14 * — √ √ √ √ √
(See page 3-52.) leakage.
• Check bearing assem-
bly for looseness.
Lithium-soap-
Steering bearings • Moderately repack
15 * based grease (all- √ √ √ Repack. √
(See page 3-50.) every 16,000 mi
purpose grease)
(25,000 km) or
24 months.
Wheel bearings • Check bearings for
16 * — √ √ √ √ √
(See page 4-4.) smooth rotation.
3-2
CHK
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART ADJ
600 mi 4,000 mi 8,000 mi 12,000 mi 16,000 mi 20,000 mi
No. ITEM ROUTINE TYPE (1,000 km) (7,000 km) (13,000 km) (19,000 km) (25,000 km) (31,000 km)
or or or or or or
Rear suspension
• Lubricate. Lithium-soap-
17 * link pivots √
• Apply grease lightly. based grease
(See page 4-86.)
Drive belt • Check belt tension.
18 * — √ Every 2,500 mi (4,000 km)
(See page 3-47.) • Adjust if necessary.
* Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, have a Yamaha dealer perform the service.
NOTE:
From 24,000 mi (37,000 km) or 36 months, repeat the maintenance intervals starting from 4,000 mi
(7,000 km) or 6 months.
NOTE:
_
• Air filters
• This model’s air filters are equipped with disposable oil-coated paper elements, which must not
be cleaned with compressed air to avoid damaging them.
• The air filter elements need to be replaced more frequently when riding in unusually wet or dusty
areas.
• Hydraulic brake service
• After disassembling the brake master cylinders and calipers, always change the fluid. Regularly
check the brake fluid levels and fill the reservoirs as required.
• Every two years replace the internal components of the brake master cylinders and calipers, and
change the brake fluid.
• Replace the brake hoses every four years and if cracked or damaged.
3-3
CHK
SEAT AND SIDE COVERS ADJ
EAS00038
SEAT AND SIDE COVERS
1 2
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
5
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
Order Job/Part Q’ty Remarks

Removing the seat and side covers Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Seat 1
2 Cover 1
3 Tool kit 1
4 Left side cover 1 1
5 Left side cover 2 1
6 Right side cover 1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
3-4
CHK
HEADLIGHT AND METER ASSEMBLIES ADJ
HEADLIGHT AND METER ASSEMBLIES
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib) 5
R.
T.
R.
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
2
3

Removing the headlight and meter Remove the parts in the order listed.
assemblies
1 Headlight lens unit 1
2 Wire harness (in the headlight body) 1 Disconnect.
3 Headlight body 1
4 Tachometer assembly 1
5 Speedometer assembly 1
procedure.
3-5
CHK
BATTERY ADJ
BATTERY
1
4
3
6
5
2

Removing the battery Remove the parts in the order listed.
Seat Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS”.
1 ECU 1
2 Battery cover 1
3 Negative battery lead 1
4 Positive battery lead 1
5 Battery 1
6 Belt 1
procedure.
3-6
CHK
FUEL TANK ADJ
FUEL TANK
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
6
3
4
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
(4)

Removing the fuel tank Remove the parts in the order listed.
Seat Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS”.
1 Air induction system cover 1
2 Air duct 1
3 Fuel hose joint 1 1 Disconnect.
4 Fuel hose joint 2 1 Disconnect.
5 Fuel tank breather hose 2 Disconnect.
6 Fuel tank 1
procedure.
3-7
CHK
AIR FILTER CASE ADJ
EAS00043
AIR FILTER CASE
3 Nm (0.3 m • kg, 2.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
3 2
(4)

Removing the air filter case Remove the parts in the order listed.
Fuel tank Refer to “FUEL TANK”.
1 Air filter case 1
2 Air filter case cover 1
3 Air filter element 1
4 Air filter check hose 1
procedure.
3-8
CHK
SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE ADJ
EAS00043
SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE
7 (4) 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
15 Nm (1.5 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
13
R.
3
6 16
2 14
12
8
5
15
10
17
11
4
9
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

Removing the silencer air filter case Remove the parts in the order listed.
Air filter case Refer to “AIR FILTER CASE”.
1 Silencer air filter case cover 1
2 Silencer air filter element 1
3 Silencer air filter case bracket 1
4 Cylinder head breather hose 1 Disconnect.
5 Resonator 1
6 Silencer air filter case drain hose 1
7 Atmospheric pressure sensor coupler 1 Disconnect.
8 Intake air temperature sensor coupler 1 Disconnect.
3-9
CHK
SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE ADJ
7 (4) 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
15 Nm (1.5 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
13
R.
3
6 16
2 14
12
8
5
15
10
17
11
4
9
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

9 Intake air pressure sensor 1 coupler 1 Disconnect.
10 Liner control valve inlet hose 1 Disconnect.
11 Clamp screw 2 Loosen.
12 Atmospheric pressure sensor bracket 1
13 Atmospheric pressure sensor 1
14 Intake air pressure sensor 1 1
15 Intake air pressure sensor 1 bracket 1
16 Intake air temperature sensor 1
17 Silencer air filter case 1
procedure.
3 - 10
CHK
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE ADJ
EAS00047
ENGINE
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves.
NOTE:
_
• The valve clearance is automatically

adjusted by the hydraulic valve lifter. How-
ever, there are times that the valve clearance
is needed to be adjusted manually. If this is
È the case, adjust the clearance of the two
maladjusted or worn valves, of a rocker arm,
with the adjusting screw.
È If clearance is on the slip side 1, loosen the

adjusting screw and bring the valve clear-
ance a within specification. Check if the
valve clearance b on the adjusting screw
2 side is within specification.
É If clearance is on the adjusting screw 2
É side, tighten the adjusting screw and bring
the valve clearance b within specification.
• Valve clearance adjustment should be made

on a cold engine, at room temperature.
• When the valve clearance is to be measured
or adjusted, the piston must be at top dead
center (TDC) on the compression stroke.
1. Remove:
• seat
Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS”.
• fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK”.
• air filter case
Refer to “AIR FILTER CASE”.
• silencer air filter case
Refer to “SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE”.
2. Disconnect:
• spark plug caps 1
2 • cylinder head breather hose 2
• oil tank breather hose 3
3. Remove:
• spark plugs
1 • cylinder head covers (upper)
3 1 • gaskets
• dowel pins
3 - 11
CHK
4. Remove:
• engine left side cover 1
5. Remove:
• timing mark accessing screw 1
• crankshaft end cover 2
1 2
6. Remove:
• decompression solenoid cover 1
• camshaft sprocket cover 2
1 2
7. Measure:
• valve clearance
Out of specification → Adjust.
Valve clearance (cold)

Intake valve
0 ~ 0.04 mm (0 ~ 0.0016 in)
Exhaust valve
0 ~ 0.04 mm (0 ~ 0.0016 in)
3 - 12
CHK
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Piston #1 TDC (rear cylinder)
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise.
b. When piston #1 is at TDC on the compres-
sion stroke, align the TDC mark a on the
crankshaft position sensor rotor with the
pointer b on the clutch/crankshaft position
sensor rotor cover.
c. Check the camshaft drive gear mark c
position and camshaft driven gear mark d
position as shown.
If the marks are not aligned, turn the crank-
shaft counterclockwise 360 degrees and
recheck step b.
d d. Measure the valve clearance with a thick-
ness gauge.
c
Piston #2 TDC (front cylinder)

a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise from
the piston #1 TDC by 408 degrees.
sion stoke, align the TDC mark e on the
sensor rotor cover.
c. Check the camshaft drive gear mark c
position and camshaft driven gear mark d
position as shown.
d d. Measure the valve clearance with a thick-
ness gauge.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 13
CHK
8. Adjust:
• valve clearance
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
1 a. Loosen the locknut 1.
b. Insert a thickness gauge 2 between the
2 end of the adjusting screw and the valve tip.
c. Turn the adjusting screw 3 in direction a
or b with the valve adjuster until the speci-
fied valve clearance is obtained.
Valve adjuster
YM-08035
b Adjusting
Slip side
3 screw side
a Valve clear- Valve clear-
Direction a ance is ance is
increased. decreased.
Valve clear- Valve clear-
Direction b ance is ance is
decreased. increased.
d. Hold the adjusting screw to prevent it from

moving and tighten the locknut to specifica-
tion.
Locknut
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)
T.
R.
e. Measure the valve clearance again.

f. If the valve clearance is still out of specifica-
tion, repeat all of the valve clearance adjust-
ment steps until the specified clearance is
obtained.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
9. Install:
• all moved parts
NOTE:
****
For installation, reverse the removal proce-

dure. Note the following points.
Refer to “ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS

AND VALVE LIFTERS” in chapter 5.
3 - 14
CHK
SYNCHRONIZING THE THROTTLE BODIES ADJ
EAS00051
SYNCHRONIZING THE THROTTLE BODIES
NOTE:
_
Prior to synchronizing the throttle bodies, the

valve clearance and the engine idling speed
should be properly adjusted and the ignition
timing should be checked.
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.

NOTE:
_
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
2. Remove:
• seat
• fuel tank
• air filter case
3. Remove:
• hose 1
• hose 2
4. Install:
• carburetor synchronizer
• inductive tachometer
(onto the spark plug lead of cylinder #1)
1 Carburetor synchronizer
YU-08030
YU-8036-A
5. Start the engine and let it warm up for sev-

eral minutes.
6. Check:
• engine idling speed
2 Out of specification → Adjust.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE ENGINE
IDLING SPEED”.
Engine idling speed

850 ~ 950 r/min
3 - 15
CHK
SYNCHRONIZING THE THROTTLE BODIES ADJ
7. Adjust:
• throttle body synchronization
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. With throttle body #1 as standard, adjust
throttle body #2 using the air screw 1.
NOTE:
@
Rev the engine two or three times, each time

for less than a second, and check the synchro-
nization again.
CAUTION:
Do not use the throttle valve adjusting
screws to adjust the throttle body synchro-
nization.
Vacuum pressure at engine idling

speed
50 kPa (375 mm Hg, 14.8 in Hg)
NOTE:
_
The difference in vacuum pressure between

the two throttle bodies should not exceed
1.33 kPa (10 mm Hg, 0.4 in Hg).
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
8. Check:
9. Stop the engine and remove the measuring
equipment.
10.Adjust:
• throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE
CABLE FREE PLAY”.
Throttle cable free play (at the

flange of the throttle grip)
4 ~ 6 mm (0.16 ~ 0.24 in)
11.Install:
• air filter case
• fuel tank
• seat
3 - 16
CHK
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED ADJ
EAS00053
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED
NOTE:
_
Prior to adjusting the engine idling speed, the

throttle bodies synchronization should be
adjusted properly, the air filter element should
be clean, and the engine should have ade-
quate compression.
1. Start the engine and let it warm up for sev-

eral minutes.
2. Install:
• inductive tachometer
YU-8036-A
3. Check:
Engine idling speed

850 ~ 950 r/min
4. Adjust:
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the throttle stop screw 1 in direction
a or b until the specified engine idling
speed is obtained.
Engine idling speed is

Direction a
a increased.
Engine idling speed is
Direction b
1 decreased.
b
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5. Adjust:
CABLE FREE PLAY”.

4 ~ 6 mm (0.16 ~ 0.24 in)
3 - 17
CHK
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJ
EAS00058
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE
PLAY
NOTE:
_
Prior to adjusting the throttle cable free play,

the engine idling speed should be adjusted.
1. Check:
• throttle cable free play a

4 ~ 6 mm (0.16 ~ 0.24 in)
2. Adjust:
NOTE:
When the throttle is opened, the accelerator
cable 1 is pulled.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Throttle body side
NOTE:
• When not replacing the throttle cable or
removing the cable from the throttle body,
adjust the throttle cable free play by following
step a and steps e through (h).
• When replacing the throttle cable or remov-
ing the cable from the throttle body, adjust
the throttle cable free play by following steps
a through (h).
a. Remove the seat and fuel tank.

Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” and
“FUEL TANK”.
b. Loosen the locknut 2 on the decelerator
cable.
c. Turn the adjusting nut 3 in direction a or
b to take up any slack on the decelerator
cable.
d. Tighten the locknut 2.
3 - 18
CHK
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJ
NOTE:
Apply locking agend (LOCKTITE®) to the
threads of the locknut 2.
e. Loosen the locknut 4 on the accelerator

cable.
f. Turn the adjusting nut 5 in direction a or
b until the specified throttle cable free play
is obtained.
Throttle cable free play

Direction a
is increased.
Direction b
is decreased.
g. Tighten the locknut 4.

NOTE:
_
If the specified throttle cable free play cannot

be obtained on the throttle body side of the
cable, use the adjusting nut on the handlebar
side.
h. Install the fuel tank and seat.

Refer to “FUEL TANK” and “SEAT AND
SIDE COVERS”.
Handlebar side
a. Loosen the locknut 6.
b. Turn the adjusting nut 7 in direction c or
d until the specified throttle cable free play
is obtained.

Direction c
is increased.
Direction d
is decreased.
c. Tighten the locknut.

WARNING
_
After adjusting the throttle cable free play,

start the engine and turn the handlebar to
the right or left to ensure that this does not
cause the engine idling speed to change.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 19
CHK
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS ADJ
EAS00059
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS
spark plugs.
1. Remove:
• seat
• fuel tank
• air filter case
2. Disconnect:
• spark plug cap
3. Remove:
• spark plug
CAUTION:
_
Before removing the spark plugs, blow

away any dirt accumulated in the spark
plug wells with compressed air to prevent it
from falling into the cylinders.
4. Check:
• spark plug type
Incorrect → Change.
Spark plug type (manufacturer)

DPR7EA-9 (NGK)
X22EPR-U9 (DENSO)
3 - 20
CHK
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS ADJ
5. Check:
• electrode 1
Damage/wear → Replace the spark plug.
• insulator 2
Abnormal color → Replace the spark plug.
Normal color is medium-to-light tan.
6. Clean:
• spark plug
(with a spark plug cleaner or wire brush)
7. Measure:
• spark plug gap a
(with a wire thickness gauge)
Out of specification → Regap.
Spark plug gap

0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0354 in)
8. Install:
• spark plug 18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
Before installing the spark plug, clean the

spark plug and gasket surface.
9. Connect:
• spark plug cap
10.Install:
• air filter case
• fuel tank
• seat
3 - 21
CHK
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING ADJ
EAS00061
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
NOTE:
_
Prior to checking the ignition timing, check the

wiring connections of the entire ignition sys-
tem. Make sure all connections are tight and
free of corrosion.
1 1. Remove:
• engine left side cover 1
2. Remove:
• timing mark accessing screw 1
3. Connect:
• timing light 1
• inductive tachometer 2
Timing light
YM-33277-A
YU-8036-A
4. Check:
• ignition timing
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-
utes, and then let it run at the specified
engine idling speed.
Engine idling speed

850 ~ 950 r/min
b. Check that the mark a is within the

required firing range b on the timing.
Incorrect firing range → Check the ignition
system.
NOTE:
_
The ignition timing is not adjustable.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 22
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING/ CHK
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE ADJ
5. Install:
• timing mark accessing screw
6. Install:
• engine left side cover
EAS00065
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION
PRESSURE
cylinders.
NOTE:
_
Insufficient compression pressure will result in

a loss of performance.
1. Measure:
• valve clearance
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE
CLEARANCE”.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-
utes, and then turn it off.
3. Remove:
• seat
• fuel tank
• air filter case
4. Remove:
• camshaft sprocket cover
• decompression solenoid
Refer to “CAMSHAFTS” in chapter 5.
5. Install:
6. Disconnect:
• spark plug cap
3 - 23
CHK
7. Remove:
• spark plug
CAUTION:
_
Before removing the spark plugs, use com-

pressed air to blow away any dirt accumu-
lated in the spark plug wells to prevent it
from falling into the cylinders.
8. Install:
1 • compression gauge set 14/18 mm 1
• compression gauge adapter 12 mm 2
2 Compression gauge set 14/18 mm

YU-33223
Compression gauge adapter
12 mm
YU-33223-3
9. Measure:
• compression pressure
Out of specification → Refer to steps (c)
and (d).
Compression pressure (at sea

level)
Minimum
1,040 kPa
(10.4 kg/cm2, 148 psi)
Standard
1,200 kPa
(12.0 kg/cm2, 171 psi)
Maximum
1,340 kPa
(13.4 kg/cm2, 191psi)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Set the main switch to “ON”.
b. With the throttle wide open, crank the
engine until the reading on the compression
gauge stabilizes.
WARNING
_
To prevent sparking, ground all spark plug

leads before cranking the engine.
NOTE:
_
The difference in compression pressure

between cylinders should not exceed 100 kPa
(1 kg/cm2, 14 psi).
3 - 24
CHK
c. If the compression pressure is above the
maximum specification, check the cylinder
head, valve surfaces and piston crown for
carbon deposits.
d. Carbon deposits → Eliminate.
e. If the compression pressure is below the
minimum specification, pour a teaspoonful
of engine oil into the spark plug bore and
measure again.
Refer to the following table.
Compression pressure
(with oil applied into the cylinder)
Reading Diagnosis
Piston ring(s) wear
Higher than
or damage →
without oil
Repair.
Piston, valves, cyl-
Same as without inder head gasket
oil or piston possibly
defective → Repair.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
10.Install:
• spark plug 18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)
T.
R.
11.Connect:
• spark plug cap
12.Remove:
13.Install:
• decompression solenoid
Refer to “CAMSHAFTS” in chapter 5.
14.Install:
• air filter case
• fuel tank
• seat
3 - 25
CHK
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL ADJ
EAS00071
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOTE:
_
• Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.

• Make sure the motorcycle is upright.

3. Remove:
• seat
4. Remove:
• dipstick 1
5. Check:
• engine oil level
The engine oil level should be between the
minimum level mark a and maximum level
mark b.
Below the minimum level mark → Add the
recommended engine oil to the proper level.
NOTE:
Do not screw the dipstick in when inspecting
the oil level.
Recommended oil
Yamalube 4 (20W40) or
SAE 20W40 type SE motor oil
CAUTION:
_
• Engine oil also lubricates the clutch and

the wrong oil types or additives could
cause clutch slippage. Therefore, do not
add any chemical additives.
• Do not allow foreign materials to enter the
crankcase.
NOTE:
_
• API Service “SE”, “SF” and “SG” type or

equivalent (e.g., “SF-SE”, “SF-SE-CC”, “SF-
SE-SD”).
• Before checking the engine oil level, wait a
few minutes until the oil has settled.
3 - 26
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL/ CHK
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL ADJ
6. Install:
• dipstick
8. Check the engine oil level again.
NOTE:
_
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few

minutes until the oil has settled.
9. Install:
• seat
EAS00073
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
2. Place a container under the engine oil drain
bolt.
3. Remove:
• dipstick 1
• engine oil drain bolt (oil tank) 2
• engine oil drain bolt (engine) 3
4. Drain:
• engine oil
(completely from the oil tank and crank-
case)
3 - 27
CHK
5. If the oil filter cartridge is also to be
replaced, perform the following procedure.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the oil filter cartridge 1 with an oil
filter wrench 2.
Oil filter wrench

YU-38411
b. Lubricate the O-ring 3 of the new oil filter

cartridge with a thin coat of engine oil.
CAUTION:
_
Make sure the O-ring 3 is positioned cor-

rectly in the groove of the oil filter car-
tridge.
c. Tighten the new oil filter cartridge to specifi-

cation with an oil filter wrench.
Oil filter cartridge

T.
R.
17 Nm (1.7 m • kg, 12 ft • lb)
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6. Check:
• engine oil drain bolt gasket
Damage → Replace.
7. Install:
• engine oil drain bolts
(along with the gasket)
43 Nm (4.3 m • kg, 31 ft • lb)
T.
R.
3 - 28
CHK
8. Fill:
• oil tank
(with the specified amount of the recom-
mended engine oil)
Quantity
Total amount
5.0 L (4.40 Imp qt, 5.29 US qt)
Without oil filter cartridge
replacement
3.7 L (3.26 Imp qt, 3.91 US qt)
With oil filter cartridge
replacement
4.1 L (3.61 Imp qt, 4.33 US qt)
NOTE:
_
• Pour the engine oil in several stages.

• First, pour in 2.5 L of oil and then start the
engine and rev it 3 to 5 times. Stop the
engine, and then pour in the remainder of the
specified amount.
CAUTION:
When starting the engine make sure the
dipstick is securely fitted into the oil tank.
9. Fill: (when engine disassembly)

• crankcase and oil tank
Quantity
Total amount
5.0 L (4.40 Imp qt, 5.29 US qt)
Oil tank
3.0 L (2.64 Imp qt, 3.17 US qt)
Crankcase
2.0 L (1.76 Imp qt, 2.11 US qt)
NOTE:
_
After the engine has been disassembled, pour

the specified amount of engine oil into the
crankcase and the oil tank. When pouring
engine oil into the crankcase, pour it into the
hole of the removed bolt 1.
3 - 29
CHK
10.Install:
• dipstick
11.Start the engine, warm it up for several min-
12.Check:
• engine
(for engine oil leaks)
13.Check:
Refer to “CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
LEVEL”.
14.Check:
• engine oil pressure
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Slightly loosen the oil gallery bolt 1.
b. Start the engine and keep it idling until
engine oil starts to seep from the oil gallery
bolt. If no engine oil comes out after one
minute, turn the engine off so that it will not
seize.
c. Check the engine oil passages, the oil filter
cartridge and the oil pump for damage or
leakage. Refer to “ENGINE OIL PUMP” in
chapter 5.
d. Start the engine after solving the problem(s)
and check the engine oil pressure again.
e. Tighten the oil gallery bolt to specification.
Oil gallery bolt

21 Nm (2.1 m • kg, 15 ft • lb)
T.
R.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 30
CHK
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ADJ
EAS00077
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1. Check:
Below the minimum level mark → Add the
recommended engine oil to the proper level.
CAUTION:
_
When the engine is cold, the engine oil will

have a higher viscosity, causing the engine
oil pressure to increase. Therefore, be sure
to measure the engine oil pressure after
warming up the engine.
3. Remove:
• oil gallery bolt 1
WARNING
_
The engine, muffler and engine oil are

extremely hot.
4. Install:
• oil pressure gauge 1
• oil pressure adaptor E
Pressure gauge
YU-03153
Oil pressure adaptor E
YM-03129
3 - 31
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE/ CHK
CHECKING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL LEVEL ADJ
5. Measure:
• engine oil pressure
(at the following conditions)
Engine oil pressure

40 ~ 80 kPa
(0.4 ~ 0.8 kg/cm2,
5.688 ~ 11.376 psi)
Engine speed
Approx. 900 r/min
Engine oil temperature
70 ~ 90 °C (158 ~ 194 °F)
Engine oil pressure Possible causes

• Faulty oil pump
• Clogged oil filter
Below specifica- • Leaking oil pas-
tion sage
• Broken or dam-
aged oil seal
• Faulty oil filter
Above specifica-
• Oil viscosity too
tion
high
6. Install:
• oil gallery bolt
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)
T.
R.
CHECKING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL

LEVEL
NOTE:
_

2. Remove:
• muffler
• rear exhaust pipe
• front exhaust pipe
Refer to “ENGINE” in chapter 5.
3. Remove:
• checking bolt 1
3 - 32
CHECKING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL LEVEL/ CHK
CHANGING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL ADJ
4. Check:
• transfer gear oil level
The transfer gear oil level should be up to
the brim 2 of the hole.
Below the brim → Add the recommended
transfer gear oil to the proper level.
Recommended oil
SAE80API “GL-4” Hypoid gear
oil
CAUTION:
Do not allow foreign materials to enter the
transfer case.
5. Install:
• checking bolt 8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • lb)
T.
R.
6. Install:
• muffler
CHANGING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL

1. Remove:
• muffler
2. Place a container under the transfer gear oil
drain bolt.
3. Remove:
• straight plug 1
• transfer gear oil drain bolt 2
4. Drain:
• transfer gear oil
(completely from the transfer gear case)
5. Check:
2
• transfer gear oil drain bolt gasket
Damage → Replace.
3 - 33
CHK
CHECKING THE TRANSFER GEAR OIL LEVEL ADJ
6. Install:
• transfer gear oil drain bolt
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)
T.
R.
7. Fill:
• transfer gear case
mended transfer gear oil)
Quantity
Total amount
0.49 L (0.43 Imp qt, 0.52 US qt)
Periodic oil replacement
0.4 L (0.35 Imp qt, 0.42 US qt)
8. Install:
• straight plug
9. Check:
• transfer gear oil level
Refer to “CHECKING THE TRANSFER
GEAR OIL LEVEL”.
10.Install:
• muffler
3 - 34
CHK
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY ADJ
EAS00078
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE
PLAY
1. Check:
• clutch cable free play a
Clutch cable free play (at the end

of the clutch lever)
10 ~ 15 mm (0.39 ~ 0.59 in)
2. Adjust:
• clutch cable free play
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Handlebar side
a. Pull the boot 1 off.
b. Loosen the locknut 2.
c. Turn the adjusting bolt 3 in direction a or
b until the specified clutch cable free play
is obtained.
Clutch cable free play is

Direction a
increased.
Direction b
decreased.
d. Tighten the locknut.

NOTE:
_
If the specified clutch cable free play cannot be

obtained on the handlebar side of the cable,
use the adjusting nut on the engine side.
e. Pull the boot 1 in.
Engine side
b. Turn the adjusting bolt 5 in direction c or
d until the specified clutch cable free play
is obtained.

Direction c
increased.
Direction d
decreased.

▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 35
CHK
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENTS ADJ
EAS00088
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENTS
The following procedure applies to both air fil-
ter elements.
1. Remove:
• seat
• fuel tank
• air filter case
2. Remove:
• silencer air filter case cover 1
• silencer air filter element
• air filter case cover 2
• air filter element
3. Check:
Damage → Replace.
4. Install:
• air filter case cover
• silencer air filter element
• silencer air filter case cover
CAUTION:
_
Never operate the engine without the air fil-

ter element installed. Unfiltered air will
cause rapid wear of engine parts and may
damage the engine. Operating the engine
without the air filter element will also affect
the throttle body tuning, leading to poor
engine performance and possible overheat-
ing.
5. Install:
• air filter case
• fuel tank
• seat
3 - 36
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINTS/ CHK
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES ADJ
EAS00094
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINTS
throttle body joint.
1. Remove:
• seat
• fuel tank
• air filter case
2. Check:
1 • throttle body joint 1
Cracks/damage → Replace.
3. Install:
• air filter case
• fuel tank
• seat
EAS00096
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES
fuel hoses.
1. Remove:
• air induction system cover
3 - 37
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES/
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD BREATHER HOSE AND OIL TANK CHK
BREATHER HOSE ADJ
2. Check:
• fuel hose 1
3. Install:
• air induction system cover
EAS00098
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD
BREATHER HOSE AND OIL TANK
BREATHER HOSE
1. Remove:
• seat
• fuel tank
• air filter case
2. Check:
CAUTION:
_
1 Make sure the breather hoses are routed

correctly.
3. Install:
• air filter case
• fuel tank
• seat
3 - 38
CHK
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM ADJ
EAS00099
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
2 exhaust pipes and gaskets.
1. Check:
• exhaust pipe 1
93 3 • muffler 2
5 3 Cracks/damage → Replace.
8
• gasket 3
7 1 Exhaust gas leaks → Replace.
3 2. Check:
• tightening torque
6 4
Front exhaust pipe nut 4
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)
T.
Rear exhaust pipe bolt 5
R.
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)
Front exhaust pipe and rear
exhaust pipe bolt 6
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • lb)
Exhaust pipe and muffler bolt 7
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • lb)
Muffler and muffler bracket bolt 8
53 Nm (5.3 m • kg, 38 ft • lb)
Muffler and muffler bracket bolts 9
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)
3 - 39
CHK
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE ADJ
EAS00108
CHASSIS
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE
1. Check:
• brake lever free play a
Brake lever free play (at the end

of the brake lever)
2 ~ 5 mm (0.08 ~ 0.20 in)
2. Adjust:
• brake lever free play
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
b. Turn the adjusting screw 2 in direction a
or b until the specified brake lever free play
is obtained.
Brake lever free play is

Direction a
increased.
Brake lever free play is
Direction b
decreased.

WARNING
_
A soft or spongy feeling in the brake lever

can indicate the presence of air in the brake
system. Before the vehicle is operated, the
air must be removed by bleeding the brake
system. Air in the brake system will consid-
erably reduce braking performance and
could result in loss of control and possibly
an accident. Therefore, check and, if neces-
sary, bleed the brake system.
CAUTION:
_
After adjusting the brake lever free play,

make sure there is no brake drag.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 40
CHK
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE ADJ
EAS00110
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
1. Check:
• brake pedal position
(distance a from the top of the rider foot-
rest to the top of the brake pedal)
Brake pedal position (from the

top of the rider footrest to the top
of the brake pedal)
80 mm (3.2 in)
2. Adjust:
2 • brake pedal position
a
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
b. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 in direction a or
b 1 b until the specified brake pedal position is
obtained.
Direction a Brake pedal is raised.

Direction b Brake pedal is lowered.
2 1 c
WARNING
_
After adjusting the brake pedal position,

check that the end of the adjusting bolt c
is visible through the hole d.
d
c. Tighten the locknut 1 to specification.
Locknut
16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)
T.
R.
WARNING
_
A soft or spongy feeling in the brake pedal

can indicate the presence of air in the brake
system. Before the vehicle is operated, the
air must be removed by bleeding the brake
system. Air in the brake system will consid-
erably reduce braking performance and
could result in loss of control and possibly
an accident. Therefore, check and, if neces-
sary, bleed the brake system.
3 - 41
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE/ CHK
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL ADJ
CAUTION:
_
After adjusting the brake pedal position,

make sure there is no brake drag.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Adjust:
• rear brake light switch
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH”.
EAS00115
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
NOTE:
_

È 2. Check:
• brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a → Add
the recommended brake fluid to the proper
level.
Recommended brake fluid

DOT 4
È Front brake
É Rear brake
É
WARNING
_
a • Use only the designated brake fluid.

Other brake fluids may cause the rubber
seals to deteriorate, causing leakage and
poor brake performance.
• Refill with the same type of brake fluid
that is already in the system. Mixing
brake fluids may result in a harmful
chemical reaction, leading to poor brake
performance.
• When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the brake fluid reservoir. Water
will significantly lower the boiling point of
the brake fluid and could cause vapor
lock.
3 - 42
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL/
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS/ CHK
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS ADJ
CAUTION:
_
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces

and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean
up any spilt brake fluid immediately.
NOTE:
_
In order to ensure a correct reading of the

brake fluid level, make sure the top of the
brake fluid reservoir is horizontal.
EAS00120
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS
brake pads.
1. Operate the brake.
2. Check:
• front brake pad
Wear indicator groove 1 almost disap-
peared → Replace the brake pads as a set.
Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONT
BRAKE PADS” in chapter 4.
Brake pad wear limit a

0.5 mm (0.02 in)
EAS00118
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS
a brake pads.
1 1
1. Operate the brake.
2. Check:
• rear brake pad
Wear indicators 1 almost touch the brake
disc → Replace the brake pads as a set.
Refer to “REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE
PADS” in chapter 4.
Brake pad wear limit a

0.8 mm (0.03 in)
3 - 43
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH/ CHK
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE HOSES ADJ
EAS00128
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT
SWITCH
NOTE:
_
The rear brake light switch is operated by

movement of the brake pedal. The rear brake
light switch is properly adjusted when the
brake light comes on just before the braking
effect starts.
1. Check:
• rear brake light operation timing
Incorrect → Adjust.
2. Adjust:
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Hold the main body 1 of the rear brake light
switch so that it does not rotate and turn the
adjusting nut 2 in direction a or b until the
rear brake light comes on at the proper
time.
Brake light comes on

Direction a
sooner.
Brake light comes on
Direction b
later.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00131
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE
HOSES
brake hoses and brake hose clamps.
1. Check:
• brake hose
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
2. Check:
• brake hose clamp
Loose → Tighten the clamp bolt.
3. Hold the motorcycle upright and apply the
brake several times.
3 - 44
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE HOSES/ CHK
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM ADJ
È 4. Check:
• brake hose
Brake fluid leakage → Replace the dam-
aged hose.
Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” in
chapter 4.
È Front
É Rear
EAS00134
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE
SYSTEM
WARNING
_
Bleed the hydraulic brake system when-

ever:
• the system is disassembled.
• a brake hose is loosened, disconnected
or replaced.
• the brake fluid level is very low.
• brake operation is faulty.
NOTE:
_
• Be careful not to spill any brake fluid or allow

the brake master cylinder reservoir or brake
fluid reservoir to overflow.
• When bleeding the hydraulic brake system,
make sure there is always enough brake
fluid before applying the brake. Ignoring this
precaution could allow air to enter the
hydraulic brake system, considerably length-
ening the bleeding procedure.
• If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to
let the brake fluid settle for a few hours.
Repeat the bleeding procedure when the tiny
bubbles in the hose have disappeared.
3 - 45
CHK
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM ADJ
È 1. Bleed:
1 • hydraulic brake system
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the proper
2 level with the recommended brake fluid.
b. Install the diaphragm (brake master cylinder
reservoir or brake fluid reservoir).
c. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the
bleed screw 2.
È Front (right)
É Front (left)
É
2 Ê Rear
1
d. Place the other end of the hose into a con-
tainer.
e. Slowly apply the brake several times.
f. Fully pull the brake lever or fully press down
the brake pedal and hold it in position.
g. Loosen the bleed screw.
NOTE:
_
Loosening the bleed screw will release the

pressure and cause the brake lever to contact
Ê
the throttle grip or the brake pedal to fully
extend.
h. Tighten the bleed screw and then release

the brake lever or brake pedal.
i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all of the air
bubbles have disappeared from the brake
fluid in the plastic hose.
j. Tighten the bleed screw to specification.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • lb)
T.
R.
k. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the proper

level with the recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL”.
WARNING
_
After bleeding the hydraulic brake system,

check the brake operation.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 46
ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL/ CHK
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE BELT SLACK ADJ
EAS00137
ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL
NOTE:
_
The shift pedal position is determined by the

installed shift rod length a.
1. Measure:
• installed shift rod length a
Incorrect → Adjust.
Installed shift rod length

368 ~ 372 mm (14.49 ~ 14.65 in)
2. Adjust:
• installed shift rod length a
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Loosen both locknuts 1.
b. Turn the shift rod 2 in direction b or c to
obtain the correct shift pedal position.

Direction b
increases.
Direction c
decreases.
c. Tighten both locknuts.

d. Make sure the installed shift rod length is
within specification.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00138
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE BELT SLACK
NOTE:
_
The drive belt slack must be checked at the

tightest point on the belt.
CAUTION:
_
A drive belt that is too tight will overload

the engine and other vital parts, and one
that is too loose can skip and damage the
swingarm or cause an accident. Therefore,
keep the drive belt slack within the speci-
fied limits.
NOTE:
Measure the drive belt slack when the engine
is cold, and when the drive belt is dry.
3 - 47
CHK
WARNING
_
Securely support the motorcycle so that

there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
_
Place the motorcycle on the sidestand and or

on a suitable stand so that the rear wheel is
elevated.
2. Move the rear wheel several times and find

the tightest position of drive belt.
3. Check:
• drive belt slack a
Drive belt slack

On the sidestand
a 6 ~ 8 mm at 4.5 kg
(0.24 ~ 0.31 in at 10 lbs)
On a suitable stand
7 ~ 9 mm at 4.5 kg
(0.28 ~ 0.35 in at 10 lbs)
Belt tension gauge

YM-03170
NOTE:
1 _
• The level marks of the level window on the

lower drive belt cover are in units of 5 mm
(0.20 in). Use them as a standard for mea-
suring the drive belt slack.
• Measure the drive belt slack when the drive
belt has been pushed with 4.5 kg (10 lbs) of
pressure using a belt tension gauge 1.
3 - 48
CHK
4. Adjust:
• drive belt slack
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
1
NOTE:
_
Place the motorcycle on the suitable stand so

that the rear wheel is elevated.
a. Loosen the brake caliper bracket bolt 1.
b. Loosen the wheel axle nut 1.
È c. Loosen both locknuts 1.

È Right
a É Left
2 1 d. Turn both adjusting bolts 2 in direction a
or b until the specified drive belt slack is
obtained.
b Direction a Drive belt is tightened.

Direction b Drive belt is loosened.
É NOTE:
_
To maintain the proper wheel alignment, adjust

b both sides evenly.
1
2
e. Tighten the locknuts to specification.
Locknut
a 16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)
f. Tighten the wheel axle nut to specification.
Wheel axle nut

150 Nm (15.0 m • kg, 110 ft • lb)
T.
R.
g. Tighten the brake caliper bracket bolt to

specification.
Brake caliper bracket bolt

30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)
T.
R.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 49
CHK
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD ADJ
EAS00146
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE
STEERING HEAD
WARNING
_

NOTE:
_
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so

that the front wheel is elevated.
2. Check:
• steering head
Grasp the bottom of the front fork legs and
gently rock the front fork.
Binding/looseness → Adjust the steering
head.
3. Remove:
• tachometer
• speedometer assembly
Refer to “HEADLIGHT AND METER
ASSEMBLIES”.
4. Loosen:
• upper bracket pinch bolts 1
5. Remove:
• steering stem nut 2
• washer
• upper bracket 3
1 1
2 3
3 - 50
CHK
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD ADJ
6. Adjust:
• steering head
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the lock washer 1, the upper ring
1 nut 2, and the rubber washer 3.
2 b. Loosen the lower ring nut 4 and then
3 tighten it to specification with a spanner
wrench 5.
4
NOTE:
_
Set the torque wrench at a right angle to the

spanner wrench.
Spanner wrench
YU-33975
5
Lower ring nut (initial tightening
torque)
T.
R.
52 Nm (5.2 m • kg, 37 ft • lb)
c. Loosen the lower ring nut 4 completely,

then tighten it to specification.
WARNING
_
Do not overtighten the lower ring nut.
Lower ring nut (final tightening

torque)
T.
R.
4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • lb)
d. Check the steering head for looseness or

binding by turning the front fork all the way
in both directions. If any binding is felt,
remove the lower bracket and check the
upper and lower bearings.
1 Refer to “STEERING HEAD” in chapter 4.
2 e. Install the rubber washer 3.
f. Install the upper ring nut 2.
3
g. Finger tighten the upper ring nut 2, then
align the slots of both ring nuts. If neces-
sary, hold the lower ring nut and tighten the
upper ring nut until their slots are aligned.
h. Install the lock washer 1.
NOTE:
_
Make sure the lock washer tabs sit correctly in

the ring nut slots.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 51
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD/ CHK
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK ADJ
7. Install:
• upper bracket
• washer
• steering stem nut
115 Nm (11.5 m • kg, 85 ft • lb)
T.
R.
8. Tighten:
• upper bracket pinch bolt
26 Nm (2.6 m • kg, 19 ft • lb)
T.
R.
9. Install:
• speedometer
• tachometer
Refer to “HEADLIGHT AND METER
ASSEMBLIES”.
EAS00149
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK
WARNING
_

2. Check:
• inner tube
Damage/scratches → Replace.
• oil seal
Oil leakage → Replace.
3. Hold the motorcycle upright and apply the
front brake.
4. Check:
• front fork operation
Push down hard on the handlebar several
times and check if the front fork rebounds
smoothly.
Rough movement → Repair.
Refer to “FRONT FORK” in chapter 4.
3 - 52
CHK
ADJUSTING THE FRONT FORK LEGS ADJ
EAS00152
ADJUSTING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
WARNING
_
• Always adjust both front fork legs evenly.

Uneven adjustment can result in poor
handling and loss of stability.
• Securely support the motorcycle so that
CAUTION:
_
• Grooves are provided to indicate the

adjustment position.
• Never go beyond the maximum or mini-
mum adjustment positions.
1. Adjust:
• spring preload
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the adjusting bolt 1 in direction a or
b.
Spring preload is
Direction a increased (suspension
is harder).
Spring preload is
Direction b decreased (suspension
is softer).
Adjusting positions
Minimum: 8
Standard: 5
Maximum: 1
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 53
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER CHK
ASSEMBLY ADJ
EAS00156
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK
ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
WARNING
_

Spring preload
CAUTION:
_
Never go beyond the maximum or mini-

mum adjustment positions.
1. Adjust:
• spring preload
NOTE:
Adjust the spring preload with the special
wrench.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
b. Turn the spring preload adjusting nut 2 in
direction a or b.
Spring preload is
Direction a increased (suspension
is harder).
Spring preload is
Direction b decreased (suspension
is softer).
Adjusting positions a
Minimum: 40.5 mm (1.59 in)
Standard: 42.5 mm (1.67 in)
Maximum: 51.5 mm (2.03 in)
CAUTION:
_
Never turn the spring preload adjusting nut

beyond the maximum or minimum setting.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 54
CHK
CHECKING THE TIRES ADJ
EAS00166
CHECKING THE TIRES
tires.
1. Check:
• tire pressure
Out of specification → Regulate.
WARNING
_
• The tire pressure should only be checked

and regulated when the tire temperature
equals the ambient air temperature.
• The tire pressure and the suspension
must be adjusted according to the total
weight (including cargo, rider, passenger
and accessories) and the anticipated
riding speed.
• Operation of an overloaded motorcycle
could cause tire damage, an accident or
an injury.
NEVER OVERLOAD THE MOTORCYCLE.
Basic weight
(with oil and
295 kg (650 lb)
a full fuel
tank)
Maximum
185 kg (408 lb)
load*
Cold tire
Front Rear
pressure
250 kPa 250 kPa
Up to 90 kg
(2.5 kgf/cm2, (2.5 kgf/cm2,
load*
36 psi) 36 psi)
250 kPa 290 kPa
90 kg ~ maxi-
(2.5 kgf/cm2, (2.9 kgf/cm2,
mum load*
36 psi) 42 psi)
250 kPa 250 kPa
High-speed
(2.5 kgf/cm2, (2.5 kgf/cm2,
riding
36 psi) 36 psi)
* Total weight of rider, passenger, cargo and
accessories
WARNING
_
It is dangerous to ride with a worn-out tire.

When the tire tread reaches the wear limit,
replace the tire immediately.
3 - 55
CHK
2. Check:
• tire surfaces
Damage/wear → Replace the tire.
Minimum tire tread depth

1.0 mm (0.04 in)
1 Tire tread depth

2 Sidewall
3 Wear indicator
WARNING
_
• Do not use a tubeless tire on a wheel

designed only for tube tires to avoid tire
failure and personal injury from sudden
deflation.
• When using tube tires, be sure to install
the correct tube.
• Always replace a new tube tire and a new
tube as a set.
• To avoid pinching the tube, make sure the
wheel rim band and tube are centered in
È É the wheel groove.
• Patching a punctured tube is not recom-
mended. If it is absolutely necessary to
do so, use great care and replace the tube
as soon as possible with a good quality
replacement.
È Tire
É Wheel
Tube wheel Tube tire only

Tube or tubeless
Tubeless wheel
tire
• After extensive tests, the tires listed
below have been approved by Yamaha
Motor Co., Ltd. for this model. The front
and rear tires should always be by the
same manufacturer and of the same
design. No guarantee concerning han-
dling characteristics can be given if a tire
combination other than one approved by
Yamaha is used on this motorcycle.
3 - 56
CHK
Front tire
Manufacturer Model Size
120/70 ZR 18
M/C (59 W)
BRIDGESTONE BT020FG
120/70 ZR 18
(59 W)
120/70 ZR 18
M/C (59 W)
DUNLOP D220FST
120/70 ZR 18
(59 W)
Rear tire
Manufacturer Model Size
200/50 ZR 17
M/C (75 W)
BRIDGESTONE BT020R
200/50 ZR 17
(75 W)
200/50 ZR 17
M/C (75 W)
DUNLOP D220ST
200/50 ZR 17
(75 W)
WARNING
_
New tires have a relatively low grip on the

road surface until they have been slightly
worn. Therefore, approximately 100 km
should be traveled at normal speed before
any high-speed riding is done.
NOTE:
_
For tires with a direction of rotation mark 1:

• Install the tire with the mark pointing in the
direction of wheel rotation.
• Align the mark 2 with the valve installation
point.
3 - 57
CHECKING THE WHEELS/ CHK
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES ADJ
EAS00168
CHECKING THE WHEELS
wheels.
1. Check:
• wheel
Damage/out-of-round → Replace.
WARNING
_
Never attempt to make any repairs to the

wheel.
NOTE:
_
After a tire or wheel has been changed or

replaced, always balance the wheel.
EAS00170
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE
CABLES
inner and outer cables.
WARNING
_
Damaged outer cable may cause the cable

to corrode and interfere with its movement.
Replace damaged outer cable and inner
cables as soon as possible.
1. Check:
• outer cable
Damage → Replace.
2. Check:
• cable operation
Rough movement → Lubricate.
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil or a suitable cable
lubricant
NOTE:
_
Hold the cable end upright and pour a few

drops of lubricant into the cable sheath or use
a suitable lubricating device.
3 - 58
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS/
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND/ CHK
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION ADJ
EAS00171
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the levers and pedals.
Lithium-soap-based grease
EAS00172
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND
moving parts of the sidestand.
EAS00174
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION
moving parts of the rear suspension.
3 - 59
CHK
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY ADJ
EAS00178
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY
WARNING
_
Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas

and contain electrolyte which is made of
poisonous and highly caustic sulfuric acid.
Therefore, always follow these preventive
measures:
• Wear protective eye gear when handling
or working near batteries.
• Charge batteries in a well-ventilated area.
• Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or
open flames (e.g., welding equipment,
lighted cigarettes).
• DO NOT SMOKE when charging or han-
dling batteries.
• KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTE
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
• Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte as it
can cause severe burns or permanent eye
injury.
FIRST AID IN CASE OF BODILY CONTACT:
EXTERNAL
• Skin — Wash with water.
• Eyes — Flush with water for 15 minutes
and get immediate medical attention.
INTERNAL
• Drink large quantities of water or milk fol-
lowed with milk of magnesia, beaten egg
or vegetable oil. Get immediate medical
attention.
CAUTION:
_
• This is a sealed battery. Never remove the

sealing caps because the balance
between cells will not be maintained and
battery performance will deteriorate.
• Charging time, charging amperage and
charging voltage for an MF battery are dif-
ferent from those of conventional batter-
ies. The MF battery should be charged as
explained in the charging method illustra-
tions. If the battery is overcharged, the
electrolyte level will drop considerably.
Therefore, take special care when charg-
ing the battery.
3 - 60
CHK
NOTE:
_
Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not possi-

ble to check the charge state of the battery by
measuring the specific gravity of the electro-
lyte. Therefore, the charge of the battery has to
be checked by measuring the voltage at the
battery terminals.
1. Remove:
• seat
2. Disconnect:
• battery leads
1 (from the battery terminals)
2
CAUTION:
First, disconnect the negative battery lead
1, and then the positive battery lead 2.
3. Remove:
• battery
4. Check:
• battery charge
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect a pocket tester to the battery termi-
nals.
Positive tester probe →

positive battery terminal
Negative tester probe →
Relationship between the open-circuit voltage
negative battery terminal
Open-circuit voltage (V)
and the charging time at 20 °C (68 °F)
NOTE:
_
• The charge state of an MF battery can be

checked by measuring its open-circuit volt-
age (i.e., the voltage when the positive bat-
tery terminal is disconnected).
Charging time (hours)
· These values vary with the temperature, the condition of
• No charging is necessary when the open-cir-
the battery plates, and the electrolyte level. cuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V.
b. Check the charge of the battery, as shown

in the charts and the following example.
Example
c. Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V
d. Charging time = 6.5 hours
e. Charge of the battery = 20 ~ 30%
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 61
CHK
Charging 5. Charge:
Ambient temperature 20 °C (68 °F) • battery
(refer to the appropriate charging method

illustration)
WARNING
_
Do not quick charge a battery.

Time (minutes)
Check the open-circuit voltage.
CAUTION:
_
• Never remove the MF battery sealing

caps.
Ambient • Do not use a high-rate battery charger
temperature
20 °C (68 °F) since it forces a high-amperage current
into the battery quickly and can cause
battery overheating and battery plate
damage.
• If it is impossible to regulate the charging
current on the battery charger, be careful
Charging condition of the battery (%) not to overcharge the battery.
• When charging a battery, be sure to
remove it from the motorcycle. (If charg-
ing has to be done with the battery
mounted on the motorcycle, disconnect
the negative battery lead from the battery
terminal.)
• To reduce the chance of sparks, do not
plug in the battery charger until the bat-
tery charger leads are connected to the
battery.
• Before removing the battery charger lead
clips from the battery terminals, be sure
to turn off the battery charger.
• Make sure the battery charger lead clips
are in full contact with the battery termi-
nal and that they are not shorted. A cor-
roded battery charger lead clip may
generate heat in the contact area and a
weak clip spring may cause sparks.
• If the battery becomes hot to the touch at
any time during the charging process,
disconnect the battery charger and let the
battery cool before reconnecting it. Hot
batteries can explode!
• As shown in the following illustration, the
open-circuit voltage of an MF battery sta-
bilizes about 30 minutes after charging
has been completed. Therefore, wait 30
minutes after charging is completed
before measuring the open-circuit volt-
age.
3 - 62
CHK
Charging method using a variable-current (voltage) charger
NOTE:
Leave the battery unused for
Measure the open-circuit more than 30 minutes before
voltage prior to charging. measuring its open-circuit voltage.
Charger
Ammeter
NOTE:
Set the charging voltage to
Connect a charger and
16 ~ 17 V. (If the charging
ammeter to the battery and
voltage is lower, charging will
start charging.
be insufficient, if it is higher,
the battery will be over-
charged.)
Is the amperage higher
YES than the standard charging NO
amperage written on the
battery?
Adjust the charging voltage to

20 ~ 25 V.
YES Monitor the amperage for 3 ~ 5

Adjust the voltage to obtain the
minutes. Is the standard charg-
standard charging amperage.
ing amperage exceeded?
NO
If the amperage does not

exceed the standard charging
Set the timer to the charging
amperage after 5 minutes,
time determined by the open-
replace the battery.
circuit voltage.
Refer to “CHECKING AND
CHARGING THE BATTERY”.
If the required charging time exceeds 5 hours, it is advisable to check the

charging amperage after 5 hours. If there is any change in the amperage,
readjust the voltage to obtain the standard charging amperage.
Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its
open-circuit voltage.
12.8 V → Charging is complete.
12.0 ~ 12.7 V → Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V → Replace the battery.
3 - 63
CHK
Charging method using a constant voltage charger
NOTE:
Measure the open-circuit Leave the battery unused for
voltage prior to charging. more than 30 minutes before
measuring its open-circuit voltage.
Connect a charger and

ammeter to the battery and
start charging.
Is the amperage higher

YES than the standard charging NO
amperage written on the
battery?
Charge the battery until the charging This type of battery charger cannot
voltage reaches 15 V. charge an MF battery. A variable
voltage charger is recommended.
NOTE:
Set the charging time to a maxi-
mum of 20 hours.
Charger
Leave the battery unused for more than 30 Ammeter

minutes before measuring its open-circuit Voltmeter
voltage.
12.8 V → Charging is complete.
12.0 ~ 12.7 V → Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V → Replace the battery.
CAUTION:
Constant amperage chargers are
not suitable for charging MF bat-
teries.
3 - 64
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY/ CHK
CHECKING THE FUSES ADJ
6. Install:
• battery
Refer to “BATTERY”.
7. Connect:
• battery leads
(to the battery terminals)
2
1 CAUTION:
First, connect the positive battery lead 1,
and then the negative battery lead 2.
8. Check:
• battery terminals
Dirt → Clean with a wire brush.
9. Lubricate:
• battery terminals
Dielectric grease
10.Install:
• seat
EAS00181
CHECKING THE FUSES
fuses.
CAUTION:
_
To avoid a short circuit, always set the

main switch to “OFF” when checking or
replacing a fuse.
3 - 65
CHK
1. Remove:
• seat
2. Check:
• fuse
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and
check the continuity.
NOTE:
_
Set the pocket tester selector to “Ω × 1”.
Pocket tester
YU-03112
b. If the pocket tester indicates “∞”, replace

the fuse.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 66
CHK
3. Replace:
• blown fuse
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Set the main switch to “OFF”.
b. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage
rating.
c. Set on the switches to verify if the electrical
circuit is operational.
d. If the fuse immediately blows again, check
the electrical circuit.
Amperage
Fuses Q’ty
rating
Main 30 A 1
Headlight 15 A 1
Signaling system 10 A 1
Ignition 10 A 1
Fuel injection
15 A 1
system
ECU 10 A 1
Decompression
15 A 1
solenoid
Backup (odometer
7.5 A 1
and clock)
Reserve 30 A 1
Reserve 15 A 1
Reserve 10 A 1
Reserve 7.5 A 1
WARNING
_
Never use a fuse with an amperage rating

other than that specified. Improvising or
using a fuse with the wrong amperage rat-
ing may cause extensive damage to the
electrical system, cause the lighting and
ignition systems to malfunction and could
possibly cause a fire.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Install:
• seat
3 - 67
CHK
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB ADJ
EAS00182
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB
1. Remove:
• screws 1
• headlight lens unit 2
2. Disconnect:
• headlight coupler 1
3. Remove:
• headlight bulb holder cover 2
4. Detach:
• headlight bulb holder 1
5. Remove:
• headlight bulb 2
WARNING
_
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely

hot, keep flammable products and your
hands away from the bulb until it has
cooled down.
6. Install:
• headlight bulb New
Secure the new headlight bulb with the
headlight bulb holder.
CAUTION:
_
Avoid touching the glass part of the head-

light bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise
the transparency of the glass, the life of the
bulb and the luminous flux will be
adversely affected. If the headlight bulb
gets soiled, thoroughly clean it with a cloth
moistened with alcohol or lacquer thinner.
3 - 68
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB/ CHK
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJ
7. Attach:
• headlight bulb holder
8. Install:
• headlight bulb holder cover
9. Connect:
• headlight coupler
10.Install:
• headlight lens unit
• screws
EAS00184
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM
1. Adjust:
• headlight beam (vertically)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a
or b.
Headlight beam is
Direction a
raised.
Headlight beam is low-
Direction b
ered.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Adjust:
• headlight beam (horizontally)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the adjusting screw 2 in direction a
or b.
Headlight beam moves

Direction a
to the right.
Headlight beam moves
Direction b
to the left.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 69
CHK
INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS ADJ
INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS
ODOMETER AND TRIPMETER
1 Tachometer
2 Clock
3 Odometer/trip meter/fuel reserve trip meter
4 “RESET” button
5 “SELECT” button
Pushing the “SELECT” button switches the dis-

play between the odometer mode “ODO” and
the tripmeter modes “TRIP 1” and “TRIP 2” in
the following order:
“ODO” → “TRIP 1” → “TRIP 2” → “ODO”
If the fuel level warning light comes on, the
odometer display will automatically change to
the fuel reserve tripmeter mode “TRIP F” and
start counting the distance traveled from that
point. In that case, pushing the “SELECT” but-
ton switches the display between the various
tripmeter and odometer modes in the following
order:
“TRIP F” → “TRIP 1” → “TRIP 2” → “ODO” →
“TRIP F”
To reset a tripmeter, select it by pushing the

“SELECT” button, and then push the “RESET”
button for at least one second. If you do not
reset the fuel reserve tripmeter manually, it will
reset itself automatically and the display will
return to the prior mode after refueling and
traveling 5 km (3 mi).
3 - 70
CHK
INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS ADJ
ADJUSTING THE METER LIGHT
1. Adjust:
• meter light
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the key to “OFF”.
b. Push and hold the “SELECT” button.
c. Turn the key to “ON”, and then after five
seconds, release the “SELECT” button.
d. Push the “RESET” button to select the
desired brightness.
e. Push the “SELECT” button to set the bright-
ness level.
f. Turn the key to “OFF”
NOTE:
When adjusting the meter lighting, the odome-
ter display will indicate the brightness level.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00187
ADJUSTING THE CLOCK
NOTE:
_
This digital clock constantly displays the time.
1. Adjust:
• clock
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Push the “SELECT” button and “RESET”
button together for at least two seconds.
b. When the hour digits start flashing, push
the “RESET” button to set the hours.
c. Push the “SELECT” button, and the minute
digits will start flashing.
d. Push the “RESET” button to set the min-
utes.
e. Push the “SELECT” button and then
release it to start the clock.
NOTE:
• After setting the clock, be sure to push the
“SELECT” button before turning the key to
“OFF”, otherwise the clock will not be set.
• When setting the time (e.g., after reconnect-
ing the battery), first set the clock to 1:00 AM,
and then set it to the correct time.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3 - 71
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS CHAS
EAS00514
CHASSIS
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib) 1

T.
R.
3
1
2
1 4
3 40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)
2
T.
R.
16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
6
13 Nm (1.3 m • kg, 9.4 ft • Ib)
7
T.
R.
2
5 3
(6)
4 5 LT
72 Nm (7.2 m • kg, 52 ft • lb)
4
T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
8
LT
(6)
10
8 9
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib) 10
T.
R.

Removing the front wheel and brake Remove the parts in the order listed.
discs
NOTE:
_
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand

so that the front wheel is elevated.
1 Reflector bracket (left and right) 2
2 Brake hose holder 2
3 Reflector (left and right) 2
4 Brake caliper (left and right) 2
5 Front fork guard (left and right) 2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE
6 Wheel axle pinch bolt 1 Loosen. FRONT WHEEL”.
7 Front wheel axle 1
4-1
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib) 1

T.
R.
2
1 4
3 40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
6
13 Nm (1.3 m • kg, 9.4 ft • Ib)
7
T.
R.
2
5
(6)
4 5 LT
72 Nm (7.2 m • kg, 52 ft • lb)

T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
8
LT
(6)
10
8 9
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib) 10
T.
R.

8 Collar (left and right) 2
Refer to “INSTALLING THE FRONT
9 Front wheel 1
WHEEL”.
10 Brake disc (left and right) 2
procedure.
4-2
LS
New 1
2
LS
3
2
1 New

Disassembling the front wheel Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Oil seal (left and right) 2
2 Wheel bearing (left and right) 2
3 Spacer 1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
4-3
EAS00521
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL
WARNING
_

NOTE:
_

2. Remove:
• left brake caliper
• right brake caliper
NOTE:
_
Do not apply the brake lever when removing

the brake calipers.
3. Elevate:
• front wheel
NOTE:
_

EAS00525
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Check:
• wheel axle
Roll the wheel axle on a flat surface.
Bends → Replace.
WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent wheel

axle.
2. Check:
• tire
• front wheel
Damage/wear → Replace.
Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” and
“CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter 3.
4-4
3. Measure:
• radial wheel runout 1
• lateral wheel runout 2
Over the specified limits → Replace.
Radial wheel runout limit

1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Lateral wheel runout limit
0.5 mm (0.02 in)
4. Check:
• wheel bearings
Front wheel turns roughly or is loose →
Replace the wheel bearings.
• oil seals
2 5. Replace:
• wheel bearings New
New 1 • oil seals New
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Clean the outside of the front wheel hub.
b. Remove the oil seals 1 with a flat-head
screwdriver.
NOTE:
_
To prevent damaging the wheel, place a rag 2

between the screwdriver and the wheel sur-
face.
c. Remove the wheel bearings 3 with a gen-

eral bearing puller.
d. Install the new wheel bearings and oil seals
in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
_
Do not contact the wheel bearing inner race

4 or balls 5. Contact should be made only
with the outer race 6.
NOTE:
_
Use a socket 7 that matches the diameter of

the wheel bearing outer race and oil seal.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4-5
EAS00531
CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS
brake discs.
1. Check:
• brake disc
Damage/galling → Replace.
2. Measure:
• brake disc deflection
Out of specification → Correct the brake
disc deflection or replace the brake disc.
Brake disc deflection limit

(maximum)
Front: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Rear: 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so
that the wheel is elevated.
b. Before measuring the front brake disc
deflection, turn the handlebar to the left or
right to ensure that the front wheel is sta-
tionary.
c. Remove the brake caliper.
d. Hold the dial gauge at a right angle against
the brake disc surface.
e. Measure the deflection 1.5 mm (0.006 in)
below the edge of the brake disc.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Measure:
• brake disc thickness
Measure the brake disc thickness at a few
different locations.
Out of specification → Replace.
Brake disc thickness limit

(minimum)
Front: 4.5 mm (0.18 in)
Rear: 5.5 mm (0.22 in)
4-6
4. Adjust:
• brake disc deflection
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the brake disc.
b. Rotate the brake disc by one bolt hole.
c. Install the brake disc.
NOTE:
_
Tighten the brake disc bolts in stages and in a

crisscross pattern.
Brake disc bolt

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)
T.
LOCTITE® 648
R.
d. Measure the brake disc deflection.
e. If out of specification, repeat the adjustment
steps until the brake disc deflection is within
specification.
f. If the brake disc deflection cannot be
brought within specification, replace the
brake disc.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00544
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL
brake discs.
1. Install:
• brake discs 18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
• Apply locking agent (LOCTITE® 648) to the
threads of the brake disc bolts.
• Tighten the brake disc bolts in stages and in
a crisscross pattern.
4-7
2. Lubricate:
• wheel axle
• oil seal lips
3. Install:
• collars
• front wheel
• front wheel axle
4. Tighten:
• front wheel axle 1
72 Nm (7.2 m • kg, 52 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• wheel axle pinch bolt 2
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)
2
T.
R.
1
CAUTION:
_
Before tightening the wheel axle nut, push

down hard on the handlebar several times
and check if the front fork rebounds
smoothly.
5. Install:
• spacer
• front fork guard (left and right)
• front fork guard bolts
13 Nm (1.3 m • kg, 9.4 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
When installing the front fork guards, make

sure that there is not dirt between the guard
and the front fork.
6. Install:
• brake calipers
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • lb)
T.
R.
WARNING
_
Make sure the brake hose is routed prop-

erly.
4-8
EAS00549
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
_
• After replacing the tire, wheel or both, the

front wheel static balance should be
adjusted.
• Adjust the front wheel static balance with the
brake discs installed.
1. Remove:
• balancing weight(s)
2. Find:
• front wheel’s heavy spot
NOTE:
_
Place the front wheel on a suitable balancing

stand.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Spin the front wheel.
b. When the front wheel stops, put an “X1”
mark at the bottom of the wheel.
c. Turn the front wheel 90° so that the “X1”
mark is positioned as shown.
d. Release the front wheel.
e. When the wheel stops, put an “X” mark at
the bottom of the wheel.
f. Repeat steps (d) through (f) several times
until all the marks come to rest at the same
spot.
g. The spot where all the marks come to rest
is the front wheel’s heavy spot “X”.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4-9
3. Adjust:
• front wheel static balance
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Install a balancing weight 1 onto the rim
exactly opposite the heavy spot “X”.
NOTE:
_
Start with the lightest weight.
b. Turn the front wheel 90° so that the heavy

spot is positioned as shown.
c. If the heavy spot does not stay in that posi-
tion, install a heavier weight.
d. Repeat steps (b) and (c) until the front
wheel is balanced.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Check:
• front wheel static balance
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the front wheel and make sure it stays
at each position shown.
b. If the front wheel does not remain stationary
at all of the positions, rebalance it.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4 - 10
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC, AND REAR WHEEL
PULLEY CHAS
EAS00550
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC, AND REAR WHEEL PULLEY
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
T.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
R.
1
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
3
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the rear fender Remove the parts in the order listed.
Seat Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” in
chapter 3.
1 Tail sub-wire harness coupler 1 Disconnect.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE
2 Rear fender assembly 1
REAR WHEEL”.
3 Rear fender bracket (left and right) 2
procedure.
4 - 11
PULLEY CHAS
27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
5 3
T.
R.
150 Nm (15.0 m • kg, 110 ft • Ib)
5 6
4 7
1
10 16 6 7
11
8
2 9
12 8
13 9 15
16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
15
14

Removing the rear wheel Remove the parts in the order listed.
NOTE:
_
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand

so that the rear wheel is elevated.
1 Upper drive belt cover 1

2 Upper drive belt cover plate 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE REAR
3 Brake caliper 1 WHEEL”.
4 Brake caliper bracket bolt 1
5 Pin boot 2
6 Brake pad/brake pad shim 2/2
7 Brake pad spring 2
4 - 12
PULLEY CHAS
27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
5 3
T.
R.
150 Nm (15.0 m • kg, 110 ft • Ib)
5 6
4 7
1
10 16 6 7
11
8
2 9
12 8
13 9 15
16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
15
14

8 Locknut (left and right) 2 Loosen.
9 Adjusting bolt (left and right) 2 Loosen.
10 Wheel axle nut 1
11 Right adjusting plate 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE
12 Left adjusting plate 1 REAR WHEEL” and “INSTALL-
13 Rear wheel axle 1 ING THE REAR WHEEL”.
14 Rear wheel 1
15 Collar (left and right) 2
16 Brake caliper bracket 1
procedure.
4 - 13
PULLEY CHAS
EAS00556

Removing the brake disc and rear Remove the parts in the order listed.
wheel pulley
1 Brake disc cover 1
2 Brake disc 1
3 Rear wheel pulley 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE REAR
4 Oil seal 1 WHEEL”.
5 Circlip 1
6 Rear wheel drive hub 1
7 Circlip 1
4 - 14
PULLEY CHAS

8 Collar 1
9 Bearing 1
10 Collar 1
11 Bearing 1
12 Rear wheel drive hub damper 6
13 Rear wheel 1
procedure.
4 - 15
PULLEY CHAS
EAS00560

Disassembling the rear wheel Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Oil seal 1
2 Bearing 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE REAR
3 Spacer 1 WHEEL”.
4 Bearing 2
5 Rear wheel 1
procedure.
4 - 16
PULLEY CHAS
EAS00561
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL
WARNING
_

NOTE:
_

2. Remove:
• brake caliper
NOTE:
_
Do not depress the brake pedal when remov-

ing the brake caliper.
3. Loosen:
• locknuts
• adjusting nuts
4. Remove:
• wheel axle nut
• wheel axle
• rear wheel
NOTE:
_
Push the rear wheel forward and remove the

drive belt from the rear wheel pulley.
EAS00565
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Check:
• wheel axle
• rear wheel
• wheel bearings
• oil seals
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT
WHEEL”.
2. Check:
• tire
• rear wheel
Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” and
“CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter 3.
3. Measure:
• radial wheel runout
• lateral wheel runout
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
4 - 17
PULLEY CHAS
EAS00567
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL DRIVE HUB
1. Check:
• rear wheel drive hub 1
• rear wheel drive hub dampers 2
EAS00568
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE REAR
WHEEL PULLEY
1. Check:
• rear wheel pulley
Surface plating has come → Replace the
rear wheel pulley.
Bent teeth → Replace the rear wheel pul-
ley.
2. Replace:
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the self-locking nuts and the rear
wheel pulley.
b. Clean the rear wheel drive hub with a clean
cloth, especially the surfaces that contact
the pulley.
c. Install the new rear wheel pulley.
Rear wheel pulley self-locking nut

95 Nm (9.5 m • kg, 68 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
Tighten the self-locking nuts in stages and in a

crisscross pattern.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
ASSEMBLING THE REAR WHEEL

1. Install:
• bearings
• spacer
• bearing
• oil seal New
DISCS”.
4 - 18
PULLEY CHAS
EAS00572
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Lubricate:
• oil seal lips
2. Install:
• rear wheel drive hub dampers 1
3. Install:
• rear wheel drive hub assembly 1
4. Install:
• rear wheel pulley 1
95 Nm (9.5 m • kg, 68 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
Tighten the self-locking nuts in stages and in a
crisscross pattern.
Install the rear wheel pulley with its wider
spokes situated on top of the rear wheel
spokes.
5. Install:
• brake disc
• brake disc cover
NOTE:
• Apply locking agent (LOCTITE® 648) to the
threads of the brake disc bolts.
• Tighten the brake disc bolts in stages and in
4 - 19
PULLEY CHAS
6. Install:
• brake caliper bracket 1
• washer
• brake caliper bracket bolt 2
NOTE:
Temporarily tighten the brake caliper bracket
bolt.
7. Install:
• collars
• rear wheel
• adjusting plates
• rear wheel axle
• washer
• wheel axle nut
NOTE:
Temporarily tighten the wheel axle nut.
8. Adjust:
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE BELT
SLACK” in chapter 3.
9. Tighten:
• wheel axle nut
150 Nm (15.0 m • kg, 110 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• brake caliper bracket bolts

30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)
T.
R.
10.Install:
• brake pad springs
• brake pad shims
• brake pads
• pin boots
11.Install:
• brake caliper 1
27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • lb)
T.
R.
4 - 20
PULLEY CHAS
12.Install:
• upper drive belt cover plate 1
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• upper drive belt cover 2
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)
T.
R.
13.Install:
• rear fender bracket 1
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • lb)
T.
R.
14.Install:
• rear fender assembly 1
15.Connect:
• tail sub-wire harness coupler 2
16.Install:
• seat
Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” in
chapter 3.
4 - 21
PULLEY CHAS
EAS00575
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
_
• After replacing the tire, wheel or both, the

rear wheel static balance should be adjusted.
• Adjust the rear wheel static balance with the
brake disc and rear wheel drive hub
installed.
1. Adjust:
• rear wheel static balance
DISCS”.
4 - 22
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
EAS00577
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

FRONT BRAKE PADS
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
1
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
6
5
5
6

Removing the front brake pads Remove the parts in the order listed.
The following procedure applies to both
of the front brake calipers.
1 Brake caliper bolt 2
2 Brake pad clip 2
3 Brake pad pin 1
5 Brake pad 2
6 Brake pad shim 2
procedure.
4 - 23
EAS00578
REAR BRAKE PADS
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
5
4
1
3
5
2 1
27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the rear brake pads Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Brake caliper retaining bolt 2
2 Brake caliper 1
3 Brake pad 2
4 Brake pad shim 2
procedure.
4 - 24
EAS00579
CAUTION:
_
Disc brake components rarely require dis-

assembly.
Therefore, always follow these preventive
measures:
• Never disassemble brake components
unless absolutely necessary.
• If any connection on the hydraulic brake
system is disconnected, the entire brake
system must be disassembled, drained,
cleaned, properly filled, and bled after
reassembly.
• Never use solvents on internal brake
components.
• Use only clean or new brake fluid for
cleaning brake components.
• Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
• Avoid brake fluid coming into contact
with the eyes as it can cause serious
injury.
FIRST AID FOR BRAKE FLUID ENTERING
THE EYES:
• Flush with water for 15 minutes and get
immediate medical attention.
EAS00580
REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS
The following procedure applies to both brake
1 calipers.
NOTE:
_
1 When replacing the brake pads, it is not neces-

sary to disconnect the brake hose or disas-
2 semble the brake caliper.
1. Remove:
• brake caliper bolts 1
• brake caliper 2
4 - 25
2. Remove:
• brake pad clips 1
1
• brake pad pin 2
1 • brake pad spring 3
3. Remove:
1 • brake pads 1
(along with the brake pad shims)
• brake pad shims
4. Measure:
• brake pad wear limit a
Out of specification → Replace the brake
pads as a set.
Brake pad wear limit

0.5 mm (0.02 in)
5. Install:
• brake pad shims
(onto the brake pads)
• brake pads
1 2 • brake pad spring
NOTE:
_
Always install new brake pads and a new

brake pad spring as a set.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the
bleed screw 2. Put the other end of the
hose into an open container.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push the brake
caliper pistons into the brake caliper with
your finger.
c. Tighten the bleed screw.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • lb)
T.
R.
4 - 26
d. Install new brake pads and a new brake pad
spring.
NOTE:
_
The arrow a on the brake pad spring must

point in the direction of disc rotation.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6. Install:
• brake caliper
• brake caliper bolts
27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • lb)
T.
R.
7. Check:
level.
LEVEL” in chapter 3.
8. Check:
• brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling → Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
EAS00583
REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS
NOTE:
_
When replacing the brake pads, it is not neces-

sary to disconnect the brake hose or disas-
semble the brake caliper.
1. Remove:
1 • brake caliper retaining bolts 1
2
• brake caliper 2
4 - 27
2. Remove:
• brake pads 1
1 (along with the brake pad shims)
3. Measure:
• brake pad wear limit a
Out of specification → Replace the brake
a pads as a set.
Brake pad wear limit

0.8 mm (0.03 in)
4. Install:
• brake pad shims
(onto the brake pads)
2 1 • brake pads
NOTE:
_
Always install new brake pads, brake pad

shims, and a brake pad spring as a set.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the
bleed screw 2. Put the other end of the
hose into an open container.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push the brake
caliper piston into the brake caliper with
4 3 your finger.
3 c. Tighten the bleed screw.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • lb)
T.
R.
d. Install a new brake pad shim 3 onto each

new brake pad 4.
e. Install new brake pads.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4 - 28
5. Install:
• brake caliper retaining bolt 1
6. Check:
a
level.
7. Check:
• brake pedal operation
system.
4 - 29
EAS00584
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

Removing the front brake master Remove the parts in the order listed.
cylinder
Brake fluid Drain.
1 Rear view mirror (right) 1
2 Brake master cylinder reservoir cap 1
3 Brake master cylinder reservoir 1
diaphragm holder
4 Brake master cylinder reservoir 1
diaphragm
5 Brake lever 1
6 Brake lever spring 1
4 - 30

7 Front brake light switch connector 2 Disconnect. Refer to “REMOVING THE
8 Union bolt 1 FRONT BRAKE MASTER
9 Brake hose 1 Disconnect. CYLINDER” and “ASSEM-
10 Copper washer 2 BLING AND INSTALLING
11 Brake master cylinder holder 1 THE FRONT BRAKE MAS-
12 Brake master cylinder 1 TER CYLINDER”.
13 Front brake light switch 1
procedure.
4 - 31
EAS00585

Disassembling the front brake Remove the parts in the order listed.
master cylinder
1 Dust boot 1
Refer to “ASSEMBLING AND INSTALL-
2 Circlip 1
ING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYL-
3 Brake master cylinder kit 1
INDER”.
4 Brake master cylinder 1
procedure.
4 - 32
EAS00586
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
3
4
5
1
6
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the brake fluid reservoir Remove the parts in the order listed.
Brake fluid Drain.
1 Brake fluid reservoir cover 1
2 Brake fluid reservoir cap 1
3 Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm holder 1
4 Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 1
5 Brake fluid reservoir 1
6 Brake fluid reservoir hose 1
procedure.
4 - 33
7
6
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
5 13
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
9
4
10
3 New 11
12
2
1 16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the rear brake master Remove the parts in the order listed.
cylinder
1 Brake master cylinder cover 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE
2 Union bolt 1 REAR BRAKE MASTER
3 Copper washer 2 CYLINDER” and “ASSEM-
4 Brake hose 1 Disconnect. BLING AND INSTALLING
THE REAR BRAKE MAS-
TER CYLINDER”.
5 Brake master cylinder bracket 1
6 Rear brake light switch 1
7 Horn 1 connector 2 Disconnect.
8 Right footrest assembly (right) 1
4 - 34
7
6
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
5 13
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
9
4
10
3 New 11
12
2
1 16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

9 Cotter pin 1
10 Pin 1
11 Brake rod 1
12 Locknut 1
procedure.
4 - 35
EAS00587
1
2 New
4
3
5

Disassembling the rear brake Remove the parts in the order listed.
master cylinder
1 Dust boot 1
2 Circlip 1
3 Brake master cylinder kit 1
4 Circlip 1
5 Brake hose joint 1
6 O-ring 1
procedure.
4 - 36
EAS00588
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
NOTE:
_
Before disassembling the front brake master

cylinder, drain the brake fluid from the entire
brake system.
1. Remove:
• union bolt 1
• copper washers 2
• brake hose 3
NOTE:
_
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place a

container under the master cylinder and the
end of the brake hose.
EAS00589
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
2 1. Remove:
3
• union bolt 1
• brake hose 3
1 NOTE:
_
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place a

container under the master cylinder and the
end of the brake hose.
È
EAS00592
MASTER CYLINDERS
The following procedure applies to the both of
the brake master cylinders.
1. Check:
• brake master cylinder 1
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace.
• brake fluid delivery passages
É (brake master cylinder body)
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed
air.
È Front
É Rear
4 - 37
È É 2. Check:
• brake master cylinder kit
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace.
È Front
É Rear
3. Check:
1 • rear brake fluid reservoir 1
2 • rear brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 2
4. Check:
• front brake master cylinder reservoir 1
• front brake master cylinder reservoir dia-
phragm 2
5. Check:
• brake hoses
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
EAS00598
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
WARNING
_
• Before installation, all internal brake com-

ponents should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
components.

DOT 4
4 - 38
1. Install:
• brake master cylinder
• brake master cylinder holder 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
• Install the brake master cylinder holder with

the “UP” mark facing up.
• Align the end of the brake master cylinder
holder with the punch mark a on the handle-
bar.
• First, tighten the upper bolt, then the lower
bolt.
2. Install:
• copper washers New
• brake hose
• union bolt 32 Nm (3.2 m • kg, 23 ft • lb)
T.
R.
WARNING
_
Proper brake hose routing is essential to

insure safe motorcycle operation. Refer to
“CABLE ROUTING” in chapter 2.
NOTE:
_
• While holding the brake hose, tighten the

union bolt as shown.
• Turn the handlebar to the left and right to
make sure the brake hose does not touch
other parts (e.g., wire harness, cables,
leads). Correct if necessary.
3. Fill:
• brake master cylinder reservoir
mended brake fluid)

DOT 4
4 - 39
WARNING
_
• Use only the designated brake fluid.

performance.
not enter the brake master cylinder reser-
voir. Water will significantly lower the
boiling point of the brake fluid and could
cause vapor lock.
CAUTION:
_

4. Bleed:
• brake system
5. Check:
level.
6. Check:
system.
4 - 40
EAS00608
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
1 New 1. Install:
a
• copper washers 1 New
• brake hoses 2
• union bolt 3 30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)
T.
R.
WARNING
2 3 _

CAUTION:
_
When installing the brake hose onto the

brake master cylinder, make sure the brake
pipe touches the projection a onto brake
master cylinder bracket, as shown.
2. Fill:
• brake fluid reservoir
(to the maximum level mark)

DOT 4
WARNING
_

performance.
lock.
CAUTION:
_

4 - 41
3. Bleed:
• brake system
4. Check:
a
level.
5. Adjust:
• brake pedal position a
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE”
in chapter 3.
Brake pedal position (from the

top of the rider footrest to the top
of the brake pedal)
80 mm (3.2 in)
6. Adjust:
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH” in chapter 3.
4 - 42
EAS00613
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
2 New
1
32 Nm (3.2 m • kg, 23 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the front brake calipers Remove the parts in the order listed.
Brake hose holder Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
Brake fluid Drain.
1 Union bolt 1 Refer to “DISASSEM-
2 Copper washer 2 BLING THE FRONT
3 Brake hose 1 Disconnect. BRAKE CALIPERS” and
4 Brake caliper bolt 2 “ASSEMBLING AND
5 Brake caliper 1 INSTALLING THE FRONT
BRAKE CALIPERS”.
procedure.
4 - 43
EAS00615
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)

7 New
T.
R.
6 8
New 7
New 7
6
New 7 2
5 1
3 4
4
5

Disassembling the front brake Remove the parts in the order listed.
calipers
1 Brake pad clip 2
2 Brake pad pin 1
4 Brake pad 2
5 Brake pad shim 2
6 Brake caliper piston 4 Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT
7 Brake caliper piston seal 8 BRAKE CALIPERS”.
8 Bleed screw 1
procedure.
4 - 44
EAS00616
REAR BRAKE CALIPER
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
1
3
New 2
8
7
27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • Ib)

8 7
T.
R.

Removing the rear brake caliper Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Union bolt 1 Refer to “DISASSEM-
2 Copper washer 2 BLING THE REAR BRAKE
3 Brake hose 1 Disconnect. CALIPER” and “ASSEM-
4 Brake caliper retaining bolt 2 BLING AND INSTALLING
5 Brake caliper 1 THE REAR BRAKE CALI-
PER”.
6 Brake pad 2
7 Brake pad shim 2
procedure.
4 - 45
EAS00617
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
3
2 New

Disassembling the rear brake Remove the parts in the order listed.
caliper
1 Brake caliper piston 1 Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE REAR
2 Brake caliper piston seal 2 BRAKE CALIPER”.
3 Bleed screw 1
procedure.
4 - 46
EAS00625
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE

CALIPERS
brake calipers.
NOTE:
_
Before disassembling the brake caliper, drain

the brake fluid from the entire brake system.
1. Remove:
• union bolt 1
• brake hose
NOTE:
_
Put the end of the brake hose into a container

and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
2. Remove:
• brake caliper pistons 1
• brake caliper piston seals 2
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Secure the right side brake caliper pistons
with a piece of wood a.
b. Blow compressed air into the brake hose
joint opening b to force out the left side pis-
tons from the brake caliper.
WARNING
_
• Never try to pry out the brake caliper pis-

tons.
• Do not loosen the bolts 3.
c. Remove the brake caliper piston seals.

d. Repeat the previous steps to force out the
right side pistons from the brake caliper.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4 - 47
EAS00627
DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE
CALIPER
NOTE:
_
Before disassembling the brake caliper, drain

the brake fluid from the entire brake system.
1. Remove:
• union bolt 1
1 • copper washers 2
• brake hose 3
NOTE:
_
3 Put the end of the brake hose into a container

and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
2
2. Remove:
• brake caliper piston
a • brake caliper piston seals
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Blow compressed air into the brake hose
joint opening a to force out the pistons
from the brake caliper.
WARNING
_
• Cover the brake caliper piston with a rag.

Be careful not to get injured when the pis-
tons are expelled from the brake caliper.
• Never try to pry out the brake caliper pis-
tons.
b. Remove the brake caliper piston seals.

▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4 - 48
EAS00633
CALIPERS
Recommended brake component

replacement schedule
Brake pads If necessary
Piston seals Every two years
Brake hoses Every four years
Every two years
and whenever the
Brake fluid
brake is disassem-
bled
È 1. Check:
• brake caliper pistons 1
Rust/scratches/wear → Replace the brake
caliper pistons.
• brake caliper cylinders 2
Scratches/wear → Replace the brake cali-
per assembly.
• brake caliper body
Cracks/damage → Replace the brake cali-
per assembly.
É • brake fluid delivery passages
(brake caliper body)
1 air.
WARNING
_
Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,

replace the brake caliper piston seals.
2
È Front
É Rear
2. Check:
• rear brake caliper bracket 1
1
4 - 49
EAS00638
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS
brake calipers.
WARNING
_

components as they will cause the piston
seals to swell and distort.
• Whenever a brake caliper is disassem-
bled, replace the brake caliper piston
seals.

DOT 4
1. Install:
• brake caliper 1
(temporarily)
• brake hose 3
T.
R.
WARNING
_

CAUTION:
_

brake caliper 1, make sure the brake pipe
a touches the projection b on the brake
caliper.
2. Remove:
• brake caliper
4 - 50
3. Install:
• brake pads
• brake pad spring
• brake caliper bolt
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• brake hose holder
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • lb)
T.
R.
4. Fill:
• brake master cylinder reservoir
mended brake fluid)

DOT 4
WARNING
_

performance.
not enter the brake master cylinder reser-
voir. Water will significantly lower the
boiling point of the brake fluid and could
cause vapor lock.
CAUTION:
_

5. Bleed:
• brake system
4 - 51
6. Check:
level.
7. Check:
system.
EAS00642
REAR BRAKE CALIPER
WARNING
_

components as they will cause the piston
seals to swell and distort.
• Whenever a brake caliper is disassem-
bled, replace the brake caliper piston
seals.

DOT 4
4 - 52
1. Install:
1 4
a 3 • brake caliper 1
(temporarily)
• brake hose 3
b
T.
R.
2 New
WARNING
_

CAUTION:
_

brake caliper 1, make sure the brake pipe
a touches the projection b on the brake
caliper.
2. Remove:
• brake caliper
3. Install:
• brake pad
• brake caliper
• brake caliper retaining bolts
27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • lb)
T.
R.
4 - 53
4. Fill:
• brake fluid reservoir
mended brake fluid)

DOT 4
WARNING
_

performance.
lock.
CAUTION:
_

5. Bleed:
• brake system
a Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
6. Check:
level.
7. Check:
• brake pedal operation
system.
4 - 54
FRONT FORK CHAS
EAS00647
FRONT FORK
26 Nm (2.6 m • kg, 19 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
3
2
4
5
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
1
16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

Removing the front fork legs Remove the parts in the order listed.
of the front fork legs.
Front wheel Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
1 Front fender 1
2 Upper bracket pinch bolt 2 Loosen.
Refer to “REMOVING THE
3 Cap bolt 1 Loosen.
FRONT FORK LEGS” and
4 Turn signal light bracket pinch bolt 1 Loosen.
“INSTALLING THE FRONT
5 Lower bracket pinch bolt 2 Loosen.
FORK LEGS”.
6 Front fork leg 1
procedure.
4 - 55
FRONT FORK CHAS
EAS00648

Disassembling the front fork legs Remove the parts in the order listed.
of the front fork legs.
1 Cap bolt 1
2 O-ring 1
3 Spacer 1
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT
4 Nut 1
FORK LEGS” and “ASSEMBLING THE
5 Spring seat 1
FRONT FORK LEGS”.
6 Fork spring 1
7 Outer tube 1
8 Dust seal 1
4 - 56
FRONT FORK CHAS

9 Oil seal clip 1
0 Oil seal 1
A Washer 1 Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT
B Damper rod assembly bolt 1 FORK LEGS” and “ASSEMBLING THE
C Copper washer 1 FRONT FORK LEGS”.
D Damper rod assembly 1
E Inner tube 1
procedure.
4 - 57
FRONT FORK CHAS
EAS00649
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
front fork legs.
WARNING
_

NOTE:
_

2
2. Loosen:
• upper bracket pinch bolts 1
• cap bolt 2
• turn signal light bracket pinch bolt 3
1 • lower bracket pinch bolts 4
WARNING
_
Before loosening the upper and lower

bracket pinch bolts and turn signal light
3 bracket pinch bolt, support the front fork
leg.
3. Remove:
• front fork leg
EAS00655
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS

front fork legs.
1. Remove:
• cap bolt 1
(from the damper rod)
• spacer 2
• nut 3
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Press down on the spacer with the fork
spring compressor 4.
b. Install the rod holder 5 between the nut 3
and the spacer 2.

YM-01441
Rod holder
YM-01434
4 - 58
FRONT FORK CHAS
NOTE:
_
Use the side of the rod holder that is marked

“B”.
c. Loosen the nut.

d. Remove the cap bolt.
e. Remove the rod holder and fork spring com-
pressor.
WARNING
_
The fork spring is compressed.
f. Remove the spacer and nut.

▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Drain:
• fork oil
NOTE:
_
Stroke the damper rod 1 several times while

draining the fork oil.
3. Remove:
• dust seal
• oil seal clip 1
• oil seal
• washer
(with a flat-head screwdriver)
CAUTION:
_
Do not scratch the inner tube.
4 - 59
FRONT FORK CHAS
4. Remove:
• damper rod assembly bolt
• copper washer
NOTE:
_
While holding the damper rod with the damper

rod holder 1, loosen the damper rod assem-
bly bolt.
Damper rod holder

YM-01423
EAS00657
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS

front fork legs.
1. Check:
• inner tube 1
• outer tube 2
Bends/damage/scratches → Replace.
WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent inner

tube as this may dangerously weaken it.
2. Measure:
• spring free length a
Spring free length

296 mm (11.65 in)
<Limit>: 291 mm (11.46 in)
4 - 60
FRONT FORK CHAS
3. Check:
• damper rod 1
Obstruction → Blow out all of the oil pas-
sages with compressed air.
CAUTION:
_
• The front fork leg has a built-in damper

adjusting rod and a very sophisticated
internal construction, which are particu-
larly sensitive to foreign material.
• When disassembling and assembling the
front fork leg, do not allow any foreign
material to enter the front fork.
4. Check:
• cap bolt O-ring
4 - 61
FRONT FORK CHAS
EAS00660
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
front fork legs.
WARNING
_
• Make sure the oil levels in both front fork

legs are equal.
• Uneven oil levels can result in poor han-
dling and a loss of stability.
NOTE:
_
• When assembling the front fork leg, be sure

to replace the following parts:
- inner tube bushing
- outer tube bushing
- oil seal
- dust seal
• Before assembling the front fork leg, make
sure all of the components are clean.
1. Install:
• damper rod assembly 1
CAUTION:
_
Allow the damper rod assembly to slide

slowly down the inner tube 2 until it pro-
trudes from the bottom of the inner tube.
Be careful not to damage the inner tube.
2. Tighten:
• damper rod assembly bolt 1
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
While holding the damper rod assembly with

the damper rod holder 2, tighten the damper
rod assembly bolt.
Damper rod holder

YM-01423
4 - 62
FRONT FORK CHAS
3. Install:
• dust seal 1
• oil seal clip 2
• oil seal 3
• washer 4
CAUTION:
_
Make sure the numbered side of the oil seal

faces down.
NOTE:
_
• Before installing the oil seal, lubricate its lips

with lithium-soap-based grease.
• Lubricate the outer surface of the inner tube
with fork oil.
• Before installing the oil seal, cover the top of
the front fork leg with a plastic bag 5 to pro-
tect the oil seal during installation.
4. Install:
• outer tube
(onto the inner tube)
5. Install:
• washer
• oil seal 1
(with the fork seal driver 2)
Fork seal driver

YM-01442
6. Install:
• oil seal clip 1
NOTE:
_
Adjust the oil seal clip so that it fits into the

outer tube’s groove.
4 - 63
FRONT FORK CHAS
7. Install:
• dust seal 1
(with the fork seal driver 2)
8. Install:
• rod puller 1
(onto the damper rod 2)
Rod puller
YM-01437
9. Fully compress the front fork leg.

10.Fill:
• front fork leg
mended fork oil)
Quantity (each front fork leg)

476 cm3 (16.8 Imp qt, 16.1 US qt)
Recommended oil
Yamaha suspension oil “01”
CAUTION:
_
• Be sure to use the recommended fork oil.

Other oils may have an adverse effect on
front fork performance.
• When disassembling and assembling the
front fork leg, do not allow any foreign
material to enter the front fork.
11.After filling the front fork leg, slowly stroke

the damper rod 1 up and down (at least ten
times) to distribute the fork oil.
NOTE:
_
Be sure to stroke the damper rod slowly

because the fork oil may spurt out.
4 - 64
FRONT FORK CHAS
12.Slowly stroke the outer tube 1 up and
down to distribute the fork oil once more
(1 stroke = about 150 mm (8.12 in)).
NOTE:
_
Be careful not to stroke the outer tube over

150 mm (8.12 in) as this will cause air to enter.
If the outer tube is stroke more than 150 mm
(8.12 in), repeat steps (11) and (12).
13.Before measuring the fork oil level, wait ten

minutes until the oil has settled and the air
bubbles have dispersed.
NOTE:
_
Be sure to bleed the front fork leg of any resid-

ual air.
14.Measure:
• front fork leg oil level a
Out of specification → Correct.
Front fork leg oil level (from the

top of the outer tube and damper
rod, with the outer tube fully com-
pressed, and without the spring)
100 mm (3.94 in)
4 - 65
FRONT FORK CHAS
15.Install:
• nut 1
• fork spring 2
• spring seat 3
• spacer 4
• cap bolt 5
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the rod puller.
b. Install the nut 1.
c. Install the rod puller onto the damper rod.
Rod puller
YM-01437
d. Install the fork spring, spring seat, and

spacer.
NOTE:
_
Install the spring with the smaller pitch a fac-

ing up È.
e. Press down on the spacer with the fork

spring compressor 6.
f. Pull up the rod puller and install the rod
holder between the nut 1 and the spacer
4.
NOTE:
_
Use the side of the rod holder that is marked

“B”.

YM-01441
Rod holder
YM-01434
g. Remove the rod puller.

h. Install the nut 1 and position it as specified
b.
Distance b
15.5 mm (0.61 in)
i. Hold the nut and tighten the cap bolt until it

comes into contact with the nut.
j. Hold the cap bolt and tighten the nut to
specification.
Nut
15 Nm (1.5 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)
T.
R.
4 - 66
FRONT FORK CHAS
k. Remove the rod holder and fork spring com-
pressor.
CAUTION:
_
The fork spring is compressed.

Always use a new cap bolt O-ring.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
16.Install:
• cap bolt
(onto the outer tube)
NOTE:
_
Temporary tighten the cap bolt.
EAS00662
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
front fork legs.
1. Install:
• front fork leg
Temporarily tighten the upper and lower
bracket pinch bolts.
NOTE:
_
Make sure the outer fork tube is flush with the

top of the upper bracket.
2 2. Tighten:
• lower bracket pinch bolts 1
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• turn signal light bracket pinch bolt 2

7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• cap bolt 3 23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)

T.
R.
1 • upper bracket pinch bolts 4

26 Nm (2.6 m • kg, 19 ft • lb)
T.
R.
WARNING
_
Make sure the brake hoses are routed prop-

erly.
3
4 - 67
FRONT FORK CHAS
3. Adjust:
• spring preload
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE FRONT FORK
LEGS” in chapter 3.
4 - 68
HANDLEBAR CHAS
EAS00664
HANDLEBAR

Removing the handlebar Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Rear view mirror (left and right) 2
2 Plastic clamp 6
3 Front brake light switch connector 2 Disconnect.
4 Brake master cylinder holder 1
Refer to “INSTALLING THE
6 Right handlebar switch 1
HANDLEBAR”.
7 Throttle cable holder 1
8 Throttle cable 2 Disconnect.
9 Throttle grip 1
10 Clutch switch coupler 1 Disconnect.
4 - 69
HANDLEBAR CHAS

11 Left handlebar switch 1
12 Handlebar grip 1 Refer to “REMOV-
ING THE HANDLE-
BAR”. Refer to “INSTALL-
13 Clutch cable 1 Disconnect. ING THE HANDLE-
14 Clutch lever holder 1 BAR”.
15 Upper handlebar holder 2
16 Handlebar 1
17 Lower handlebar holder 2
procedure.
4 - 70
HANDLEBAR CHAS
EAS00666
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR
WARNING
_

2. Remove:
• handlebar grip 1
NOTE:
_
Blow compressed air between the handlebar

and the handlebar grip, and gradually push the
grip off the handlebar.
EAS00668
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Check:
• handlebar
Bends/cracks/damage → Replace.
WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent handle-

bar as this may dangerously weaken it.
EAS00670
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR
WARNING
_

1 2. Install:
• washers
• lower handlebar holders 1
NOTE:
_
Temporarily tighten the nuts 2.

2
4 - 71
HANDLEBAR CHAS
3. Install:
2 • handlebar 1
• upper handlebar holders 2
28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)
T.
R.
CAUTION:
_
• First, tighten the bolts on the front side of

a the handlebar holder, and then on the rear
1
side.
• Turn the handlebar all the way to the left
and right. If there is any contact with the
fuel tank, adjust the handlebar position.
NOTE:
_
Align the match marks a on the handlebar

with the upper surface of the lower handlebar
holder.
4. Tighten:
• lower handlebar holder nuts
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • lb)
T.
R.
5. Install:
• clutch lever holder
NOTE:
_
Align the slit of clutch lever holder with the

punch mark a on the handlebar.
6. Install:
• clutch cable
NOTE:
_
Lubricate the end of the clutch cable with a thin

coat of lithium soap base grease.
4 - 72
HANDLEBAR CHAS
7. Install:
• left handlebar switch
NOTE:
_
Align the end a of the left handlebar switch

with the punch mark b on the handlebar.
8. Connect:
• clutch switch coupler
9. Install:
• handlebar grip
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Apply a thin coat of rubber adhesive onto
the left end of the handlebar.
b. Slide the handlebar grip over the left end of
the handlebar.
c. Wipe off any excess rubber adhesive with a
clean rag.
WARNING
_
Do not touch the handlebar grip until the

rubber adhesive has fully dried.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
10.Install:
• throttle grip
11.Connect:
• throttle cable
12.Install:
• right handlebar switch
NOTE:
_
Align the projection a on the right handlebar

switch with the hole b in the handlebar.
4 - 73
HANDLEBAR CHAS
13.Install:
• brake master cylinder
• brake master cylinder holder
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
• Install the brake master cylinder holder with

the “UP” mark facing up.
• Align the end of the brake master cylinder
holder with the punch mark a in the handle-
bar.
• First, tighten the upper bolt, then the lower
bolt.
14.Connect:
• front brake light switch connectors
15.Install:
• plastic clamps
NOTE:
_
Refer to “CABLE ROUTING” in chapter 2.
16.Adjust:
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH
CABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
Clutch cable free play (at the end

of the clutch lever)
10 ~ 15 mm (0.39 ~ 0.59 in)
17.Adjust:

4 ~ 6 mm (0.16 ~ 0.24 in)
4 - 74
STEERING HEAD CHAS
EAS00676
STEERING HEAD
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib) 1st 52 Nm (5.2 m • kg, 37 ft • lb)

T.
R.
T.
2nd 4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • lb)
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
115 Nm (11.5 m • kg, 85 ft • lb)
T.
LS
R.
1
2
8
LS 9
7 10
11
15
12 16
17
3
4
17
6 13
5 14 LS
5
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

Removing the lower bracket Remove the parts in the order listed.
Handlebar/handlebar holders Refer to “HANDLEBAR”.
Meter assemblies Refer to “HEADLIGHT AND METER
ASSEMBLIES” in chapter 3.
Front wheel Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
Front fork legs Refer to “FRONT FORK”.
1 Steering stem nut 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE STEERING
2 Upper bracket 1 HEAD”.
3 Cable guide 1
4 Headlight bracket 1
5 Brake hose bracket 2
6 Brake hose joint 1
7 Turn signal light bracket assembly 2
4 - 75
STEERING HEAD CHAS
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib) 1st 52 Nm (5.2 m • kg, 37 ft • lb)

T.
R.
T.
2nd 4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • lb)
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
115 Nm (11.5 m • kg, 85 ft • lb)
T.
LS
R.
1
2
8
LS 9
7 10
11
15
12 16
17
3
4
17
6 13
5 14 LS
5
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

8 Lock washer 1
9 Upper ring nut 1
10 Rubber washer 1
11 Lower ring nut 1 Refer to “REMOV-
ING THE LOWER
Refer to “INSTALL-
BRACKET”.
ING THE STEER-
12 Lower bracket 1
ING HEAD”.
13 Lower bearing 1
14 Lower bearing cover 1
15 Upper bearing cover 1
16 Upper bearing 1
17 Bearing outer race 1
procedure.
4 - 76
STEERING HEAD CHAS
EAS00677
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET
WARNING
_

2. Remove:
• ring nut 1
(with the spanner wrench 2)
Spanner wrench
YU-33975
WARNING
_
Securely support the lower bracket so that

there is no danger of it falling.
EAS00681
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Wash:
• bearings
• bearing races
Recommended cleaning solvent

Kerosene
2. Check:
• bearings
• bearing races
Damage/pitting → Replace.
4 - 77
STEERING HEAD CHAS
3. Replace:
• bearings
• bearing races
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the bearing races from the steering
head pipe with a long rod 1 and hammer.
b. Remove the bearing race from the lower
bracket with a floor chisel 2 and hammer.
c. Install a new rubber seal and new bearing
races.
CAUTION:
_
If the bearing race is not installed properly,

the steering head pipe could be damaged.
NOTE:
_
• Always replace the bearings and bearing

races as a set.
• Whenever the steering head is disassem-
bled, replace the rubber seal.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Check:
• upper bracket
• lower bracket
(along with the steering stem)
EAS00683
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Lubricate:
• upper bearing
• lower bearing
• bearing races
2. Install:
• lower ring nut 1
• rubber washer 2
4 • upper ring nut 3
3 • lock washer 4
Refer to “CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
1 THE STEERING HEAD” in chapter 3.
2
4 - 78
STEERING HEAD CHAS
3. Install:
• upper bracket
NOTE:
_
Temporarily tighten the steering stem nut.
4. Install:
• front fork legs
Refer to “FRONT FORK”.
NOTE:
_
Temporarily tighten the lower bracket pinch

bolts.
5. Tighten:
115 Nm (11.5 m • kg, 85 ft • lb)
T.
R.
4 - 79
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM CHAS
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

8 16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
59 Nm (5.9 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
11 14
13
1
LS 2
5
4
3
12 7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

11
T.
R.
6 125 Nm (12.5 m • kg, 90 ft • lb)

T.
R.
10

Removing the rear shock absorber Remove the parts in the order listed.
and swingarm
Rear brake master cylinder bracket Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES”.
Rear exhaust pipe Refer to “ENGINE” in chapter 5.
Rear wheel Refer to “REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC,
AND REAR WHEEL PULLEY”.
1 Adjusting bolt 2
2 Locknut 2
3 Lower drive belt cover plate 1
4 Spacer 1
5 Lower drive belt cover 1
6 Horn 2 coupler 1 Disconnect.
7 Horn 2 1
4 - 80
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

8 16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
59 Nm (5.9 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
11 14
13
1
LS 2
5
4
3
12 7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

11
T.
R.
6 125 Nm (12.5 m • kg, 90 ft • lb)

T.
R.
10

8 Brake hose holder 2
9 Self-locking nut 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE REAR
10 Bolt (shock absorber-connecting arm- 1 SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM”
frame) and “INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK
11 Cover (left and right) 2 ABSORBER AND SWINGARM”.
12 Pivot shaft nut/washer 1/1
13 Pivot shaft 1
14 Rear shock absorber and swingarm 1
assembly
procedure.
4 - 81
LS 12
59 Nm (5.9 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
13
15
7
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)

T.
LS
R.
9
2 1
LS 7
10 9
8 10
4 3 11 14
11 15
4 6 1 LS 13
5 LS
2
6
LS
4
LS
3
4
59 Nm (5.9 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
LS

Removing the rear shock absorber Remove the parts in the order listed.
and swingarm
1 Self-locking nut/washer/bolt 1/1/1 Bolt = 100 mm (3.94 in)
3 Connecting arm 2
4 O-ring 4
5 Rear shock absorber 1
6 Spacer/O-ring 1/2
8 Relay arm 1
9 Spacer/oil seal/bearing 1/2/1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE REAR
10 Spacer/bearing 1/2 SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM”.
11 Spacer/bearing 1/1
4 - 82
LS 12
59 Nm (5.9 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
13
15
7
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)

T.
LS
R.
9
2 1
LS 7
10 9
8 10
4 3 11 14
11 15
4 6 1 LS 13
5 LS
2
6
LS
4
LS
3
4
59 Nm (5.9 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
LS

12 Swingarm 1
13 Dust cover 2
14 Spacer 1
15 Bearing 2
procedure.
4 - 83
EAS00686
HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
WARNING
_
This rear shock absorber contains highly

compressed nitrogen gas. Before handling
the rear shock absorber, read and make
sure you understand the following informa-
tion. The manufacturer cannot be held
responsible for property damage or per-
sonal injury that may result from improper
handling of the rear shock absorber.
• Do not tamper or attempt to open the rear
shock absorber.
• Do not subject the rear shock absorber to
an open flame or any other source of high
heat. High heat can cause an explosion
due to excessive gas pressure.
• Do not deform or damage the rear shock
absorber in any way. Rear shock
absorber damage will result in poor
damping performance.
EAS00689
DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK
ABSORBER AND GAS CYLINDER
Gas pressure must be released before dispos-
ing of a rear shock absorber and gas cylinder.
To release the gas pressure, drill a 2 ~ 3-mm
hole through the gas cylinder at a point 15 ~ 20
mm from its end as shown.
WARNING
_
Wear eye protection to prevent eye damage

from released gas or metal chips.
4 - 84
EAS00703
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
AND SWINGARM
WARNING
_

NOTE:
_

1
2. Remove:
• bolt (shock absorber-connecting arm-
frame) 1
NOTE:
_
When removing the bolt (shock absorber-con-

necting arm-frame) 1, hold the swingarm so
that it does not drop down.
3. Measure:
• swingarm free play
• swingarm vertical movement
É
È ▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Measure the tightening torque of the pivot
shaft nut.
Pivot shaft nut

125 Nm (12.5 m • kg, 90 ft • lb)
T.
R.
b. Measure the swingarm side play È by mov-

ing the swingarm from side to side.
c. If the swingarm side play is out of specifica-
tion, check the spacers, bearings, washers,
and dust covers.
Swingarm side play (at the end of

the swingarm)
1 mm (0.04 in)
d. Check the swingarm vertical movement É

by moving the swingarm up and down.
If swingarm vertical movement is not
smooth or if there is binding, check the
spacers, bearings, washers, and dust cov-
ers.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4 - 85
EAS00696
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
1. Check:
• rear shock absorber rod
Bends/damage → Replace the rear shock
absorber assembly.
• rear shock absorber
Gas leaks/oil leaks → Replace the rear
shock absorber assembly.
• spring
Damage/wear → Replace the rear shock
absorber assembly.
• gas cylinder
Damage/gas leaks → Replace.
• bushings
• O-ring
• bolts
Bends/damage/wear → Replace.
CHECKING THE RELAY ARM AND

CONNECTING ARM
1. Check:
• relay arm 1
• connecting arms 2
• bearings
• oil seals
• spacers
CHECKING THE SWINGARM
1. Check:
• swingarm
2. Check:
• pivot shaft
Roll the pivot shaft on a flat surface.
Bends → Replace.
WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent pivot

shaft.
4 - 86
3. Wash:
• pivot shaft
• dust covers
• spacer
• bearings
Recommended cleaning solvent

Kerosine
4. Check:
• dust covers
• spacer
• oil seals
• bearings
EAS00711
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK
ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
1. Lubricate:
• bearings
• spacers
• dust covers
• O-rings
• pivot shaft
b 2
2. Install:
1 • bearings 1, 2, 3
3
(to relay arm)
a Installed depth a
c
4.5 mm (0.18 in)
2 Installed depth b
b
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Installed depth c
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
4 - 87
3. Install:
1 • bolt (shock absorber-connecting arm-
frame) 1
NOTE:
_
When installing the bolt (shock absorber-con-

necting arm-frame), hold the swingarm so that
it does not drop down.
4. Adjust:
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE BELT
SLACK” in chapter 3.
4 - 88
DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE SPROCKET CHAS
DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE SPROCKET

Removing the drive belt and drive Remove the parts in the order listed.
sprocket
Rear wheel Refer to “REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC,
Rear shock absorber and swingarm Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
assembly AND SWINGARM”.
1 Drive sprocket cover 1
2 Slider 2
3 Dowel pin 2
4 Transfer gear case bracket 1
5 Drive belt 1
6 Drive sprocket nut 1
7 Lock washer 1
8 Drive sprocket 1
procedure.
4 - 89
REMOVING THE DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE
SPROCKET
NOTE:
_
Loosen the drive sprocket nut before remove

the rear wheel.
1. Straighten the lock washer tab.
2. Loosen:
• drive sprocket nut 1
NOTE:
_
When loosening the drive sprocket nut, press

down on the brake pedal so the drive sprocket
does not move.
CHECKING THE DRIVE BELT

1. Clean:
• drive belt
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Wipe the drive belt with a clean cloth.
b. Put the drive belt in a mixture of mild deter-
gent and water. Then, remove any dirt from
the drive belt.
c. Remove the drive belt from the mixture and
rinse it off with clean water. Then, let the
drive belt thoroughly dry.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Check:
• drive belt
CAUTION:
• To protect the drive belt from damage,
handle it with care.
• The drive belt can not be bent smaller
than 127 mm (5 in) a.
• The removed drive belt can not be twisted
inside out.
4 - 90
3. Check:
• drive sprocket
Bent teeth → Replace the drive belt and
pulleys as a set.
INSTALLING THE DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE

SPROCKET
1. Install:
• drive sprocket 1
• lock washer 2 New
2. Install:
• drive belt
CAUTION:
_
Install the drive belt facing the same way it

was removed.
Do not twist the drive belt when installing
it.
3. Install:
• rear shock absorber and swingarm
assembly
Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND
SWINGARM”.
• rear wheel
Refer to “REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC,
4. Tighten:
• drive sprocket nut
100 Nm (10.0 m • kg, 72 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
When tightening the drive sprocket nut, press

down on the brake pedal so the drive sprocket
does not move.
5. Bend the lock washer tab along a flat side of

the nut.
4 - 91
ENGINE ENG
EAS00188
ENGINE
ENGINE
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib) 20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
53 Nm (5.3 m • kg, 38 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
4 5
1 5
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • Ib) (2)

T.
R.
(2) (2)
(3)
2
4
(2)
3
(2) 12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • Ib)
T.
4
R.

Removing the muffler and exhaust Remove the parts in the order listed.
pipes
1 Muffler 1
2 Rear exhaust pipe 1
3 Front exhaust pipe 1
4 Gasket 2
5 Gasket 2
procedure.
5-1
ENGINE ENG
8
1
2
5
6
3
7
LT
1 4
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib) 7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
4
R.
T.
R.
3
2
70 Nm (7.0 m • kg, 50 ft • Ib) 5
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the oil filter bracket and Remove the parts in the order listed.
horn
Seat/side covers Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” in
chapter 3.
Fuel tank Refer to “FUEL TANK” in chapter 3.
Air filter case Refer to “AIR FILTER CASE” in
chapter 3.
Silencer air filter case Refer to “SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE”
in chapter 3.
Throttle bodies/intake manifold Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in
chapter 6.
Air induction system parts Refer to “AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM” in
chapter 6.
Starter motor Refer to “STARTER MOTOR” in
chapter 7.
5-2
ENGINE ENG
6
5
7
LT
1
T.
4
R.
T.
R.
3
2
70 Nm (7.0 m • kg, 50 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Engine oil/oil filter cartridge Drain.
Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL”
in chapter 3.
Sub fuel tank Refer to “SUB FUEL TANK”.
Transfer gear oil Drain.
Refer to “CHANGING THE TRANSFER
GEAR OIL” in chapter 3.
Transfer gear case Refer to “TRANSFER GEAR CASE”.
Rider footrest (left) Refer to “ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS
AND VALVE LIFTERS”.
Rider footrest (right)/oil delivery pipe Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
1 Oil filter bolt 1
2 Oil filter bracket 1
5-3
ENGINE ENG
6
5
7
LT
1
T.
4
R.
T.
R.
3
2
70 Nm (7.0 m • kg, 50 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

3 Rectifier/regulator coupler 1 Disconnect.
4 Stator coil assembly coupler 1 Disconnect.
5 Rectifier/regulator 1
6 Rectifier/regulator bracket 1
7 Horn 2 1
8 Lean angle cut-off switch 1
procedure.
5-4
ENGINE ENG
8
6 5
2
7
1
3
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
12
4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
4
11
10

Disconnecting the leads and hoses Disconnect the parts in the order listed.
1 Spark plug caps 4
2 Cylinder head breather hose 1
3 Oil tank breather hose 1
4 Clutch cable 1
5 Plastic clamp 1
6 Decompression solenoid coupler 2
7 Crankshaft position sensor coupler 1
8 Cylinder identification coupler 1
9 Engine temperature sensor coupler 1
10 Neutral switch cover 1
11 Neutral switch 1
12 Speed sensor 1
For connecting, reverse the disconnec-
tion procedure.
5-5
ENGINE ENG
8
7
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
1 6
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

3
T.
R.

Removing the ignition coil and Remove the parts in the order listed.
linear control valve
1 Hose bracket 1
2 Wire harness bracket 1
3 Ignition coil connector 4 Disconnect.
4 Ignition coil 1 1
5 Ignition coil 2 1
6 Linear control valve coupler 1 Disconnect.
7 Linear control valve 1
8 Linear control valve bracket 1
procedure.
5-6
ENGINE ENG
1 2
1
11
13 9
88 Nm (8.8 m • kg, 64 ft • Ib) 3
T.
R.
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)
.
R.
14 98 Nm (9.8 m • kg, 71 ft • Ib)
.
R.
11
53 Nm (5.3 m • kg, 38 ft • Ib)
12
T.
R.
16 8
9
10 8
17
4
15
9
E
7
6
88 Nm (8.8 m • kg, 64 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
105 Nm (10.5 m • kg, 75 ft • lb)

6
T.
R.
18
5
7 48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

Removing the engine Remove the parts in the order listed.
NOTE:
_
Place a suitable stand under the frame

and engine.
1 Upper mounting bolt 2

2 Upper mounting bracket bolt 2
3 Upper mounting 1
4 Self-locking nut 1
5 Front mounting bolt 1
6 Front engine bracket self-locking nut 4
7 Front engine bracket 2
Refer to “INSTALLING THE ENGINE”.
8 Front engine bracket bolt 4
9 Self-locking nut 3
10 Upper rear mounting bolt 1
5-7
ENGINE ENG
1 2
1
11
13 9
88 Nm (8.8 m • kg, 64 ft • Ib) 3
T.
R.
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)
.
R.
14 98 Nm (9.8 m • kg, 71 ft • Ib)
.
R.
11
53 Nm (5.3 m • kg, 38 ft • Ib)
12
T.
R.
16 8
9
10 8
17
4
15
9
E
7
6
88 Nm (8.8 m • kg, 64 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
105 Nm (10.5 m • kg, 75 ft • lb)

6
T.
R.
18
5
7 48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

11 Rear engine bracket nut 2
12 Rear engine bracket bolt 2
13 Rear engine bracket (left) 1
14 Rear engine bracket (right) 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE
15 Spacer bolt 1 Loosen. ENGINE”.
16 Lower rear mounting bolt 1
17 Lower front mounting bolt 1
18 Engine 1
procedure.
5-8
ENGINE ENG
EAS00192
INSTALLING THE ENGINE
F 1. Install:
7 G • spacer bolt 1
• lower front mounting bolt 2
8 0 E • lower rear mounting bolt 3
G D 2. Tighten:
3 E
• spacer bolt 1
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)
9 6
T.
R.
NOTE:
2 • Tighten the spacer bolt 1 to specification
5 C
with a pivot shaft wrench 4.
A • When tightened, the spacer bolt 1 should be
1
H flat against the engine surface.
Pivot shaft wrench

YM-01485
B H
A 3. Install:
• self-locking nut 5, 6
• rear engine bracket (left) 7
• rear engine bracket (right) 8
• upper rear mounting bolt 9
• self-locking nut 0
• front engine bracket A
• front mounting bolt B
• self-locking nut C
• upper engine bracket D
• upper mounting bolts E
NOTE:
_
Do not fully tighten the bolts and nuts.
4. Tighten:
• upper mounting bolts E
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• upper engine bracket bolts F

48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • lb)
T.
R.
5. Tighten:
105 Nm (10.5 m • kg, 75 ft • lb)
T.
R.
88 Nm (8.8 m • kg, 64 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• nuts G 53 Nm (5.3 m • kg, 38 ft • lb)

T.
R.
98 Nm (9.8 m • kg, 71 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• self-lock nuts H
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• self-locking nut C
88 Nm (8.8 m • kg, 64 ft • lb)
T.
R.
5-9
ENGINE ENG
6. Connect:
• spark plug caps 3
NOTE:
3
1 3
INSTALLING THE MUFFLER AND

EXHAUST PIPES
1. Install:
• gaskets
• exhaust pipes
NOTE:
Finger tighten the exhaust pipe nuts and bolts.
2. Install:
• muffler
• bolt 1 53 Nm (5.3 m • kg, 38 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• bolts 2 20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)
T.
R.
3. Tighten:
• exhaust pipe nuts
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• exhaust pipe bolts

24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• clamp bolts 1
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • lb)
T.
R.
5 - 10
ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS AND VALVE LIFTERS ENG
ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS AND VALVE LIFTERS
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)

1
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
2
2
9 12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
11
12
(5)
13
14 New
11 (4)
3
10
7 8
6 4
5
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the engine left side cover Remove the parts in the order listed.
and camshaft sprocket cover
Seat/fuel tank/silencer air filter case Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS”,
“FUEL TANK” and “SILENCER AIR FIL-
TER CASE” in chapter 3.
Muffler/exhaust pipes Refer to “ENGINE”.
Engine oil Drain.
in chapter 3.
1 Spark plug cap 2/2 Disconnect.
2 Spark plug 4 Refer to “INSTALLING THE
3 Shift rod 1 CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
4 Rider footrest assembly (left) 1 COVER AND ENGINE
5 Canister 1 For califor- LEFT SIDE COVER”.
nia only.
5 - 11
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)

1
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
2
2
9 12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
11
12
(5)
13
14 New
11 (4)
3
10
7 8
6 4
5
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

6 Engine left side cover 1
7 Rubber damper 1
8 Timing mark accessing screw 1
9 Crankshaft end cover 1
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT
10 Decompression solenoid cover 1
SPROCKET COVER AND ENGINE
11 Camshaft sprocket cover 1 1
LEFT SIDE COVER”.
12 Dowel pin 2
13 Cylinder identification sensor 1
14 Camshaft sprocket cover 2 1
15 Camshaft sprocket cover gasket 1
procedure
5 - 12
1 2 4
4 3 4 5
3 4
5 5
54 5
5 34 5 5 3
4
5
7
5
6
New 8
9 8 New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing cylinder head covers Remove the parts in the order listed.
Ignition coil/rectifier/regulator/ Refer to “ENGINE”.
liner control valve
1 Cylinder head breather hose 1
3 Bolt 4 = 60 mm (2.36 in)
4 Bolt 12 = 50 mm (1.97 in)
5 Bolt 12 = 40 mm (1.57 in)
6 Rear cylinder head cover 1
7 Front cylinder head cover 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE CYLINDER
8 Cylinder head cover gasket 2 HEAD COVERS”.
9 Dowel pin 4
procedure
5 - 13
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib) E
T.
E
R.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
10 8
11 10 10
9 11 11
8 9
7
10
11
7
E
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4 E
1
3
2 5 New
New 5
6
6 1

Removing the push rods and rocker Remove the parts in the order listed.
arms
1 Push rod 1 3 = 288.5 mm (11.358 in) blue painting
2 Push rod 2 1 = 290.5 mm (11.437 in) yellow painting
3 Rear rocker arm base 1
4 Front rocker arm base 1
5 Rocker arm base gasket 2
Refer to “REMOVING THE ROCKER
6 Dowel pin 4
ARMS, PUSH RODS AND VALVE LIFT-
7 Rocker arm shaft 4
ERS” and “INSTALLING THE ROCKER
8 Rocker arm 1 2
ARMS AND PUSH RODS”.
9 Rocker arm 2 2
10 Locknut 2
11 Adjusting screw 2
procedure
5 - 14
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
4 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

E
T.
R.
E
2 6
5
1
E
7 E
3
7
2
3
E
E 2

Removing the valve lifters Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Push rod cover 2
2 O-ring 4
3 Seal 2
4 Air filter bracket 1
5 Rear valve lifter case 1
6 Front valve lifter case 1
7 Valve lifter 4 Refer to “REMOVING THE ROCKER
ARMS, PUSH RODS AND VALVE LIFT-
ERS” and “INSTALLING THE VALVE
LIFTERS”.
procedure
5 - 15
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS, PUSH
RODS AND VALVE LIFTERS
1. Align:
• TDC mark a on the crankshaft position
sensor rotor
(with the pointer b on the clutch/crankshaft
position sensor rotor cover)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the crankshaft clockwise.
sion stroke, align the TDC mark a on the
sensor rotor cover.
d c. Check the camshaft drive gear mark c
c position and camshaft driven gear mark d
position as shown.
If the marks are not aligned, turn the crank-
shaft counterclockwise 360 degrees and
recheck step b.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Remove:
• rocker arm bases
(with the rocker arms)
3. Remove:
• valve lifters
NOTE:
Make a note of the position of each valve lifter
so that they can be installed in the correct
place.
CAUTION:
Do not lay the removed valve lifter on its
side.
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND

ROCKER ARM SHAFTS
rocker arms and rocker arm shafts.
1. Check:
• rocker arm
5 - 16
2. Check:
• rocker arm shaft
Blue discoloration/excessive wear/pitting/
scratches → Replace or check the lubrica-
tion system.
3. Measure:
• rocker arm inside diameter a
Rocker arm inside diameter

18.000 ~ 18.018 mm
(0.7087 ~ 0.7094 in)
4. Measure:
• rocker arm shaft outside diameter a
Rocker arm shaft outside

diameter
17.976 ~ 17.991 mm
(0.7077 ~ 0.7083 in)
5. Calculate:
• rocker arm to rocker arm shaft clearance
NOTE:
Calculate the clearance by subtracting the
rocker arm shaft outside diameter from the
rocker arm inside diameter.
Above 0.08 mm (0.003 in) → Replace the

defective part(s).
Rocker arm to rocker arm shaft

clearance
0.009 ~ 0.042 mm
(0.0004 ~ 0.0017 in)
5 - 17
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARM BASES
1. Check:
• rocker arm base
CHECKING THE PUSH RODS

1. Check:
• push rod
• push rod end
Bends/damage → Replace.
2. Measure:
• push rod runout
Push rod runout

0.3 mm (0.012 in)
CHECKING THE VALVE LIFTERS AND

VALVE LIFTER CASES
1. Check:
• valve lifter
Blue discoloration/excessive wear/pitting/
scratches → Replace and check the lubri-
cation system.
2. Check:
• valve lifter case 1
Damage/wear → Replace the valve lifter
case.
• O-ring 2
Damage/wear → Replace the O-ring.
5 - 18
3. Measure:
• valve lifter outside diameter a
Valve lifter outside diameter

22.9680 ~ 22.9744 mm
(0.9043 ~ 0.9045 in)
4. Measure:
• valve lifter case inside diameter a
Valve lifter case inside diameter

23.000 ~ 23.021 mm
(0.9055 ~ 0.9063 in)
5. Calculate:
• valve lifter-to-valve lifter case clearance
NOTE:
valve lifter case outside diameter.
Above 0.072 mm (0.0028 in) → Replace the

defective part(s).
Valve lifter-to-valve lifter case

clearance
0.0256 ~ 0.0530 mm
(0.0010 ~ 0.0021 in)
BLEEDING A VALVE LIFTER

A valve lifter must be bled in the following
cases.
• When installing a new valve lifter
• When the valve lifter leaks oil
5 - 19
1. Bleed:
• valve lifter
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Fill a container with kerosene and place the
valve lifter into the container as shown.
Pump the plunger side of the valve lifter with
a press a number of times to let in kero-
sene.
CAUTION:
• Do not pump the valve lifter excessively.
• Kerosene is highly flammable.
1 Kerosene
2 Valve lifter
b. Install the valve lifter into the engine.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the valve lifter in its
appropriate position.
c. Start the engine and warm it up.

d. Stop the engine.
e. Remove the camshaft sprocket cover.
f. Rotate the camshaft until the punch mark 1
on the camshaft driven gear aligns with the
punch mark on the camshaft drive gear as
shown. This is the condition in which piston
#1 is at top dead center (TDC).
NOTE:
The crankshaft can be rotated smoothly when
the spark plugs are removed.
WARNING
Be careful since the engine is hot.
g. With piston #1 at TDC, count the indicated

number of gear teeth and place marks 2
through 5 on the camshaft driven gear as
shown. When these marks align between
the centers of the camshaft drive and driven
gears, the corresponding valve lifter is at its
highest point.
1 Piston #1 TDC punch mark
2 Cylinder #2 intake valve at its highest point
3 Cylinder #1 exhaust valve at its highest point
5 Cylinder #2 exhaust valve at its highest point
5 - 20
h. Rotate the crankshaft unit the mark (on the
camshaft driven gear) for the valve lifter to
be bled aligns with the camshaft drive gear
as shown.
Example: For bleeding the cylinder #2
intake valve lifter, align mark 2 as shown.
1 Piston #1 TDC punch mark
i. Leave the camshaft drive and driven gears
aligned for five minutes to allow the valve
lifter to bleed.
j. If necessary, repeat steps “h” and “i” to
bleed other valve lifters.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
CHECKING THE PUSH ROD COVER

1. Check:
• push rod cover 1
Cranks/damage → Replace.
• seal 2
• O-ring 3
Damage/wear → Replace the oil seal and
O-ring as a set.
INSTALLING THE VALVE LIFTERS

1. Install:
• valve lifter cases (front and rear)
• valve lifters
• air filter bracket
NOTE:
• Install the valve lifter in the correct place.
• After installing the valve lifters, fill the tops of
them with engine oil.
5 - 21
INSTALLING THE ROCKER ARMS AND
PUSH RODS
The following procedure applies to both cylin-
ders.
1. Install:
• rocker arms 1
• rocker arm shafts 2
(onto rocker arm base)
NOTE:
The thread hole a of the rocker arm shaft
must face to the outside.
2. Install:
• dowel pins 1
• rocker arm gasket 2 New
È 3. Install:
• rocker arm bass
(with rocker arms)
• push rods
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Put the rocker arm base on the cylinder
head.
b. Install the push rods.
NOTE:
• Be sure to correctly install the push rods
É between the rocker arms and valve lifters as
shown. The illustration is viewed from the
right side of the motorcycle.
È Rear cylinder
É Front cylinder
1 Intake side rocker arm
2 Exhaust side rocker arm
3 Intake valve lifter
4 Exhaust valve lifter
5 Push rod 2 = 288.5 mm (11.358 in) blue paint-
ing
6 Push rod 1 = 290.5 mm (11.437 in) yellow
painting
• The lengths of push rod 1 and push rod 2 are
different. Therefore, be sure to install them in
the proper position.
• Lubricate the push rod end balls with engine
oil.
5 - 22
c. Install the rocker arm base bolts.
NOTE:
Tighten the rocker arm base bolts in stages
and in a crisscross pattern.
Rocker arm base bolt 1

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
Rocker arm base bolt 2
R.
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD

COVERS
The following procedure applies to both cylin-
ders.
1. Install:
• dowel pins 1
• cylinder head cover gasket 2 New
2. Install:
• cylinder head cover 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
Bolts 2: = 40 mm (1.57 in)

Bolts 3: = 50 mm (1.97 in)
Bolts 4: = 60 mm (2.36 in)
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

COVER AND ENGINE LEFT SIDE COVER
1. Install:
• dowel pins 1
• camshaft sprocket cover gasket 2 New
5 - 23
2. Install:
• canister (for California only)
NOTE:
3. Install:
• spark plugs
4. Connect:
• spark plug caps
NOTE:
È Forward
1 Ignition coil 1 - L spark plug lead
2 Ignition coil 1 - R spark plug lead
3 Ignition coil 2 - L spark plug lead
4 Ignition coil 2 - R spark plug lead
5. Adjust:
• installed shift rod length
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL”
in chapter 3.
5 - 24
CAMSHAFTS ENG
EAS00196
CAMSHAFTS
12
13 M
9
11 New
10
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
(6)
14
12
7
M 4 3
2
8
6
5
1 30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
52 Nm (5.2 m • kg, 37 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the camshafts Remove the parts in the order listed.
Valve lifters Refer to “ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS
1 Decompression solenoid 1
2 Long decompression push rod 1 92 mm (3.6 in)
3 Short decompression push rod 1 78 mm (3.1 in)
4 Front cylinder camshaft end cover 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE CAM-
5 Camshaft drive gear 1 SHAFTS” and “INSTALLING THE CAM-
6 Straight key 1 SHAFTS”.
5 - 25
CAMSHAFTS ENG
12
13 M
9
11 New
10
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
(6)
14
12
7
M 4 3
2
8
6
5
1 30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
52 Nm (5.2 m • kg, 37 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

7 Camshaft driven gear 1
8 Straight key 1
9 Oil delivery pipe 1
Refer to “REMOVING THE CAM-
10 Camshaft cover 1
SHAFTS” and “INSTALLING THE CAM-
11 Camshaft cover gasket 1
SHAFTS”.
12 Dowel pin 2
13 Front cylinder camshaft 1
14 Rear cylinder camshaft 1
procedure.
5 - 26
CAMSHAFTS ENG
REMOVING THE CAMSHAFTS
1. Loosen:
• front cylinder camshaft end cover bolts 1
• camshaft drive gear bolt 2
NOTE:
_
• Place a folded copper washer 3 between

the teeth of the camshaft drive gear and
camshaft driven gear in order to lock them.
• Do not damage the teeth of the camshaft
drive and camshaft driven gears.
2. Loosen:
• camshaft driven gear nut 1
NOTE:
_

drive and camshaft driven gears.
3. Remove:
• front cylinder camshaft end cover
• camshaft drive gear 1
• camshaft driven gear 2
• straight keys
NOTE:
_
Cover the crankcase hole with a clean rag 3

to prevent the straight keys from falling into the
crankcase.
4. Remove:
• oil delivery pipe 1
• camshaft cover 2
(along with the camshafts)
NOTE:
_
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in

stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of
the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
5 - 27
CAMSHAFTS ENG
EAS00204
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFTS
1. Check:
• cam
Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches →
Replace the camshaft.
2. Measure:
• cam dimensions a and b
Out of specification → Replace the cam-
shaft.
Camshaft lobe dimension limit

Intake camshaft
a 38.231 ~ 38.331 mm
(1.5052 ~ 1.5091 in)
b 32.013 ~ 32.113 mm
(1.2604 ~ 1.2643 in)
Exhaust camshaft
a 38.232 ~ 38.332 mm
(1.5052 ~ 1.5091 in)
b 31.995 ~ 32.095 mm
(1.2596 ~ 1.2636 in)
3. Measure:
• camshaft journal diameter (crankcase side)
a
shaft.
Camshaft journal diameter

(crankcase side)
24.937 ~ 24.950 mm
(0.9818 ~ 0.9823 in)
4. Measure:
• camshaft journal diameter (camshaft cover
side) b
shaft.
Camshaft journal diameter

27.967 ~ 27.980 mm
(1.1011 ~ 1.1016 in)
5 - 28
CAMSHAFTS ENG
5. Measure:
• crankcase hole inside diameter c
Out of specification → Replace the crank-
case.
Crankcase hole inside diameter

25.000 ~ 25.021 mm
(0.9843 ~ 0.9851 in)
6. Measure:
• camshaft cover hole inside diameter d
shaft cover.
Camshaft cover hole inside

diameter
28.000 ~ 28.021 mm
(1.1024 ~ 1.1032 in)
7. Calculate:
• camshaft-to-crankcase clearance
Out of specification → Replace the defec-
tive part(s).
NOTE:
crankcase side camshaft journal diameter
(crankcase side) from the crankcase hole
inside diameter.
Camshaft to crankcase clearance

0.050 ~ 0.084 mm
(0.0020 ~ 0.0033 in)
8. Calculate:
• camshaft to camshaft cover clearance
Out of specification → Replace the defec-
tive part(s).
NOTE:
camshaft journal diameter (camshaft cover
side) from the camshaft cover hole inside
diameter.
Camshaft to camshaft cover

clearance
0.020 ~ 0.054 mm
(0.0008 ~ 0.0021 in)
5 - 29
CAMSHAFTS ENG
9. Check:
• camshaft drive gears
• camshaft driven gears
Chips/pitting/roughness/wear → Replace
the defective part(s).
CHECKING THE DECOMPRESSION

SYSTEM
1. Check:
• decompression system
NOTE:
_
• Check the decompression system while the

decompression push rod is installed in the
camshaft.
• Check that the decompression pin 1
projects from the camshaft.
• Check that the decompression push rod 2
moves smoothly.
2. Check:
• decompression push rods
CHECKING THE OIL DELIVERY PIPE

1. Check:
Damage → Replace.
Obstruction → Wash and blow out with
compressed air.
• O-rings 2
5 - 30
CAMSHAFTS ENG
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFTS
1. Install:
• camshafts
(to the camshaft cover)
• front cylinder camshaft end cover
NOTE:
_
• Lubricate molybdenum disulfide oil onto the

camshaft journals and lobes.
• Align the punch mark a on the rear cylinder
camshaft with the punch mark b on the front
cylinder camshaft.
2. Install:
• dowel pins 1
• camshaft cover gasket 2 New
3. Install:
• camshaft cover 1
(along with the camshafts)
NOTE:
_
Tighten the camshaft cover bolts in stages and

in a crisscross pattern.
5 - 31
CAMSHAFTS ENG
4. Install:
• front cylinder camshaft end cover 1
NOTE:
_
• Align the projection a on the front cylinder

camshaft end cover with the hole b on the
front cylinder camshaft.
• Finger tighten the place bolts.
5. Install:
• straight keys
• camshaft drive gear 1
• camshaft driven gear 2
NOTE:
_
• Cover the crankcase hole with a clean rag 3

to prevent the straight keys from falling into
the crankcase.
• Align the punch mark a on the camshaft
drive gear 1 with the punch mark b on the
camshaft driven gear 2.
• Insert a cross-headed screwdriver into one of
the holes in the outer camshaft driven gear
and rotate the gear until the teeth of both
driven gears are aligned. The teeth of both
camshaft driven gears must be aligned for
installation.
5 - 32
CAMSHAFTS ENG
6. Tighten:
• camshaft driven gear nut 1
52 Nm (5.2 m • kg, 37 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_

drive and camshaft driven gear.
• After tightening the camshaft driven gear nut,
remove the copper washer to clean the teeth
of the camshaft drive gear and camshaft
driven gear.
7. Tighten:
• camshaft drive gear bolt 1
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• front cylinder camshaft end cover bolts 2
T.
R. 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
NOTE:
_

drive and camshaft driven gear.
• After tightening the camshaft drive gear bolt,
remove the copper washer to clean the teeth
of the camshaft drive gear and camshaft
driven gear.
5 - 33
CYLINDER HEADS ENG
EAS00221
CYLINDER HEADS
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
39 Nm (3.9 m • kg, 28 ft • Ib) E
9
T.
R.
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R. E
10
5 New
3 New
New 7 New 3
1
8 2
21 Nm (2.1 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • Ib) 4 New
T.
R.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
6
New 7
8 8

Removing the cylinder heads Remove the parts in the order listed.
Throttle bodies/intake manifolds Refer to “THROTTLE BODIES” in chap-
ter 6.
Air cut-off valve assembly Refer to “AIR CUT-OFF VALVE ASSEM-
BLY AND AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
HOSES” in chapter 6.
Rocker arms/cylinder head covers Refer to “ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS
1 Engine temperature sensor 1
2 Oil delivery pipe 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE CYLINDER
3 Copper washer 4 HEAD”.
4 Copper washer 2
5 - 34
CYLINDER HEADS ENG
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
39 Nm (3.9 m • kg, 28 ft • Ib) E
9
T.
R.
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
T.
R. E
10
5 New
3 New
New 7 New 3
1
8 2
21 Nm (2.1 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • Ib) 4 New
T.
R.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
6
New 7
8 8

5 Rear cylinder head 1 Refer to “REMOV-
6 Front cylinder head 1 ING THE CYLIN-
DER HEADS”. Refer to “INSTALL-
7 Cylinder head gasket 2 ING THE CYLIN-
8 Dowel pin 4 DER HEAD”.
9 Rear exhaust pipe joint cover 1
10 Rear exhaust pipe joint 1
procedure.
5 - 35
CYLINDER HEADS ENG
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEADS
1. Remove:
• cylinder head
NOTE:
_
• Loosen the nuts in the proper sequence.

• Follow the numerical order shown in the illus-
tration. Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a
time until all of the nuts are loose.
EAS00228
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEADS
The following procedure applies to each cylin-
der heads.
1. Eliminate:
• combustion chamber carbon deposits
(with a rounded scraper)
NOTE:
_
Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damag-

ing or scratching:
• spark plug bore threads
• valve seats
2. Check:
• cylinder head
3. Measure:
• cylinder head warpage
Out of specification → Resurface the cylin-
der head.
Maximum cylinder head warpage

0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Place a straightedge and a thickness gauge
across the cylinder head.
b. Measure the warpage.
c. If the limit is exceeded, resurface the cylin-
der head as follows.
d. Place a 400 ~ 600 grit wet sandpaper on
the surface plate and resurface the cylinder
head using a figure-eight sanding pattern.
NOTE:
_
To ensure an even surface, rotate the cylinder

head several times.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5 - 36
CYLINDER HEADS ENG
1. Check:
Damage → Replace.
compressed air.
EAS00232
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD
1. Install:
• cylinder head gasket 1 New
• dowel pins 2
2. Install:
• cylinder heads
• washers
3. Tighten:
• cylinder head nuts (M12: 1 ~ 4)
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• cylinder head nuts (M10: 5 ~ 6)
39 Nm (3.9 m • kg, 28 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
• Lubricate the cylinder head nuts with engine

oil.
• Tighten the cylinder head nuts in the proper
tightening sequence as shown and torque
them in two stages.
5. Install:
• copper washers New
• oil delivery pipe bolts (M10)
21 Nm (2.1 m • kg, 15 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• oil delivery pipe bolts (M8)

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)
T.
R.
5 - 37
CYLINDER HEADS ENG
6. Install:
• washer
• engine temperature sensor 1
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)
T.
R.
5 - 38
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
EAS00236
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
1
1
2
New 7
2 4 2
1 7 New
4 7 New
3 3
4
8
1 8
3
8
2
New 7
4
3
8 E
5 6

Removing the valves and valve Remove the parts in the order listed.
springs
cylinders.
Cylinder head Refer to “CYLINDER HEADS”.
1 Valve cotter 8
2 Upper spring seat 4
3 Outer valve spring 4
4 Inner valve spring 4 Refer to “REMOVING THE VALVES” and
5 Intake valve 2 “INSTALLING THE VALVES”.
6 Exhaust valve 2
7 Valve stem seal 4
8 Lower spring seat 4
procedure.
5 - 39
EAS00238
REMOVING THE VALVES
valves and related components.
NOTE:
_
Before removing the internal parts of the cylin-

der head (e.g., valves, valve springs, valve
seats), make sure the valves properly seal.
1. Check:
• valve sealing (for leakage)
Leakage at the valve seat → Check the
valve face, valve seat, and valve seat width.
Refer to “CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS”.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Pour a clean solvent a into the intake and
exhaust ports.
b. Check that the valves properly seal.
NOTE:
_
There should be no leakage at the valve seat

1.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Remove:
• valve cotters
NOTE:
_
Remove the valve cotters by compressing the

valve springs with the valve spring compressor
set 1.

YM-04019
5 - 40
3. Remove:
• upper spring seat 1
• outer valve spring 2
• inner valve spring 3
• valve 4
• valve stem seal 5
• lower spring seat 6
NOTE:
_
Identify the position of each part very carefully

so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
EAS00239
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE
GUIDES
valves and valve guides.
1. Measure:
• valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance =
Valve guide inside diameter a -
Valve stem diameter b
Out of specification → Replace the valve

guide.
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide
clearance
Intake
0.010 ~ 0.037 mm
(0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in)
<Limit>: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Exhaust
0.025 ~ 0.052 mm
(0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in)
<Limit>: 0.1 mm (0.0039 in)
5 - 41
2. Replace:
• valve guide
NOTE:
_
To ease valve guide removal and installation,

and to maintain the correct fit, heat the cylinder
head to 100 °C (212 °F) in an oven.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the valve guide with the valve
guide remover 1.
b. Install the new valve guide with the valve
guide installer 2 and valve guide remover
1.
c. After installing the valve guide, bore the
valve guide with the valve guide reamer 3
to obtain the proper valve-stem-to-valve-
guide clearance.
NOTE:
_
After replacing the valve guide, reface the

valve seat.
Valve guide remover (ø6)

YM-04064-A
Valve guide installer (ø6)
YM-04065-A
Valve guide reamer (ø6)
YM-04066
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Eliminate:
• carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
4. Check:
• valve face
Pitting/wear → Grind the valve face.
• valve stem end
Mushroom shape or diameter larger than
the body of the valve stem → Replace the
valve.
5 - 42
5. Measure:
• valve margin thickness a
Out of specification → Replace the valve.
Valve margin thickness

0.7 ~ 1.3 mm (0.0276 ~ 0.0512 in)
6. Measure:
• valve stem runout
Out of specification → Replace the valve.
NOTE:
_
• When installing a new valve, always replace

the valve guide.
• If the valve is removed or replaced, always
replace the oil seal.
Valve stem runout

0.01 mm (0.0004 in)
EAS00240
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS
valves and valve seats.
1. Eliminate:
• carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
2. Check:
• valve seat
Pitting/wear → Replace the cylinder head.
5 - 43
3. Measure:
• valve seat width a
Out of specification → Replace the cylinder
head.
Valve seat width

Intake
0.9 ~ 1.1 mm
(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)
Exhaust
0.9 ~ 1.1 mm
(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) b
onto the valve face.
b. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
c. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear impres-
sion.
d. Measure the valve seat width.
NOTE:
_
Where the valve seat and valve face contacted

one another, the blueing will have been
removed.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5 - 44
4. Lap:
• valve face
• valve seat
NOTE:
_
After replacing the cylinder head or replacing

the valve and valve guide, the valve seat and
valve face should be lapped.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Apply a coarse lapping compound a to the
valve face.
CAUTION:
_
Do not let the lapping compound enter the

gap between the valve stem and the valve
guide.
b. Apply molybdenum disulfide oil onto the

valve stem.
c. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
d. Turn the valve until the valve face and valve
seat are evenly polished, then clean off all
of the lapping compound.
NOTE:
_
For the best lapping results, lightly tap the

valve seat while rotating the valve back and
forth between your hands.
e. Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve

face and repeat the above steps.
f. After every lapping procedure, be sure to
clean off all of the lapping compound from
the valve face and valve seat.
g. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) b
onto the valve face.
h. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
i. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear impres-
sion.
j. Measure the valve seat width again. If the
valve seat width is out of specification,
reface and lap the valve seat.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5 - 45
EAS00241
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS
valve springs.
1. Measure:
• valve spring free length a
spring.
Valve spring free length

Intake valve spring
38.26 mm (1.51 in)
<Limit>: 36.26 mm (1.43 in)
Exhaust valve spring
38.26 mm (1.51 in)
<Limit>: 36.26 mm (1.43 in)
2. Measure:
• compressed valve spring force a
spring.
b Installed length
Compressed valve spring force

(installed)
Intake and exhaust inner valve
spring
6.3 ~ 7.3 kg at 29.0 mm
(13.9 ~ 16.1 lb at 1.14 in)
Intake and exhaust outer valve
spring
13.9 ~ 16.1 kg at 31.0 mm
(30.6 ~ 35.5 lb at 1.22 in)
3. Measure:
• valve spring tilt a
spring.
Spring tilt limit

Intake and exhaust inner valve
spring
2.4 mm (0.094 in)
Intake and exhaust outer valve
spring
2.4 mm (0.094 in)
5 - 46
EAS00246
INSTALLING THE VALVES
valves and related components.
1. Deburr:
• valve stem end
(with an oil stone)
2. Lubricate:
• valve stem 1
• oil seal 2
(with the recommended lubricant)
Molybdenum disulfide oil
3. Install:
• lower spring seat 1
• valve stem seal 2
• valve 3
• inner valve spring 4
• outer valve spring 5
• upper spring seat 6
(into the cylinder head)
NOTE:
_
Install the valve springs with the larger pitch a

facing up.
b Smaller pitch
5 - 47
4. Install:
• valve cotters 1
NOTE:
_
Install the valve cotters by compressing the

valve springs with the valve spring compressor
set 1.

YM-04019
5. To secure the valve cotters onto the valve

stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a soft-face
hammer.
CAUTION:
_
Hitting the valve tip with excessive force

could damage the valve.
6. Install:
• cylinder head
Refer to “CYLINDER HEADS”.
5 - 48
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS ENG
EAS00252
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS
New 3
8
8 9
9
10
10
E
4
5
E New
E 7
1 5 New 6 5 New
5 6
New 7
New 3
4

Removing the cylinders and pistons Remove the parts in the order listed.
Cylinder heads Refer to “CYLINDER HEADS”.
1 Front cylinder 1
2 Rear cylinder 1
3 Cylinder gasket 2
4 Dowel pin 4 Refer to “INSTALL-
5 Piston pin clip 4 ING THE PIS-
Refer to “REMOV-
6 Piston pin 2 TONS AND
CYLINDERS”. ING THE CYLIN-
7 Piston 2
DERS AND
8 Top ring 2
PISTONS”.
9 2nd ring 2
10 Oil ring 2
procedure.
5 - 49
EAS00254
REMOVING THE CYLINDERS AND
PISTONS
cylinders and pistons.
1. Remove:
• piston pin clips 1
• piston pin 2
• piston 3
CAUTION:
_
Do not use a hammer to drive the piston

pin out.
NOTE:
_
• Before removing the piston pin clip, cover the

crankcase opening with a clean rag to pre-
vent the piston pin clip from falling into the
crankcase.
• For reference during installation, put an iden-
tification mark on each piston crown.
• Before removing the piston pin, deburr the
piston pin clip’s groove and the piston’s pin
bore area. If both areas are deburred and the
piston pin is still difficult to remove, remove it
with the piston pin puller 4.
Piston pin puller

YU-01304
2. Remove:
• top ring
• 2nd ring
• oil ring
NOTE:
_
When removing a piston ring, open the end

gap with your fingers and lift the other side of
the ring over the piston crown.
5 - 50
EAS00258
CHECKING THE CYLINDERS AND

PISTONS
cylinders and pistons.
1. Check:
• piston wall
• cylinder wall
Vertical scratches → Replace the cylinder,
and the piston and piston rings as a set.
2. Measure:
• piston-to-cylinder clearance
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Measure cylinder bore “C” with the cylinder
bore gauge.
NOTE:
_
Measure cylinder bore “C” by taking side-to-

side and front-to-back measurements of the
cylinder. Then, find the average of the mea-
surements.
Cylinder bore gauge

(50 ~ 100 mm)
YU-03017
97.000 ~ 97.010 mm
Cylinder bore “C”
(3.8189 ~ 3.8193 in)
Taper limit “T” 0.05 mm (0.0016 in)
Out of round “R” 0.05 mm (0.0016 in)
“C” = maximum of D1 ~ D6
“T” = maximum of D1 or D2 - maximum of
D5 or D6
“R” = maximum of D1, D3 or D5 - minimum
of D2, D4 or D6
b. If out of specification, replace the cylinder,
c. Measure piston skirt diameter “P” with the
micrometer.
Micrometer (75 ~ 100 mm)

YU-03009
a 5 mm (0.20 in) from the bottom edge of the pis-

ton
5 - 51
Piston size “P”
96.960 ~ 96.975 mm
Standard
(3.8173 ~ 3.8179 in)
d. If out of specification, replace the piston and
piston rings as a set.
e. Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clearance
with the following formula.
Piston-to-cylinder clearance =
Cylinder bore “C” -
Piston skirt diameter “P”
Piston-to-cylinder clearance
0.025 ~ 0.050 mm
(0.001 ~ 0.002 in)
<Limit>: 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
f. If out of specification, replace the cylinder,

▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00263
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS
1. Measure:
• piston ring side clearance
Out of specification → Replace the piston
and piston rings as a set.
NOTE:
_
Before measuring the piston ring side clear-

ance, eliminate any carbon deposits from the
piston ring grooves and piston rings.
Piston ring side clearance

Top ring
0.03 ~ 0.08 mm
(0.0012 ~ 0.0031 in)
<Limit>: 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)
2nd ring
0.03 ~ 0.07 mm
(0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in)
<Limit>: 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)
5 - 52
2. Install:
• piston ring
(into the cylinder)
NOTE:
_
Level the piston ring into the cylinder with the

piston crown.
a 10 mm (0.39 in)
3. Measure:
• piston ring end gap
ring.
NOTE:
_
The oil ring expander spacer’s end gap cannot

be measured. If the oil ring rail’s gap is exces-
sive, replace all three piston rings.
Piston ring end gap

Top ring
0.30 ~ 0.45 mm
(0.012 ~ 0.018 in)
<Limit>: 0.65 mm (0.026 in)
2nd ring
0.30 ~ 0.45 mm
(0.012 ~ 0.018 in)
<Limit>: 0.80 mm (0.031 in)
Oil ring
0.2 ~ 0.7 mm
(0.008 ~ 0.028 in)
EAS00266
CHECKING THE PISTON PINS
piston pins.
1. Check:
• piston pin
Blue discoloration/grooves → Replace the
piston pin and then check the lubrication
system.
2. Measure:
• piston pin outside diameter a
pin.
Piston pin outside diameter

21.991 ~ 22.000 mm
(0.8658 ~ 0.8661 in)
<Limit>: 21.971 mm (0.8650 in)
5 - 53
3. Measure:
• piston pin bore diameter (in the piston) b
pin.
Piston pin bore diameter (in the

piston)
22.004 ~ 22.015 mm
(0.8663 ~ 0.8667 in)
<Limit>: 22.045 mm (0.8679 in)
4. Calculate:
• piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance
pin and piston as a set.
Piston-pin-to-piston clearance =
Piston pin bore diameter (in the piston)
b - Piston pin outside diameter a
Piston-pin-to-piston pin bore

clearance
0.004 ~ 0.024 mm
(0.00016 ~ 0.00094 in)
<Limit>: 0.074 mm (0.0029 in)
EAS00268
INSTALLING THE PISTONS AND
CYLINDERS
pistons and cylinders.
1. Install:
• top ring
• 2nd ring
• oil ring
NOTE:
_
Be sure to install the piston rings so that the

manufacturer’s marks or numbers face up.
5 - 54
2. Install:
• piston 1
• piston pin 2
• piston pin clips 3 New
NOTE:
_
• Apply engine oil onto the piston pin.

• Make sure the “arrow” mark a on the piston
faces towards the front of the motorcycle.
• Before installing the piston pin clip, cover the
crankcase opening with a clean rag to pre-
vent the clip from falling into the crankcase.
3. Install:
• dowel pins 1
• cylinder gasket 2 New
4. Lubricate:
• piston
• piston rings
• cylinder
1 1 (with the recommended lubricant)
New 2 Engine oil
5. Offset:
• piston ring end gaps
a Top ring
b Lower oil ring rail
c Upper oil ring rail
d 2nd ring
È Forward
6. Install:
• cylinder 1
1
NOTE:
_
While compressing the piston rings with one

hand, install the cylinder with the other hand.
5 - 55
CLUTCH ENG
EAS00273
CLUTCH
CLUTCH COVER
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
2
1
9
3
5
(5)
New 8
(7)
7
(4) 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

Removing the clutch cover Remove the parts in the order listed.
Left side cover Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” in
chapter 3.
Sub fuel tank Refer to “SUB FUEL TANK”.
Engine left side cover Refer to “ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS
Engine oil Drain.
in chapter 3.
1 Clutch cable 1 Disconnect.
2 Pull lever 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE
3 Pull lever spring 1 CLUTCH”.
4 Crankshaft position sensor lead 1 Disconnect.
5 - 56
CLUTCH ENG
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
2
1
9
3
5
(5)
New 8
(7)
7
(4) 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

5 Shift arm 1
6 Clutch cable holder 1 Refer to “REMOV-
Refer to “INSTALL-
7 Clutch cover 1 ING THE CLUTCH”.
ING THE CLUTCH”.
8 Clutch cover gasket 1
9 Dowel pin 1
procedure.
5 - 57
CLUTCH ENG
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
LT
LT
LT
5
5
5
2 LS
LT
LT
3 6
4
4
1
3
LS

Removing the pull lever shaft and Remove the parts in the order listed.
crankshaft position sensor
Pull lever 1
Pull lever spring 1
1 Circlip 1
2 Pull lever shaft 1
3 Oil seal 2
4 Bearing 3
5 Crankshaft position sensor lead holder 3 Refer to “INSTALLING THE CRANK-
6 Crankshaft position sensor 1 SHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND PULL
LEVER SHAFT”.
procedure.
5 - 58
CLUTCH ENG
EAS00274
CLUTCH
18 19
20 17
E
16 80 Nm (8.0 m • kg, 58 ft • Ib)

15
T.
R.
14
24 8 13
9 12 New
9 11
9 10
8
23 7
22 21
6 New
LT
100 Nm (10.0 m • kg, 72 ft • lb)

T.
5
R.
(6)
E 4
3
2 1
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

Removing the clutch Remove the parts in the order listed.
Generator cover Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
1 Clutch spring plate retainer 1
2 Clutch spring plate 1
3 Clutch spring plate seat 1
4 Pressure plate 1
5 Pull rod 1
6 Friction plate 2 6 Green painting Refer to “INSTALL-
7 Clutch plate 7 ING THE CLUTCH”.
8 Cushion spring 2
9 Friction plate 1 3 Black painting
10 Lock washer 1
Refer to “REMOV-
11 Wire circlip 1
ING THE CLUTCH”.
12 Clutch plate 1
5 - 59
CLUTCH ENG
18 19
20 17
E
16 80 Nm (8.0 m • kg, 58 ft • Ib)

15
T.
R.
14
24 8 13
9 12 New
9 11
9 10
8
23 7
22 21
6 New
LT
100 Nm (10.0 m • kg, 72 ft • lb)

T.
5
R.
(6)
E 4
3
2 1
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

13 Clutch damper spring 1
Refer to “REMOV-
14 Clutch damper spring seat 1
ING THE CLUTCH”.
15 Clutch boss 1
16 Thrust washer 1
17 Clutch housing 1
18 Circlip 1
19 Oil pump drive gear 1 Refer to “INSTALL-
20 Dowel pin 1 ING THE CLUTCH”.
21 Spacer 1
22 Crankshaft position sensor rotor 1 Refer to “REMOV-
ING THE PRIMARY
DRIVE GEAR”.
23 Primary drive gear 1
24 Straight key 1
procedure.
5 - 60
CLUTCH ENG
EAS00277
REMOVING THE CLUTCH
1. Remove:
• clutch cable holder 1
• clutch cover 2
NOTE:
_


3. Loosen:
• clutch boss nut 1
NOTE:
_
While holding the clutch boss 2 with the uni-

versal clutch holder 3, loosen the clutch boss
nut.

YM-91042
4. Remove:
• lock washer 2
• clutch boss assembly 3
NOTE:
_
There is a built-in damper between the clutch

boss and the clutch plate. It is not necessary to
remove the wire circlip 4 and disassemble the
built-in damper unless there is serious clutch
chattering.
5 - 61
CLUTCH ENG
EAS00279
REMOVING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR
1. Remove:
• crankshaft position sensor rotor bolt 1
NOTE:
_
While holding the generator rotor 2 with the

sheave holder 3, loosen the crankshaft posi-
tion sensor rotor bolt.

YS-01880-A
EAS00280
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES
friction plates.
1. Check:
• friction plate
Damage/wear → Replace the friction plates
as a set.
2. Measure:
• friction plate thickness
Out of specification → Replace the friction
plates as a set.
NOTE:
_
Measure the friction plate at four places.
Friction plate thickness

2.9 ~ 3.1 mm (0.114 ~ 0.122 in)
EAS00281
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES
clutch plates.
1. Check:
• clutch plate
Damage → Replace the clutch plates as a
set.
5 - 62
CLUTCH ENG
2. Measure:
• clutch plate warpage
(with a surface plate and thickness gauge
1)
Out of specification → Replace the clutch
plates as a set.
Clutch plate warpage limit

0.2 mm (0.008 in)
EAS00283
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATE SPRING
1. Check:
• clutch plate spring 1
Damage → Replace.
2. Check:
• clutch plate spring seat 2
Damage → Replace.
EAS00284
CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING
1. Check:
• clutch housing dogs
Damage/pitting/wear → Deburr the clutch
housing dogs or replace the clutch housing.
NOTE:
_
Pitting on the clutch housing dogs will cause

erratic clutch operation.
2. Check:
• bearing
Damage/wear → Replace the bearing and
clutch housing.
EAS00285
CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS
1. Check:
• clutch boss splines
Damage/pitting/wear → Replace the clutch
boss.
NOTE:
_
Pitting on the clutch boss splines will cause

erratic clutch operation.
5 - 63
CLUTCH ENG
EAS00286
CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE
1. Check:
• pressure plate 1
• bearing 2
EAS00287
CHECKING THE PULL LEVER SHAFT AND
PULL ROD
1. Check:
• pull lever shaft pinion gear teeth a
• pull rod teeth b
Damage/wear → Replace the pull rod and
pull lever shaft pinion gear as a set.
2. Check:
• pull rod bearing
EAS00292
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE
1. Check:
• primary drive gear 1
• primary driven gear 2
Damage/wear → Replace the primary drive
gear and clutch housing as a set.
Excessive noise during operation →
Replace the primary drive gear and clutch
housing as a set.
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT POSITION
SENSOR AND PULL LEVER SHAFT
1. Apply:
• sealant
(onto the crankshaft position sensor lead
grommet)
Quick Gasket®
ACC-11001-05-01
5 - 64
CLUTCH ENG
2. Install:
• crankshaft position sensor
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• crankshaft position sensor lead holder
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®) to the

threads of the crankshaft position sensor bolts
and crankshaft position sensor lead holder
bolts.
EAS00303
INSTALLING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR
1. Install:
• straight key 1
• primary drive gear 2
• crankshaft position sensor rotor 3
• spacer 4
• crankshaft position sensor rotor bolt 5
100 Nm (10.0 m • kg, 72 ft • lb)
T.
R.
CAUTION:
The timing marks on the crankshaft posi-
tion sensor rotor must face outside.
NOTE:
_

primary sheave holder 7, tighten the crank-
shaft position sensor rotor bolt.

YS-01880-A

the nut.
5 - 65
CLUTCH ENG
EAS00293
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH
1. Install:
• dowel pin 1
• oil pump drive gear 2
• plate 3
• circlip 4
2. Install:
• clutch housing 1
• thrust washer 2
NOTE:
_
• Lubricate the clutch housing bearings with

engine oil.
• Make sure that the primary driven gear teeth
and primary drive gear teeth mesh correctly.
• Make sure that the oil pump drive gear teeth
and oil pump driven gear teeth mesh cor-
rectly.
3. Install:
• clutch boss assembly 1
NOTE:
_
• If the wire circlip 2 has been removed, care-

fully install a new one.
• Install the clutch damper spring 3 with the
“OUTSIDE” mark facing out.
5 - 66
CLUTCH ENG
4. Install:
• clutch boss 1
• lock washer New
80 Nm (8.0 m • kg, 58 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
While holding the clutch boss with the univer-

sal clutch holder 3, tighten the clutch boss
nut.

YM-91042

the nut.
6. Lubricate:
• friction plates
• clutch plates
Engine oil
7. Install:
• friction plates
• clutch plates
• cushion springs
NOTE:
_
• First, install a friction plate and then alternate

between a clutch plate and a friction plate.
• Apply molybdenum disulfide grease onto the
bearing and pull rod teeth.
• Align the two embossed mark a on the
clutch housing with the two semicircular slots
b in the friction plates.
5 - 67
CLUTCH ENG
8. Install:
• pressure plate 1
NOTE:
_
Align the punch mark a in the pressure plate

with the punch mark b in the clutch boss.
9. Install:
1 • clutch spring plate seat 1
2
3 • clutch spring plate 2
• clutch spring plate retainer 3
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
Tighten the clutch spring plate retainer bolts in

stages and in a crisscross pattern.
10.Install:
• dowel pins 1
• clutch cover gasket 2 New
11.Install:
• clutch cover 1
• clutch cable holder 2
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
Tighten the clutch cover bolts in stages and in

12.Connect:
• crankshaft position sensor coupler
NOTE:
_
5 - 68
CLUTCH ENG
13.Install:
• shift arm 1
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
Align the mark a in the shift shaft with the slot

in the shift arm.
14.Install:
• pull lever spring
• pull lever 12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
If there is no free play in the clutch, install the

pull lever to the pull lever shaft in order to get
the distance a between the pull lever and
clutch cable holder to 31.3 mm (1.23 in).
15.Connect:
• clutch cable 1
16.Adjust:
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH
5 - 69
SHIFT SHAFT AND STOPPER LEVER ENG
EAS00327
SHIFT SHAFT AND STOPPER LEVER
LS
6
5
4
7
LT
22 Nm (2.2 m • kg, 16 ft • Ib) LT

T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the shift shaft and Remove the parts in the order listed.
stopper lever
Engine oil Drain.
Clutch housing Refer to “CLUTCH”.
1 Shift shaft 1
2 Circlip 2
3 Shift shaft spring 1
Refer to “INSTALLING THE STOPPER
4 Shift shaft spring stopper 1
LEVER AND SHIFT SHAFT”.
5 Washer 1
6 Stopper lever 1
7 Stopper lever spring 1
procedure.
5 - 70
EAS00328
CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT
1. Check:
• shift shaft 1
• shift lever spring 2
EAS00330
CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER
1. Check:
• stopper lever 1
Roller turns roughly → Replace the stopper
lever.
EAS00331
INSTALLING THE STOPPER LEVER AND
SHIFT SHAFT
1. Install:
• stopper lever 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• stopper lever spring 2

NOTE:
_
• Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®) to the

threads of stopper lever bolt.
• Hook the ends of the stopper lever spring
onto the stopper lever and the crankcase
boss 3.
• Mesh the stopper lever with the shift drum
segment assembly.
2. Install:
• washer
• shift shaft spring stopper 1
22 Nm (2.2 m • kg, 16 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_

threads of shift shaft spring stopper.
5 - 71
3. Install:
• shift shaft spring
• circlips
• shift shaft 1
NOTE:
_
Install the end of the shift shaft spring onto the

shift shaft spring stopper 2.
5 - 72
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH ENG
EAS00341
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH

STATOR COIL ASSEMBLY
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib) 1

T.
R.
11 2
7 1 4 3 6
1
10 12
9 New
8 LT
(9)
5
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the stator coil assembly Remove the parts in the order listed.
Engine oil Drain.
in chapter 3.
1 Plastic locking tie 3
2 Plastic band 2
3 Rear brake light switch coupler 1 Disconnect.
4 Horn 1 connectors 2
5 Rider footrest assembly (right) 1
6 Stator coil assembly coupler 1 Disconnect.
5 - 73
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib) 1

T.
R.
11 2
7 1 4 3 6
1
10 12
9 New
8 LT
(9)
5
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
48 Nm (4.8 m • kg, 35 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

8 Generator cover 1
9 Generator cover gasket 1
10 Dowel pin 2
11 Stator coil assembly lead holder 1
12 Stator coil assembly 1
procedure.
5 - 74
EAS00343
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH

Removing the generator rotor Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Starter clutch idle gear shaft #2 1
2 Starter clutch idle gear shaft #1 1
3 Starter clutch idle gear #2 1
4 Starter clutch idle gear #1 1
5 Generator rotor 1
6 Woodruff key 1
7 Starter clutch gear 1
procedure.
5 - 75
EAS00347
REMOVING THE GENERATOR
1. Remove:
• generator cover 1
NOTE:
_

2. Remove:
• generator rotor bolt 1
• washer
NOTE:
_

primary sheave holder 3, loosen the genera-
tor rotor bolt.

YS-01880-A
3. Remove:
• generator rotor 1
(with the alternator rotor puller 2)
Alternator rotor puller

YM-01080-A
EAS00348
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Check:
• starter clutch idle gears 1
• starter clutch gear 2
Burrs/chips/roughness/wear → Replace the
defective part(s).
5 - 76
2. Check:
• starter clutch operation
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Install the starter clutch gear 1 onto the
starter clutch and hold the starter clutch.
b. When turning the starter clutch gear clock-
wise È, the starter clutch and the starter
clutch gear should engage, otherwise the
starter clutch is faulty and must be
replaced.
c. When turning the starter clutch gear coun-
terclockwise É, it should turn freely, other-
wise the starter clutch is faulty and must be
replaced.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00354
INSTALLING THE GENERATOR
1. Install:
• starter clutch gear 1
• woodruff key
• generator rotor 2
• washer
NOTE:
_
• Clean the tapered portion of the crankshaft

and the generator rotor hub.
• When installing the generator rotor, make
sure the woodruff key is properly seated in
the keyway of the crankshaft.
2. Tighten:
130 Nm (13.0 m • kg, 94 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_

primary sheave holder 3, tighten the genera-
tor rotor bolt.

YS-01880-A
5 - 77
3. Apply:
• sealant
(onto the stator coil assembly lead grom-
met)
Quick Gasket®
ACC-11001-05-01
4. Install:
• stator coil assembly 1
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• stator coil assembly lead holder
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_

threads of the stator coil assembly bolts.
5. Connect:
• stator coil assembly coupler
• horn 1 connectors
• rear brake light switch coupler 1
NOTE:
_
5 - 78
TRANSFER GEAR CASE ENG
TRANSFER GEAR CASE
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib) 18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib) 100 Nm (10.0 m • kg, 72 ft • lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
6 New 13
5
4 8 New
LT
LT 12
10 New
11
4 7
3
1
(5)
4
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib) 4 2

T.
R.
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)

9
T.
R.
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the transfer gear case Remove the parts in the order listed.
cover
Engine oil Drain.
in chapter 3.
Transfer gear oil Drain.
Refer to “CHANGING THE TRANSFER
GEAR OIL” in chapter 3.
Drive sprocket Refer to “DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE
SPROCKET” in chapter 4.
1 Oil pipe #1 1
2 Oil pipe #2 1
3 Cover 1
5 - 79
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib) 18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib) 100 Nm (10.0 m • kg, 72 ft • lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
6 New 13
5
4 8 New
LT
LT 12
10 New
11
4 7
3
1
(5)
4
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib) 4 2

T.
R.
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)

9
T.
R.
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

4 Dowel pin 4
5 Transfer gear oil pump 1
6 Transfer gear oil pump gasket 1
7 Transfer gear case cover 1
8 Transfer gear case cover gasket 1
9 Oil strainer 1
10 Lock washer 1
11 Primary chain 1
12 Middle drive gear 1
13 Middle driven shaft 1
procedure.
5 - 80

Disassembling the transfer gear Remove the parts in the order listed.
case oil pump
1 Oil pump cover 1
2 Pin 2
3 Pin 1
4 Oil pump shaft 1
5 Oil pump inner rotor 1
6 Oil pump outer rotor 1
7 Oil pump housing 1
procedure.
5 - 81
FUEL PUMP
7 8
6 5 Nm (0.5 m • kg, 3.6 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
5
4
1
10 (6)
9
New
New

Removing the fuel pump Remove the parts in the order listed.
Seat/cover Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” in
chapter 3.
Fuel tank Refer to “FUEL TANK” in chapter 3.
1 Throttle stop screw bracket 1
2 Fuel hose joint bracket 1
3 Fuel hose joint 1
4 Fuel hose 2
5 Fuel inlet hose 1
6 Hose holder 1
7 Fuel outlet hose 1
8 Fuel pump coupler 1 Disconnect.
9 Fuel pump cover 1
10 Fuel pump 1
procedure.
5 - 82
REMOVING THE FUEL PUMP
1. Remove:
• fuel pump
CAUTION:
• Do not drop the fuel pump or give it a
strong shock.
• Do not touch the base section of the fuel
sender.
INSTALL THE FUEL PUMP

1. Install:
• fuel pump 5 Nm (0.5 m • kg, 3.6 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
• Do not damage the installation surfaces of
the fuel tank when installing the fuel pump.
• Always use a new fuel pump gasket.
• Install the fuel pump as shown in the illustra-
tion.
• Tighten the fuel pump bolts in the proper
tightening sequence as shown.
5 - 83
SUB FUEL TANK
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.
2
4
3
5
1
6
7
28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the sub fuel tank Remove the parts in the order listed.
Fuel pump Refer to “FUEL PUMP”.
Battery Refer to “BATTERY” in chapter 3.
1 Battery negative lead 1
2 Starter motor lead 1
3 Battery positive lead 1 Disconnect.
4 Starter relay coupler 1 Disconnect.
5 Relay assembly 1
6 Plastic locking tie 1
7 Battery box 1
8 Sub fuel tank bracket 1
9 Sub fuel tank 1
procedure.
5 - 84
50 Nm (5.0 m • kg, 36 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
6 (5)
1
4 8
9 New
12
11
13
12
11
2
(4) 10
(4) 30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

Removing the transfer gear case Remove the parts in the order listed.
Seat/right side cover Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” in
chapter 3.
2 Oil temperature sensor coupler 1 Disconnect.
3 Oil tank cover 1
4 Dipstick 1
5 Dipstick joint 1
6 Drive sprocket case 1
7 Dowel pin 2
8 Spacer 1
5 - 85
50 Nm (5.0 m • kg, 36 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
6 (5)
1
4 8
9 New
12
11
13
12
11
2
(4) 10
(4) 30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.

9 Oil seal 1
10 Transfer gear case 1
11 Dowel pin 2
12 Bearing 2
13 Bearing housing 1
procedure.
5 - 86
6 8 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
0
4
3 New
(9)
8 4
1 (7)
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Disassembling the oil tank Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Oil temperature sensor 1
2 Oil tank left cover 1
3 Oil tank left cover gasket 1
4 Dowel pin 2
5 Oil strainer 1
6 Oil tank right cover 1
7 Oil tank right cover gasket 1
8 Dowel pin 2
9 Oil pipe 1
0 Oil tank 1
procedure.
5 - 87
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT
NOTE:
_
Loosen the middle drive gear nut before

remove the drive sprocket.

2. Loosen:
• middle drive gear nut 1
NOTE:
_
When loosening the middle drive gear nut,

press down on the brake pedal so the middle
drive gear does not move.
3. Remove:
• primary chain 1
• middle drive gear 2
• middle driven shaft 3
NOTE:
Remove the primary chain, middle drive gear
and middle driven shaft at the same time.
CHECKING THE MIDDLE DRIVE

1. Check:
• middle driven gear 2
Damage/wear → Replace the middle drive
gear, middle driven shaft and primary chain
as a set.
2. Check:
• primary chain 1
Damage/stiffness → Replace the primary
chain, middle drive gear and middle driven
shaft as a set.
5 - 88
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER
1. Check:
• oil strainer
Damage → Replace.
Contaminants → Clean with engine oil.
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP

1. Check:
• oil pump housing 1
• oil pump cover 2
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace the defec-
tive part(-s).
2. Measure:
• inner rotor-to-outer rotor tip clearance a
• outer rotor-to-oil pump housing clearance
b
Out of specification → Replace the oil
pump.
1 Inner rotor
2 Outer rotor
3 Oil pump housing
Inner rotor-to-outer rotor tip

clearance
0.07 ~ 0.12 mm
(0.0028 ~ 0.0047 in)
Outer rotor-to-oil pump housing
clearance
0.03 ~ 0.08 mm
(0.0012 ~ 0.0031 in)
3. Check:
• oil pump operation
Unsmooth → Repair or replace the defec-
tive part(-s).
5 - 89
CHECKING THE OIL PIPE
1. Check:
• oil pipe
Damage → Replace.
EAS00375
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP
1. Lubricate:
• inner rotor
• outer rotor
• oil pump shaft
Engine oil
2. Install:
• oil pump outer rotor 2
• oil pump inner rotor 3
• oil pump shaft 4
• pin 5
NOTE:
_
• When installing the oil pump shaft, align the

pin in the oil pump shaft with the groove in
the oil pump inner rotor.
• Align the arrow a on the pump outer rotor
with the arrow b on the oil pump inner rotor.
3. Install:
• pins 1
• oil pump cover 2
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_

threads of the oil pump cover screws.
5 - 90
4. Check:
Refer to “CHECKING THE OIL PUMP”.
INSTALLING THE TRANSFER GEAR CASE

3 2
1 1. Install:
• middle driven shaft 1
• primary chain 3
(into the transfer gear case)
NOTE:
_
• Install the middle driven shaft, middle drive

gear and primary chain at the same time.
• Align the splines on the middle gear with the
splines on the drive axle.
• Temporarily install the drive sprocket nut
onto the middle driven shaft.
2. Install:
3 New 2 • oil strainer 1
• dowel pins 2
• transfer gear case cover gasket 3 New
1
2
3. Install:
• transfer gear case cover 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• nut 2 30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)

T.
R.
5 - 91
4. Install:
• lock washer New
• middle drive gear nut 1
100 Nm (10.0 m • kg, 72 ft • lb)
T.
R.
the nut.
6. Remove:
• drive sprocket nut
7. Install:
• transfer gear oil pump gasket New
• transfer gear oil pump 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®) only to the

threads of the transfer gear oil pump bolts (M6
× 25 mm) bolts 2.
5 - 92
CRANKCASE ENG
CRANKCASE

Separating the crankcase Remove the parts in the order listed.
Engine Refer to “ENGINE”.
Camshafts Refer to “CAMSHAFTS”.
Pistons Refer to “CYLINDERS AND PISTONS”.
Shift shaft Refer to “SHIFT SHAFT AND STOPPER
LEVER”.
Generator rotor Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
1 Generator shaft end cover 1
3 Engine oil pump driven gear stopper 1
5 - 93
CRANKCASE ENG

4 Engine oil pump driven gear 1
5 Left crankcase 1
6 Dowel 2
7 Joint pipe 1
8 Right crankcase 1
procedure.
5 - 94
CRANKCASE ENG

Removing the baffle plate and Remove the parts in the order listed.
bearings
Crankshaft Refer to “CRANKSHAFT AND CON-
NECTING RODS”.
Transmission Refer to “TRANSMISSION”.
1 Baffle plate 1
2 Oil seal 1
3 Bearing 4
procedure.
5 - 95
CRANKCASE ENG
EAS00386
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
NOTE:
_
Loosen the generator shaft bolt before remov-

ing the generator rotor.
1. Remove:
• generator shaft bolt 1
NOTE:
_
While the holding the generator rotor 2 with

the primary sheave holder 3, loosen the gen-
erator shaft bolt.

YS-01880-A
È 2. Remove:
• crankcase bolts
• holder
NOTE:
_
• Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in

• Loosen the bolts in decreasing numerical
order (refer to the numbers in the illustra-
tion).
É • The numbers embossed on the crankcase
indicate the crankcase tightening sequence.
È Right crankcase
É Left crankcase
M8 × 100 mm bolts: 1, 2
M8 × 80 mm bolt: 3
M6 × 105 mm bolt: K
M6 × 85 mm bolts: 9, C
M6 × 75 mm bolts: D, E
M6 × 60 mm bolts: 4 ~ 7
M6 × 40 mm bolts: 8, 0 ~ B, F ~ J
5 - 96
CRANKCASE ENG
3. Turn:
• shift drum segment
NOTE:
_
Turn the shift drum segment 1 to the position

shown in the illustration. In this position, the
shift drum segment’s teeth will not contact the
crankcase during crankcase separation.
4. Remove:
• right crankcase
CAUTION:
_
• First check that the shift drum segment’s

teeth then remove the right crankcase.
• Tap on one side of the crankcase with a
soft-face hammer. Tap only on reinforced
portions of the crankcase, not on the
crankcase mating surfaces. Work slowly
and carefully and make sure the crank-
case halves separate evenly.
EAS00399
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE
1. Thoroughly wash the crankcase halves in a
mild solvent.
2. Thoroughly clean all the gasket surfaces
and crankcase mating surfaces.
3. Check:
• crankcase
• oil delivery passages
air.
5 - 97
CRANKCASE ENG
EAS00401
CHECKING THE BEARINGS AND OIL
SEALS
1. Check:
• bearings
Clean and lubricate the bearings, then
rotate the inner race with your finger.
Rough movement → Replace.
2. Check:
• oil seals

1. Check:
Damage → Replace.
compressed air.
• O-rings 2
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL PUMP DRIVE

1. Check:
• oil pump drive gear 1
• oil pump driven gear 2
Chips/pitting/roughness/wear → Replace
the defective part(s).
5 - 98
CRANKCASE ENG
EAS00416
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
1. Apply:
• sealant
(onto the crankcase mating surfaces)
Quick Gasket®
ACC-11001-05-01
NOTE:
_
Do not allow any sealant to come into contact

with the oil gallery.
2. Install:
• dowel pins 1
• joint pipe 2
3. Install:
• left crankcase
(onto the right crankcase)
NOTE:
_
• Turn the shift drum segment 1 to the posi-

tion shown in the illustration. In this position,
the shift drum segment’s teeth will not con-
tact the crankcase during crankcase installa-
tion.
• Tap lightly on the left crankcase with a soft-
face hammer.
5 - 99
CRANKCASE ENG
È 4. Install:
• holder
• crankcase bolts
NOTE:
_
• Lubricate the bolt threads with engine oil.

• Tighten each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in
stages and in a crisscross pattern.
• Tighten the bolts in numerical order (refer to
the numbers in the illustration).
É È Left crankcase
É Right crankcase
M8 × 100 mm bolts: 1, 2
M8 × 80 mm bolt: 3
M6 × 105 mm bolt: K
M6 × 85 mm bolts: 9, C
M6 × 75 mm bolts: D, E
M6 × 60 mm bolts: 4 ~ 7
M6 × 40 mm bolts: 8, 0 ~ B, F ~ J
Bolt 1 ~ 3
T.
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)
Bolt 4 ~ K
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
5. Apply:
• engine oil
(onto the crankshaft pins bearings and oil
delivery holes)
6. Check:
• crankshaft and transmission operation
7. Install:
• engine oil pump driven gear 1
• engine oil pump driven gear stopper 2
• bolts 4 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
8. Install:
• generator rotor
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
5 - 100
CRANKCASE ENG
9. Install:
• washer
• generator shaft bolt 1
28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
• Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®) to the

threads of the generator shaft bolt.
• While holding the generator rotor 2 with the
primary sheave holder 3, tighten the gener-
ator shaft bolt.

YS-01880-A
5 - 101
ENGINE OIL PUMP ENG
EAS00356
ENGINE OIL PUMP

Removing the engine oil pump Remove the parts in the order listed.
Crankcase Separate.
Refer to “CRANKCASE”
1 Oil strainer 1
2 Engine oil pump assembly 1
procedure.
5 - 102
ENGINE OIL PUMP ENG

Disassembling the engine oil pump Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Spring retainer 1
2 Spring 1
3 Relief valve 1
4 Oil pump housing cover 1 1
5 Pin 2
6 Spring 1
7 Collar 1
8 Ball 1
9 Oil pump outer rotor 1 1
0 Oil pump inner rotor 1 1
A Pin 1
5 - 103
ENGINE OIL PUMP ENG

B Oil pump housing cover 2 1
C Pin 2
D Oil pump shaft 1
E Pin 1
F Oil pump inner rotor 2 1
G Oil pump outer rotor 2 1
H Oil seal 2
I Oil pump housing 1
procedure.
5 - 104
ENGINE OIL PUMP ENG
EAS00363
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP
1. Check:
• oil pump housing covers 2
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace the defec-
tive part(s).
2. Measure:
• inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance a
• outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance
b
Out of specification → Replace the oil
pump.
1 Inner rotor
2 Outer rotor
3 Oil pump housing
Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip
clearance
0 ~ 0.12 mm (0 ~ 0.0047 in)
Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing
clearance (feed pump)
0.03 ~ 0.08 mm
(0.0012 ~ 0.0031 in)
Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing
clearance (scavenging pump)
0.06 ~ 0.11 mm
(0.0024 ~ 0.0043 in)
3. Check:
Rough movement → Repeat steps (1) and
(2) or replace the defective part(s).
EAS00365
CHECKING THE RELIEF VALVE
1. Check:
• relief valve body 1
• relief valve 2
• spring 3
Damage/wear → Replace the defective
part(s).
5 - 105
ENGINE OIL PUMP ENG
2. Check:
• ball 1
• collar 2
• spring 3
• oil seal 4
part(s).
EAS00368
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER
1. Check:
• oil strainer 1
Damage → Replace.
Contaminants → Clean with solvent.
EAS00375
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP
1. Lubricate:
• inner rotor
• outer rotor
• oil pump shaft
Engine oil
5 - 106
ENGINE OIL PUMP ENG
2. Install:
• oil seals 2
• oil pump outer rotor 2 3
• oil pump inner rotor 2 4
• pin 5
• oil pump shaft 6
• pins 7
• oil pump housing cover 2 8
2 Nm (0.2 m • kg, 1.4 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• pin 9
• oil pump inner rotor 1 0
• oil pump outer rotor 1 A
• ball B
• collar C
• spring D
• pins E
• oil pump housing cover 1 F
2 Nm (0.2 m • kg, 1.4 ft • lb)
T.
R.
• relief valve G
• spring H
• spring retainer I
11 Nm (1.1 m • kg, 8.0 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
When installing the inner rotor, align the pin in

the oil pump shaft with the groove in the inner
rotor.
3. Check:
Refer to “CHECKING THE OIL PUMP”.
EAS00376
INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP
1. Install:
• oil pump 1 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
CAUTION:
_
After tightening the bolts, make sure the oil

pump turns smoothly.
5 - 107
ENGINE OIL PUMP ENG
EAS00378
INSTALLING THE OIL STRAINER
1. Install:
• oil strainer 1
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
_
The arrow mark on the oil strainer cover must

point towards the rear of the engine.
5 - 108
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS ENG
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS

Removing the crankshaft and Remove the parts in the order listed.
connecting rods
Crankcase Separate.
Refer to “CRANKCASE”.
1 Crankshaft 1
2 Generator shaft 1
3 Connecting rod cap 2
4 Big end lower bearing 2
5 Connecting rod 2
6 Big end upper bearing 2
procedure.
5 - 109
EAS00385
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT
1. Remove:
• crankshaft journal bearing 1
NOTE:
_
• Remove the crankshaft journal bearing with

the bearing remover and installer 2 and
bearing driver 3.
Bearing remover and installer

YM-28898
Bearing driver
YM-04058
EAS00391
REMOVING THE CONNECTING RODS
connecting rods.
1. Remove:
• connecting rod caps 1
• connecting rod
• big end bearings
NOTE:
_
Identify the position of each big end bearing so

that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
EAS00398
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND
CONNECTING RODS
1. Measure:
• crankshaft runout
shaft.
Crankshaft runout
Less than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
5 - 110
2. Check:
• crankshaft journal surfaces
• crankshaft pin surfaces
• bearing surfaces
Scratches/wear → Replace the crankshaft.
• generator shaft drive gear 1
Damage/wear → Replace the crankshaft.
3. Measure:
• crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clear-
ance
Out of specification → Replace the big end
bearings.
Crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bear-
ing clearance
0.037 ~ 0.074 mm
(0.0015 ~ 0.0029 in)

connecting rods.
CAUTION:
_
Do not interchange the big end bearings

and connecting rods. To obtain the correct
crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clear-
ance and prevent engine damage, the big
end bearings must be installed in their orig-
inal positions.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Clean the big end bearings, crankshaft pins,
and the inside of the connecting rod halves.
b. Install the big end upper bearing into the
connecting rod and the big end lower bear-
ing into the connecting rod cap.
NOTE:
_
Align the projections a on the big end bear-

ings with the notches b in the connecting rod
and connecting rod cap.
c. Put a piece of Plastigauge® 1 on the

crankshaft pin.
5 - 111
d. Assemble the connecting rod halves.
NOTE:
_
• Do not move the connecting rod or crank-

shaft until the clearance measurement has
been completed.
• Lubricate the bolts threads and nut seats
with molybdenum disulfide grease.
• Make sure the projection c on the connect-
ing rod faces towards the left side of the
crankshaft.
• Make sure the characters d on both the con-
necting rod and connecting rod cap are
aligned.
e. Tighten the connecting rod bolts.

WARNING
• Replace the connecting rod bolts with
new ones.
• Clean the connecting rod bolts.
NOTE:
The tightening procedure of the connecting rod
bolts is angle controlled, therefore tighten the
bolts using the following procedure.
f. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to the

specified torque.
Connecting rod bolt

1st
T.
R.
15 Nm (1.5 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)
g. Tighten the connecting rod bolts further to

reach the specified angle 90° ~ 120°.
Connecting rod bolts

Final
T.
R.
Specified angle 90° ~ 120°
WARNING
When the bolts are tightened more than the
specified angle, do not loosen the bolt and
then retighten it.
Replace the bolt with a new one and per-
form the procedure again.
5 - 112
CAUTION:
• Do not use a torque wrench to tighten the
bolt to the specified angle.
• Tighten the bolt until it is the specified
angle.
NOTE:
When using a hexagonal bolt note that the
angle from one corner to another is 60°.
h. Remove the connecting rod and big end

bearings.
Refer to “REMOVING THE CONNECTING
RODS”.
i. Measure the compressed Plastigauge®
width e on each crankshaft pin.
If the crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing
clearance is out of specification, select
replacement big end bearings.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5 - 113
4. Select:
• big end bearings (P1 ~ P2)
P1 P2
NOTE:
_
• The numbers a stamped into the crankshaft

web and the numbers b on the connecting
rods are used to determine the replacement
big end bearing sizes.
• “P1” ~ “P2” refer to the bearings shown in the
crankshaft illustration.
For example, if the connecting rod “P1” and the

crankshaft web “P” numbers are “5” and “2”
respectively, then the bearing size for “P1” is:
“P1” (connecting rod) - “P” (crankshaft) =

5 - 2 = 3 (brown)
BIG END BEARING COLOR CODE

1 blue
2 black
3 brown
4 green
5 yellow
5 - 114
5. Measure:
• crankshaft journal diameter a
shaft.
Crankshaft journal diameter

49.968 ~ 49.980 mm
(1.9672 ~ 1.9677 in)
NOTE:
Measure the diameter of each crankshaft jour-
nal at two places.
6. Measure:
• crankshaft journal bearing inside diameter
a
case assembly.
Crankshaft journal bearing inside

diameter
50.010 ~ 50.028 mm
(1.9689 ~ 1.9696 in)
NOTE:
Measure the inside diameter of each crank-
shaft journal bearing at two places.
5 - 115
7. Calculate:
• crankshaft journal-to-crankshaft journal
bearing clearance
shaft and crankshaft journal bearings as a
set.
NOTE:
crankshaft journal diameter from the crank-
shaft journal bearing inside diameter.
Crankshaft journal-to-crankshaft
journal bearing clearance
0.030 ~ 0.060 mm
(0.0012 ~ 0.0024 in)
EAS00403
INSTALLING THE CONNECTING RODS
1. Lubricate:
• bolt threads
Molybdenum disulfide grease
2. Lubricate:
• crankshaft pins
• connecting rod inner surface
Engine oil
5 - 116
3. Install:
• connecting rods
• connecting rod caps
(onto the crankshaft pins)
NOTE:
_
• Align the projections a on the big end bear-

ings with the notches b in the connecting
rods and connecting rod caps.
• Be sure to reinstall each big end bearing in
its original place.
• Make sure the projection c on the connect-
ing rods face towards the left side of the
crankshaft.
• Make sure the characters d on both the con-
necting rod and connecting rod cap are
aligned.
4. Tighten:
• connecting rod bolts 1
WARNING
• Replace the connecting rod bolts with
new ones.
• Clean the connecting rod bolts.
NOTE:
The tightening procedure of the connecting rod
bolts is angle controlled, therefore tighten the
bolts using the following procedure.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to the
specified torque.

1st
T.
R.
15 mm (1.5 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)
b. Tighten the connecting rod bolts further to

reach the specified angle 90° ~ 120°.

Final
T.
R.
Specified angle 90° ~ 120°
5 - 117
WARNING
When the bolts are tightened more than the
specified angle, do not loosen the bolt and
then retighten it.
Replace the bolt with a new one and per-
form the procedure again.
CAUTION:
• Do not use a torque wrench to tighten the
bolt to the specified angle.
• Tighten the bolt until it is the specified
angle.
NOTE:
When using a hexagonal bolt note that the
angle from one corner to another is 60°.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00408
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT
1. Install:
• generator shaft 1
2. Install:
• crankshaft assembly
CAUTION:
_
To avoid scratching the crankshaft and to

ease the installation procedure, lubricate
the oil seal lips with lithium-soap-based
grease and each bearing with engine oil.
NOTE:
_
• Make sure that the generator shaft drive gear

teeth and generator shaft driven gear teeth
mesh correctly.
• Align the right connecting rod with the front
cylinder sleeve hole.
5 - 118
TRANSMISSION ENG
EAS00419
TRANSMISSION

Removing the transmission, shift Remove the parts in the order listed.
drum assembly, and shift forks
Crankcase Separate.
Refer to “CRANKCASE”.
1 Shift fork guide bar 2
2 Shift fork “L” 1
3 Shift fork “R” 1
4 Shift fork “C” 1
5 Shift drum assembly 1
6 Drive axle assembly 1
7 Main axle assembly 1
8 Spacer 1
procedure.
5 - 119
TRANSMISSION ENG

Disassembling the main axle Remove the parts in the order listed.
assembly
1 Circlip 1
2 Washer 1
3 5th pinion gear 1
4 2nd/3rd pinon gear 1
5 Circlip 1
6 Washer 1
7 4th pinon gear 1
8 Main axle/1st pinon gear 1
procedure.
5 - 120
TRANSMISSION ENG

Disassembling the drive axle Remove the parts in the order listed.
assembly
1 5th wheel gear 1
2 Circlip 1
3 Washer 1
4 2nd wheel gear 1
5 Circlip 1
6 Washer 1
7 1st wheel gear 1
8 4th wheel gear 1
9 Circlip 1
0 Washer 1
A 3rd wheel gear 1
B Drive axle 1
procedure.
5 - 121
TRANSMISSION ENG
EAS00421
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS
shift forks.
1. Check:
• shift fork cam follower 1
• shift fork pawl 2
Bends/damage/scoring/wear → Replace
the shift fork.
2. Check:
• shift fork guide bar
Roll the shift fork guide bar on a flat surface.
Bends → Replace.
WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent shift

fork guide bar.
3. Check:
• shift fork movement
(along the shift fork guide bar)
Rough movement → Replace the shift forks
and shift fork guide bar as a set.
5 - 122
TRANSMISSION ENG
EAS00422
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY
1. Check:
• shift drum grooves
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace the
shift drum assembly.
• shift drum segment 1
Damage/wear → Replace the shift drum
assembly.
• shift drum bearing 2
Damage/pitting → Replace the shift drum
assembly.
EAS00425
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION
1. Measure:
• main axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge 1)
Out of specification → Replace the main
axle.
Main axle runout limit

0.08 mm (0.003 in)
2. Measure:
• drive axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge 1)
Out of specification → Replace the drive
axle.
Drive axle runout limit

0.08 mm (0.003 in)
3. Check:
• transmission gears
Blue discoloration/pitting/wear → Replace
the defective gear(s).
• transmission gear dogs
Cracks/damage/rounded edges → Replace
the defective gear(s).
5 - 123
TRANSMISSION ENG
4. Check:
• transmission gear engagement
(each pinion gear to its respective wheel
gear)
Incorrect → Reassemble the transmission
axle assemblies.
5. Check:
• transmission gear movement
Rough movement → Replace the defective
part(s).
6. Check:
• circlips
Bends/damage/looseness → Replace.
EAS00428
INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION
1. Install:
• main axle assembly 1
• drive axle assembly 2
• O-ring
• spacer
EAS00426
INSTALLING THE SHIFT FORKS AND
SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY
1. Install:
• shift fork “R”
• shift fork “C”
• shift fork “L”
• shift drum assembly 1
• shift fork guide bars
NOTE:
_
The embossed marks on the shift forks should

face towards the right side of the engine and
be in the following sequence: “R”, “C”, “L”.
5 - 124
TRANSMISSION ENG
2. Check:
• transmission
NOTE:
_
Oil each gear, shaft, and bearing thoroughly.
5 - 125
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FI
1 Linear control valve 8 Spark plug E Decompression solenoid
2 Intake air pressure sensor 2 9 Relay unit F Crankshaft position sensor
3 Intake air temperature sensor 0 ECU G Cylinder identification sensor
4 Intake air pressure sensor 1 A Battery H Ignition coil
5 Engine temperature sensor
6 Atmospheric pressure sensor
7 Throttle position sensor
B Fuel pump
C Lean angle cut-off switch
D Oil temperature sensor
1
2
4 5 6 7
3
3 8
9
0
4
2
1
5
6
A
B
C
H G 8 F E D
6-1
9 L B/R Lg Br/B
A B
Br/B L B/R L/W1 R/L

0 A L/R L/G L/Y Sb B/Y Lg
Ch Dg Dg Ch G/Y G G G/Y
Y L B B L Y W W W W
(BLACK) (BLACK)
L/W1 B/Y Sb L/Y L/G R/L
WIREHARNESS TAIL SUB-WIREHARNESS WIREHARNESS INJECTION SUB-WIREHARNESS L/R
Sb
R/L G L/G
WIRING DIAGRAM
B
B
D B B
(BLUE)
B
B B
G B C
R/L B B
B L/G
W W 5 (BLUE)
1 W W 2 R R R/G
W W
B R W/G R/G Y W/Y P P/W P/Y Br/W B/R W/B L R/W L/B G Gy Lg B3 B/W B/O
WWW (BLACK)
Gy B/R
R
Br/L P/L G/R Y/G R/W Y/L R/B Br B/L Y/B L/R W Gy Y/R R/L Y/R L/W B3 B/Y B/G
(GRAY) B R R (BLACK)
B/L B/O
R/W L L W/Y W L
R R Gy B/L B Gy E L L
B/L B W/Y
Gy B/O S
R/B R/W B/W
B/L L/B
R
B B/L
6 L Y B F Y Y
R L L B/R
R
3 L (BLACK) W/B R/G R/G
R Br/L R R W/Y P/L P/L
ON R Q
OFF L/Y L/B W/G W/G B/W
4 7 L/W Br/L Br/L
B R/W L
B R/B S
P/W B/L L B/L R/B
L/Y W/G R/B R/G
Br/L R P/W P/W
Br/L L/B L/B B B (BLACK) P/Y Br/L R/B P/L R/B
L/Y B
G P
B B 8 P Y/R
L M
P/Y B/L L B/L B/L Br/W Br/W
P/Y Br
(GRAY) H B/L Br/W B B W
Y/L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
L R/B
P B/L L B/L
N T
å P
B Br
Y/G G/R G/R G G G/R B/L
Br/B (BLACK) Gy/R
R I R/L
L/R
Br B Lg Lg B B Gy/R Lg
B/G
L B/L (BLACK) (BLACK)
~ L W/B W L O Gy
W/B (BLACK)
R/B R/B B/L B J B/L B W B/Y G
Y/B U
(BLACK) (BLACK) Gy B Gy Gy W W B W
W B
L W Gy
(BLACK)
K Y/G
6-2
L Y/G B/L B3 R/W (DARK GRAY)
B/L B/R
B3 V
G B G G W W B W
W G
}
R Gy/R (GRAY)
|
Br/L Br
Br W
{ W
Z
Br P Br
Br/L R/W g f B/W Br L L Br
(BLACK) P e R/G G G R/G B Y/L Y/L B
z B [
Gy Gy
Br/L R/Y Br/W Y/R Br/W Br G
B
R/Y R/Y W Y/R B \
Br Lg Y/L B
R/G
R/Y Br X
L
R/W B/R L/W1 G/L h ]
s Br
R/Y Y/B
R/W B/R Y Y/B

G/Y R/B R/W L/Y ^
Br B/G L/W1 i B/Y G/L P Br/W Y/R G/R G/R Y
L/W B Br
L/R L/R
(BLACK) (BLACK) B/L B/L
Y G L/Y L/Y G Y a P P
Br u v k l m Dg Ch B/Y B/Y Ch Dg Ch R R
(L) O O
t N (BLUE) (BLUE) Br/Y Br/Y
B/Y L/Y (R) b
j (BLACK) Dg
B B Br/W P B B P Br/W
(BLACK)
y R/Y Y/R Y/R G/L R P P R
c O Br/Y Br/Y O
Y (RED) (RED)
Y G B Ch Dg
Br Y Y B/G R P
Y
d O Br/Y L/R Gy
(BLACK) Gy L/R
A (RED) B/L G/R G/R B/L
Y (BLUE) (BLUE)
L A L Br Y Ch L/R Gy
L Y Ch Dg Lg Dg B/L G/R
L B
A A (BLUE)
(GREEN)
w L Y Y L Ch Dg
B B Ch B
L L Ch Ch Y Br
Dg Dg
Y G Dg Lg B
x (GREEN)
G B
q
FI
r Y B
p o n
B
B B
B
B A B B
B A B B B
B
3 Main switch
4 Battery
6 Main fuse
A Fuel injection system relay
B Fuel pump
E Crankshaft position sensor
F Throttle position sensor
G Intake air pressure sensor 1
H Intake air pressure sensor 2
I Atmospheric pressure sensor
J Cylinder identification sensor
K Lean angle cut-off switch
L Speed sensor
M Intake air temperature sensor
N Engine temperature sensor
O Oil temperature sensor
P ECU
Q Linear control valve
U Cylinder #1-injector
V Cylinder #2-injector
u Engine stop switch
{ Ignition fuse
~ ECU fuse
å Fuel injection system fuse
6-3
ECU’S SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
The ECU is equipped with a self-diagnostic function in order to ensure that the engine control sys-
tem is operating normally. If this function detects a malfunction in the system, it immediately oper-
ates the engine under substitute characteristics and illuminates the engine trouble warning light to
alert the rider that a malfunction has occurred in the system. Once a malfunction has been detected,
it becomes stored in the ECU memory in the form of a fault code.
ECU’s mode function

The ECU is equipped with a diagnosis mode, in addition to the normal mode in which the ECU oper-
ates normally.
Normal mode
• To check whether the warning light bulb is blown, the warning light illuminates for 1.4 seconds
after the main switch has been turned ON, and while the starter switch is being pressed.
• To inform the rider that the fuel injection stop function is active, the warning light blinks while the
start switch is being pressed to start the engine.
• If a malfunction in the system is detected by the self-diagnostic function, this mode provides an
appropriate substitute characteristic operation, and alerts the rider of the detected malfunction by
illuminating a warning light.
• After the engine has been stopped, digital numbers representing the self-diagnostic fault codes
appear on the clock LCD. Once a self-diagnostic fault code has been displayed, it remains stored
in the ECU memory until a deletion operation is performed.
Diagnosis mode
• In this mode, diagnostic codes are input into the ECU in accordance with the number of times the
start switch has been operated.
• In accordance with the diagnostic codes, the ECU displays the values received from the sensors
and actuates the actuators.
• Whether or not the system is operating normally is determined by a human operator through the
observations of the values indicated by the engine trouble warning light or the actuating conditions
of the actuators.
6-4
Engine trouble warning light indication and FI system operating conditions (normal mode)
Warning light ECU’s operating

FI operating condition Starting and driving
indication condition
ON and OFF *1 Self-diagnostic func- FI function in operation Able
tion in operation
Blinking *2 Warning control when Operation stopped Unable
unable to start engine
Continuous ON Detecting malfunction Gives driving instruc- Able/Unable depend-
tions with substitute ing on self-diagnostic
characteristics in accor- fault code
dance with the descrip-
tion of the malfunction.
OFF *3 Possibly a blown warn-
ing light bulb or a mal-
function in power
supply system or ECU
*1
The warning light illuminates 1.4 seconds each
Main switch Main switch time the main switch is turned ON. The ECU
OFF ON
performs a self diagnosis during this time and
Engine trouble Light Light ON for Light turns OFF the light thereafter.
warning light OFF 1.4 seconds OFF
Initialize *2
Warning control when unable to start engine
This control is effected when any one of the
conditions listed below is present and the
starter switch is turned ON:
a. Battery voltage below the specified value
(defective Fuel injection system relay,
engine stop switch turned OFF, or drained
battery)
b. One of the fault codes listed below has
been detected (self-diagnostic code 12, 19,
30, 41, or 50 is output):
(12: faulty crankshaft position sensor sig-
nal)
(19: open circuit in sidestand input line)
(30: a fall has been detected)
(41: open or short circuit in lean angle cut-
off switch)
(50: ECU memory check error)
6-5
*3
Function to check for blown warning light bulb
The engine trouble warning light illuminates 1
for 1.4 seconds after the main switch has been
turned “ON” and while the starter switch is
being pressed. If the warning light does not
illuminate under these conditions, a problem
1 may have possibly occurred, such as a blown
warning light bulb. Therefore, take an appropri-
ate corrective action by referring to the trouble-
shooting section.
Determining the area of the malfunction through the self-diagnostic fault code number
The possible location of the system in which a problem may be occurring can be determined by
observing the self-diagnostic fault code number that appears on the tachometer and cross-referenc-
ing it on the fault code number table. When used in conjunction with the troubleshooting details, and
by checking the possible items one by one, you will be able to identify the cause of the problem in
order to carry out an accurate repair work.
Warning of the occurrence of a malfunction appears on the tachometer.
Determine the area of the problem by referring to the self-diagnostic fault code number.
Turn off the main switch.
Repair the problem area by referring to the troubleshooting details.
Turn “ON” the main switch in order to revert to normal operation, and erase the fault code from
memory. (Once a fault code is detected by the ECU, it remains stored in the ECU memory even
after the main switch has been turned “OFF”.)
6-6
* Table of self-diagnostic fault code numbers displayed on meter
Able/ Able/ Able/ Able/
No. Symptom unable to unable to No. Symptom unable to unable to
start drive start drive
No normal signals are received Faulty intake air pressure sensor
from the cylinder identification pipe system 2; a hose is
sensor. detached, causing the constant
11 Able Able 26 Able Able
application of atmospheric pres-
sure to the sensor; or, the hose is
clogged.
No normal signals are received Oil temperature sensor - open or
12 from the crankshaft position sen- Unable Unable 27 short circuit detected. Able Able
sor.
Intake air pressure sensor 1 - Engine temperature sensor -
open or short circuit detected. open or short circuit detected.
Faulty intake air pressure sensor Decompression thermostat -
pipe system 1; a hose is open or short circuit detected.
detached, causing the constant
application of atmospheric pres-
sure to the sensor; or, the hose is
clogged.
Throttle position sensor - open or The motorcycle has overturned.
15 Able Able 30 Unable Unable
short circuit detected.
A stuck throttle position sensor is Linear control valve - faulty valve
detected. or motor is detected.
Open circuit is detected in the Decompression solenoid - open
19 input line from the sidestand Unable Unable 38 circuit is detected. Able Able
switch to the ECU.
Atmospheric pressure sensor or Lean angle cut-off switch - open
intake air pressure sensor or short circuit detected.
Malfunction of the atmospheric
pressure sensor in the intermedi-
ate electrical potential.
Malfunction of the intake air pres-
sure sensor in the intermediate
electrical potential.
Intake temperature sensor - open No normal signals are received
or short circuit detected. from the speed sensor; or, an
open or short circuit is detected in
the neutral switch.
Atmospheric pressure sensor - The ECU is unable to monitor the
23 open or short circuit detected. Able Able 43 battery voltage (an open circuit in Able Able
the line to the ECU).
Intake air pressure sensor 2 - Faulty ECU memory. When this
open or short circuit detected. malfunction is detected, the code
number might not appear on the
meter.
• How to erase the self-diagnostic fault code from memory:

If the ECU detects a normal signal upon the completion of the repair of the malfunction, the self-
diagnostic fault code disappears from the meter and is replaced by the normal clock display. How-
ever, the self-diagnostic fault code of the previous malfunction remains in the ECU memory as
part of the malfunction history. To erase the self-diagnostic fault code from the malfunction history,
the operation for diagnostic code 62 must be performed in the diagnosis mode.
6-7
SUBSTITUTE CHARACTERISTICS OPERATION CONTROL (FAIL-SAFE ACTION)
If the ECU detects an abnormal signal from a sensor while the motorcycle is being driven, the ECU
illuminates the engine trouble warning light and provides the engine with substitute characteristic
operation instructions that are appropriate for the type of the malfunction.
When an abnormal signal is received from a sensor, the ECU processes the specified values that
are programmed for every sensor, in order to provide the engine with substitute characteristics
operation instructions that enable the engine to continue to operate (or to stop its operation,
depending on circumstances).
The ECU takes fail-safe actions in two ways: one in which the sensor output is set to a prescribed
value, and the other in which the ECU directly operates an actuator. Details on the fail-safe actions
are given in the table below.
Table of substitute characteristic operation control by self-diagnostic fault code

Able/unable to Able/unable to
Code No. Item Fail-safe action
start drive
Cylinder identification • Continues to operate the engine based on the
11 sensor results of the cylinder identification that existed up Able Able
to that point.
Crankshaft position sen- • Stops the engine (by stopping the injection and
12 Unable Unable
sor ignition).
13 Intake air pressure sensor • Fixes the intake air pressure to 760 mmHg.
14 (open or short circuit)
Able Able
25 (pipe system)
26
Throttle position sensor • Fixes the throttle position sensor to fully open.
15
(open or short circuit) Able Able
16
(stuck)
Sidestand switch -- (No start)
19 (open circuit in wire to Unable Unable
ECU)
Atmospheric pressure • Fixes the atmospheric correction value to 0 mmHg.
20 sensor or intake air pres- Able Able
sure sensor
Intake temperature sen- • Fixes the intake temperature to 15 °C (59 °F).
22 Able Able
sor
Atmospheric pressure • Fixes the atmospheric pressure to 760 mmHg.
23 Able Able
sensor
27 Oil temperature sensor • Fixes the oil temperature to 80 °C (176 °F). Able Able
Engine temperature sen- • Fixes the engine temperature to 140 °C (284 °F).
28 Able Able
sor
Decompression thermo- • Electricity is not circulated to the decompression
29 Able Able
stat solenoid and the thermostat is not operated.
37 Linear control valve -- Able Able
38 Decompression solenoid -- Able Able
Lean angle cut-off switch • Turns OFF the fuel injection system relay of the fuel
30
(latch up detected) system. Unable Unable
41
(open or short circuit)
Speed sensor, neutral • Fixes the gear to the top gear.
42 Able Able
switch
Fuel system voltage • Fixes the battery voltage to 12 V.
43 Able Able
(monitor voltage)
ECU internal malfunction --
50 Unable Unable
(memory check error)
6-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnosis mode troubleshooting 1 (self-diagnostic malfunction detected)
By entering a diagnostic code in the ECU through the use of the “SELECT” and “RESET” buttons on
the tachometer, the sensor output values can be displayed and the actuators can be operated in
accordance with the code that has been entered.
The technician determines whether or not the operation is normal by verifying the values displayed
on the tachometer or the operating conditions of the actuators. These modes can be used to detect
and check the problems that are otherwise difficult to detect in the diagnosis mode.
Basic operation procedure
Operation preparation
• Verify the self-diagnostic fault code number that is displayed on the meter.
• Based on the self-diagnostic fault code number, select the applicable sensor or actuator from the
diagnostic code table.
• If a diagnostic code is available, proceed with the operation procedure given below in order to
verify the operating conditions of the applicable sensor or actuator.
Operation procedure (make sure to turn “OFF” the main switch upon completing the operation prep-
aration)
Setting the ECU in the diagnosis mode
1. While keeping the “SELECT” and “RESET” ON
OFF
buttons pressed simultaneously, turn “ON”
the main switch 1 (keep them pressed for TRIP
0D0
km
mile
8 seconds or more).
* Letters “dIAG” appear on the clock LCD.
T 1
Selecting the diagnosis mode

After “dIAG” appears as a result of pressing
the “SELECT” button, simultaneously press
the “SELECT” and “RESET” buttons for 2 sec- TRIP
0D0
km
mile
onds or more to execute the selection.
SELECT RESET
6-9
Verifying the operation of various sensors and
actuators
1. Disconnect the wiring harness coupler from
the fuel pump.
2. Turn the engine stop switch “OFF”. TRIP
0D0
km
mile
· Turn the engine stop switch “ON” if diag-

nostic code numbers 03 and 09 are
shown.
SELECT RESET
3. Select the diagnostic code number that

applies to the item that was verified with the SELECT
self-diagnostic fault code number, and (01 70)
enter it on the meter by operating the
“SELECT” or “RESET” button.
* “RESET” button
Decrement (press 1 second or longer → auto)
“SELECT” button TRIP
0D0
km
mile
Increment (press 1 second or longer → auto)

* Diagnostic code number appears on clock
LCD (01 ~ 70)
4. Verifying the operation of the displayed SELECT RESET
diagnostic code
RESET
· Verifying various sensors (01 70)
The data representing the operating con-
ditions of the sensors appears on the trip
LCD (throttle position sensor angle, cool-
ant temperature, atmospheric pressure,
etc.)
· Verifying the operation of actuators
Start the operation by turning the stop
switch “ON” (injectors, relay, ignition coil,
AIS, etc.)
* If the stop switch is “ON”, turn it “OFF”;
then, turn it back “ON”.
5. Check the results by referring to the sensor
operation data verification table or the actu-
ator operation verification table.
Perform individual repairs on the areas where

malfunctions have been identified.
6 - 10
Erase the codes appearing on the meter upon
the completion of the operation (reinstating the
ECU).
* Verify the reinstatement procedures
detailed in the troubleshooting details in
order to carry out the reinstatement opera-
tion that is applicable to the malfunctioning
item.
Refer to “troubleshooting details”.
Erase the fault code from memory.

* Perform the operation for diagnostic code
62.
6 - 11
Self-diagnostic fault codes, symptoms, and probable causes
Diagnostic code indication
Code No. Symptom Probable cause of malfunction Diagnostic code
No normal signals are received from • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
the cylinder identification sensor. • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
11 • Defective cylinder identification sensor. —
• Malfunction in ECU.
• Improperly installed sensor.
No normal signals are received from • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
the crankshaft position sensor. • Defective crankshaft position sensor.
12 • Malfunction in pickup rotor. —
Intake air pressure sensor 1 - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
short circuit detected. • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
13 03
• Defective intake air pressure sensor.
Faulty intake air pressure sensor pipe • Intake air pressure sensor hose is detached, clogged,
system 1; a hose is detached, caus- kinked, or pinched.
ing constant application of the atmo- • Malfunction of the intake air pressure sensor in the interme-
03
spheric pressure to the sensor; or, the diate electrical potential.
02
hose is clogged. • Malfunction of the atmospheric pressure sensor in the inter-
mediate electrical potential.
14
Or, intake air pressure sensor - open • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
or short circuit detected. • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
03
Or, a stuck throttle position sensor is • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
detected. • Open or short circuit in wiring harness. 01
• Defective sensor (stuck throttle position sensor).
Throttle position sensor - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
15 • Defective throttle position sensor. 01
• Improperly installed throttle position sensor.
A stuck throttle position sensor is • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
detected. • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
Or, • Defective sensor (stuck throttle position sensor).
01
system; a hose is detached, causing kinked, or pinched.
16 03
constant application of the atmo- • Malfunction of the intake air pressure sensor in the interme-
02
Open circuit in the input line from the • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
sidestand switch to the ECU is • Malfunction in ECU.
19 20
detected when the start switch is
pressed.
When the main switch is turned to • Atmospheric pressure sensor hose is clogged.
ON, the atmospheric sensor voltage • Intake air pressure sensor hose is clogged, kinked, or
and intake air pressure sensor volt- pinched.
age differ greatly. • Malfunction of the atmospheric pressure sensor in the inter- 03
20
mediate electrical potential. 02
• Malfunction of the intake air pressure sensor in the interme-
diate electrical potential.
Intake temperature sensor - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
short circuit detected. • Defective intake temperature sensor.
22 05
6 - 12
Code No. Symptom Probable cause of malfunction Diagnostic code
Atmospheric pressure sensor - open • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
or short circuit detected. • Defective atmospheric pressure sensor.
23 02
Intake air pressure sensor 2 - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
25 02
system 2; a hose is detached, caus- kinked, or pinched.
ing constant application of the atmo- • Malfunction of the intake air pressure sensor in the interme-
03
02
26
Or, intake air pressure sensor - open • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
or short circuit detected. • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
03
Or, a stuck throttle position sensor is • Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
detected. • Open or short circuit in wiring harness. 01
• Defective sensor (stuck throttle position sensor).
Oil temperature sensor - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
short circuit detected. • Defective oil temperature sensor.
27 10
Engine temperature sensor - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
short circuit detected. • Defective engine temperature sensor.
28 11
Decompression solenoid (thermistor) • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
- open or short circuit detected. • Defective decompression solenoid (thermistor).
29 55
The motorcycle has overturned. • Overturned.
30 08
A faulty linear control valve or motor is • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
detected. • Defective linear control valve. 10
37
• Malfunction in ECU. 54
• Improperly installed linear control valve.
Decompression solenoid - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
short circuit detected. • Defective decompression solenoid.
38 55
Lean angle cut-off switch - open or • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
short circuit detected. • Defective lean angle cut-off switch.
41 08
No normal signals are received from • Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
the speed sensor; or, an open or • Defective speed sensor.
short circuit is detected in the neutral • Malfunction in vehicle speed sensor detected unit.
07
42 switch. • Defective neutral switch.
21
• Malfunction in the engine side of the neutral switch.
The ECU is unable to monitor the bat- • Open circuit in wiring harness.
43 tery voltage (an open circuit in the • Malfunction in ECU. —
monitor line to the ECU).
Faulty ECU memory. When this mal- • Malfunction in ECU. (The program and data are not properly
50 function is detected, the code number written on or read from the internal memory.) —
might not appear on the meter.
6 - 13
Sensor operation data display verification table
NOTE:
• Check the intake temperature, engine temperature, and oil temperature as close as possible to
the area in which the respective sensor is mounted.
• If it is not possible to check it with an atmospheric pressure gauge, judge it by using 760 mmHg as
the standard.
• If it is not possible to check the intake temperature, use the ambient temperature as reference
(use the compared values for reference).
Data displayed on meter

Diag code Item Description of action
(reference value)
Throttle angle Displays the throttle angle. 0 ~ 125 degrees
01 • Check with throttle fully closed. • Fully closed position (15 ~ 20)
• Check with throttle fully open. • Fully open position (95 ~ 100)
Atmospheric pres- Displays the atmospheric pressure. Compare it to the value dis-
02 sure * Use an atmospheric pressure gauge to check the atmo- played on the meter.
spheric pressure.
Pressure difference 1 Displays the pressure difference 1 (atmospheric pressure - 10 ~ 200 mmHg
intake air pressure 1).
03 Engine stop switch is on.
* Generate the pressure difference by cranking the engine
with the starter, without actually starting the engine.
Pressure difference 2 Displays the pressure difference 2 (atmospheric pressure - Same as above
04 intake air pressure 2)
* Same as above.
Intake temperature Displays the intake air temperature. Compare it to the value dis-
05
* Check the temperature in the air cleaner case. played on the meter.
Vehicle speed pulse Displays the accumulation of the vehicle pulses that are gen- (0 ~ 999; resets to 0 after 999)
07 erated when the tire is spun. OK if the numbers appear on
the meter.
Lean angle cut-off Displays the lean angle cut-off switch values. Upright: 0.4 ~ 1.4 V
08
switch Overturned: 3.8 ~ 4.2 V
Fuel system voltage Displays the fuel system voltage (battery voltage). 0 ~ 18.7 V
09
(monitor voltage) Engine stop switch is on. Normally, approximately 12.0 V
Engine oil tempera- Displays the temperature of the engine oil. –30 ~ 200 °C (–22 ~ 392 °F)
ture Cold engine: ambient tempera-
10
ture or higher
Warm engine: 80 °C or higher
Engine temperature Displays the temperature of the engine. –30 ~ 200 °C (–22 ~ 392 °F)
Cold engine: ambient tempera-
11 ture or higher
Warm engine: 100 °C (212 °F)
or higher
Sidestand switch Displays that the switch is ON or OFF. (When the gear is in a Stand retracted: ON
20
position other than neutral.) Stand extended: OFF
Neutral switch Displays that the switch is ON or OFF. Neutral: ON
21
In gear: OFF
E2PROM fault code • Displays the faulty cylinder that has been detected by a self- (01 ~ 02) Displays the cylinder
display diagnostic fault code. number.
60 • If multiple malfunctions have been detected, the same data (00) Displays when there is no
is transmitted 128 times, then different data is transmitted malfunction.
repeatedly.
Malfunction history • Displays the codes of the history of the self-diagnosis mal- 11 ~ 55
code display functions (i.e., a code of a malfunction that occurred once (00) Displays when there is no
and which has been corrected). malfunction.
61
• If multiple malfunctions have been detected, the same data
is transmitted 128 times, then different data is transmitted
repeatedly.
6 - 14
(reference value)
Malfunction history • Displays the total number of codes that are being detected 00 ~ 21
code erasure through self diagnosis and the fault codes in the past his- (00) Displays when there is no
tory. malfunction.
62
• Erases only the history codes when the engine stop switch
is turned from OFF to ON. If the engine stop switch is ON,
turn it OFF once, and then turn it back ON.
70 Control number • Displays the program control number. 00 ~ 255
6 - 15
Actuator operation verification table
(reference value)
Ignition coil #1 After 1 second has elapsed from the time the engine stop Check that spark is generated,
switch has been turned from OFF to ON, it actuates ignition 5 times with the engine stop
coils #1 for five times every second and illuminates the engine switch ON.
30 trouble warning light.
* Connect an ignition checker.
* If the engine stop switch is ON, turn it OFF once, and then
turn it back ON.
Ignition coil #2 Take the same actions as No. 30 above on ignition coils #2. Same as above
Same as above.
31
turn it back ON.
Injector #1 After 1 second has elapsed from the time the engine stop Check the operating sound of
switch has been turned from OFF to ON, it actuates the injec- the injector five times with
tor five times every second and illuminates the engine trouble engine stop switch ON.
36
warning light.
turn it back ON.
Injector #2 Take the same actions as No. 36 above on injector #2. Same as above
37 * If the engine stop switch is ON, turn it OFF once, and then
turn it back ON.
Fuel injection system After 1 second has elapsed from the time the engine stop Check the fuel injection system
relay switch has been turned from OFF to ON, it actuates the fuel relay operating sound.
injection system relay five times every second and illuminates Same as above
50 the engine trouble warning light (the light is OFF when the
relay is ON, and the light is ON when the relay is OFF).
turn it back ON.
Headlight relay After 1 second has elapsed from the time the engine stop Check the relay operating
switch has been turned from OFF to ON, it actuates the head- sound.
light relay five times every 5 seconds and illuminates the Same as above
52
engine trouble warning light. (ON 2 seconds, OFF 3 seconds)
turn it back ON.
Linear control valve After 1 second has elapsed from the time the engine stop Check the linear control valve
switch has been turned from OFF to ON, it actuates the linear operating sound, 3 times with
54 control valve four times every 5 seconds and illuminates the the engine stop switch ON.
engine trouble warning light (fully closed 2 seconds, fully open
2 seconds).
Decompression sole- After 1 second has elapsed from the time the engine stop Check the decompression sole-
noid switch has been turned from OFF to ON, it actuates the noid operating sound, 5 times
decompression solenoid five times every 5 seconds and illu- with the engine stop switch ON.
55 minates the engine trouble warning light (ON 2 seconds, OFF
3 seconds).
NOTE: Be sure to turn the start switch to ON, otherwise the
above mentioned operation will not be possible.
6 - 16
Troubleshooting
The condition of the engine is poor or the engine trouble warning light comes on.
* The engine trouble warning light may not come on even if the condition of the engine is poor.
The engine trouble warning light comes on. The engine trouble warning light does not come on.
Checking the self-diagnostic fault code Checking the sensor and actuators
Check the self-diagnostic fault code displayed on the Check the action of the following sensor and actuators
tachometer. according to the “Description of action” column. (Refer to
“Sensor operation data display verification table” and “Actua-
tor operation verification table”.)
01: Throttle position sensor (throttle angle)
Specifying a faulty system 30: Ignition coil #1
Refer to “Diagnostic code indication” to specify the faulty sys- 36: Injector #1
tem. 37: Injector #2
Troubleshooting the cause OK Not OK

Refer to “Diagnostic code indication” to troubleshoot the
Irregular sensor or actua-
cause. Faulty engine
tors
Checking and servicing the faulty estimations Refer to chapter 5 to Check and repair the
check and repair the applicable sensor and
Diagnostic code No. Diagnostic code No. engine. actuators.
Yes No
While checking the sensor Follow the procedures in Not OK

and actuators in the “Diag- “Troubleshooting details” to
nostic monitoring mode” check and repair the mal- Check the condition of the engine.
(refer to “Sensor operation function.
data display verification OK
table” and “Actuator opera-
tion verification table”), fol-
low the procedures in
“Troubleshooting details” to
check and repair the mal-
function.
Resetting the ECU

Refer to “Reinstatement method” in “Troubleshooting details”
to reset the ECU.
Checking the tachometer display

Turn the main switch to OFF, then to ON again to check if a
self-diagnostic fault code is displayed.
No codeis displayed
Repairs are complete.
Erasing the malfunction history

Even if the main switch is turned to OFF, the malfunction history is recorded. Perform the action described for diagnostic code 62 in
“Sensor operation data display verification table” to delete the malfunction history.
6 - 17
Troubleshooting details
Troubleshooting the self-diagnostic fault code
Code No. 11 Symptom No normal signals are received from the cylinder identification sensor.
Used diagnostic code No.
1.Inspection operation item Operation item and countermeasure Reinstatement
method
2.Defective cylinder identification sensor. Replace if defective. Reinstated by
Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in starting the engine
chapter 7. and operating it at
3.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short idle.
sub lead. circuit.
Between main wiring harness and sub lead
Blue - Blue
White/Black - White
Black/Blue - Black/Blue
4.Connected state of connector If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may securely.
have pulled out. Cylinder identification sensor coupler
Check the locking condition of the coupler. Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Sub-wire harness coupler
5.Installed state of sensor Check the installed area for looseness or
pinching.
Code No. 12 Symptom No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor.
Inspection operation item and probable cause Operation item and countermeasure Reinstatement
method
1.Installed state of sensor Check the installed area for looseness or Reinstated by
pinching. cranking the
2.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short engine.
sub lead. circuit between the main wiring harnesses.
Gray - Gray
have pulled out. Crankshaft position sensor coupler
4.Defective crankshaft position sensor. Replace if defective.
Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in
chapter 7.
6 - 18
Code No. 13 Symptom Intake air pressure sensor 1 - open or short circuit detected.
Used diagnostic code No. 03 (intake air pressure sensor 1)
method
1.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short Reinstated by turn-
sub lead. circuit. ing the main switch
Main wiring harness ON.
Pink/White - Pink/White
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Blue - Blue
have pulled out. Intake air pressure sensor coupler
3.Defective intake air pressure sensor Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6 - 19
Code No. 14 Symptom 1 Intake air pressure sensor 1 - pipe system malfunction (clogged or
detached hose).
2 Intake air pressure sensor 1 - open or short circuit detected.
3 Stuck throttle position sensor detected.
No. 01 (throttle position sensor)
No. 02 (atmospheric pressure sensor)
method
1.Common to 1, 2, and 3: If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it Reinstated by
Connected state of connector securely. starting the engine
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may Intake air pressure sensor coupler and operating it at
have pulled out. Main wiring harness ECU coupler idle.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
2-1.Intake air pressure sensor hose detached, Repair or replace the sensor hose. Reinstated by
clogged, kinked, or pinched. Inspect and repair the connection. starting the engine
Intake air pressure sensor malfunction at Replace it if there is a malfunction. and operating it at
intermediate electrical potential. idle.
Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction
at intermediate electrical potential. See page 6-25.
2-2.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Blue - Blue
2-3.Defective intake air pressure sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
3-1.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short Reinstated by
sub lead. circuit. starting the engine,
Main wiring harness operating it at idle,
Black/Blue - Black/Blue and then by racing
Yellow - Yellow it.
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Yellow - Yellow
Blue - Blue
3-2.Throttle position sensor lead wire open cir- Open circuit item: Output voltage
cuit output voltage check Ground wire open circuit: 5V
(B/L - Y) Output wire open circuit: 0V
Black/Blue - Yellow Power supply wire open circuit: 0 V
Check for open circuit and replace the throttle
position sensor.
3-3.Defective throttle position sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6 - 20
Code No. 15 Symptom Throttle position sensor - open or short circuit detected.
Used diagnostic code No. 01 (throttle position sensor)
method
1.Installed state of throttle position sensor. Check the installed area for looseness or Reinstated by turn-
pinching. ing the main switch
Check that it is installed in the specified posi- ON.
tion.
chapter 7.
have pulled out. Throttle position sensor coupler
3.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Yellow - Yellow
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Yellow - Yellow
Blue - Blue
4.Throttle position sensor lead wire open cir- Open circuit item: Output voltage
position sensor.
5.Defective throttle position sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6 - 21
Code No. 16 Symptom 1 Stuck throttle position sensor detected.
2 Intake air pressure sensor - pipe system malfunction (clogged or
detached hose).
Used diagnostic code No. 01 (throttle position sensor)
No. 03 (intake air pressure sensor 1)
No. 04 (intake air pressure sensor 2)
method
1.Common to 1 and 2: If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it Reinstated by
Connected state of connector securely. starting the engine,
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may Throttle position sensor coupler operating it at idle,
have pulled out. Main wiring harness ECU coupler and then racing it.
Check the locking condition of the coupler. Sub-wire harness coupler
2.Installed state of throttle position sensor. Check the installed area for looseness or
pinching.
Check that it is installed in the specified
position.
chapter 7.
3.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Yellow - Yellow
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Yellow - Yellow
Blue - Blue
4.Throttle position sensor lead wire open cir- Open circuit item: Output voltage
position sensor.
5.Defective throttle position sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6.Intake air pressure sensor hose detached, Repair or replace the sensor hose.
clogged, kinked, or pinched. Inspect and repair the connection.
Intake air pressure sensor malfunction at Replace it if there is a malfunction.
intermediate electrical potential.
Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction at
intermediate electrical potential. See page 6-25.
6 - 22
Code No. 19 Symptom Open circuit is detected in the input line from the sidestand switch to the
ECU.
Used diagnostic code No. 20 (sidestand switch)
method
1.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short If the transmission
sub lead. circuit. is in gear, it is rein-
(Between ECU and sidestand) stated by retracting
2.Connected state of connector If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it the sidestand.
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may securely. If the transmission
have pulled out. Main wiring harness ECU coupler is in neutral, it is
Check the locking condition of the coupler. (No. 43 pin, black) reinstated by
(Alarm coupler) reconnecting the
ECU coupler illustration wiring.
(Indicate No. 43 pin)
3.Defective sidestand switch Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
Code No. 22 Symptom Open or short circuit detected from the intake temperature sensor.
Used diagnostic code No. 05 (intake temperature sensor)
method
1.Installed state of sensor Check the installed area for looseness or Reinstated by turn-
2.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short ON.
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Brown/White - Brown/White
have pulled out. Intake temperature sensor coupler
4.Defective intake temperature sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6 - 23
Code No. 23 Symptom Open or short circuit detected from the atmospheric pressure sensor.
Used diagnostic code No. 02 (atmospheric pressure sensor)
method
1.Installed state of atmospheric pressure sen- Check the installed area for looseness or Reinstated by turn-
sor pinching. ing the main switch
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Blue - Blue
Pink - Pink
have pulled out. Atmospheric pressure sensor coupler
4.Defective atmospheric pressure sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
Code No. 25 Symptom Intake air pressure sensor 2 - open or short circuit detected.
method
1.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short Reinstated by turn-
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Blue - Blue
have pulled out. Intake air pressure sensor coupler
3.Defective intake air pressure sensor Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6 - 24
Code No. 26 Symptom 1 Intake air pressure sensor 2 - pipe system malfunction (clogged or
detached hose).
2 Intake air pressure sensor 2 - open or short circuit detected.
3 Stuck throttle position sensor detected.
No. 01 (throttle position sensor)
method
1.Common to 1, 2, and 3: If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it Reinstated by
Connected state of connector securely. starting the engine
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may Intake air pressure sensor coupler and operating it at
have pulled out. Main wiring harness ECU coupler idle.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
2-1.Intake air pressure sensor hose detached, Repair or replace the sensor hose. Reinstated by
clogged, kinked, or pinched. Inspect and repair the connection. starting the engine
Intake air pressure sensor malfunction at Replace it if there is a malfunction. and operating it at
intermediate electrical potential. idle.
Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction
at intermediate electrical potential. See page 6-25
2-2.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Blue - Blue
2-3.Defective intake air pressure sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
3-1.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short Reinstated by
sub lead. circuit. starting the engine,
Main wiring harness operating it at idle,
Black/Blue - Black/Blue and then by racing
Yellow - Yellow it.
Blue - Blue
Sub lead
Yellow - Yellow
Blue - Blue
3-2.Throttle position sensor lead wire open cir- Open circuit item: Output voltage
position sensor.
3-3.Defective throttle position sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6 - 25
Code No. 27 Symptom Open or short circuit is detected from the oil temperature sensor.
Used diagnostic code No. 10 (oil temperature sensor)
method
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
White - White
have pulled out. Oil temperature sensor coupler
4.Defective oil temperature sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
Code No. 28 Symptom Open or short circuit is detected from the engine temperature sensor.
Used diagnostic code No. 11 (engine temperature sensor)
method
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Black - Black
Brown - Brown
have pulled out. Engine temperature sensor coupler
4.Defective engine temperature sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
6 - 26
Code No. 29 Symptom Electricity is not circulated to the decompression solenoid (open or short
circuit in thermistor is detected)
Used diagnostic code No. 55 (decompression solenoid)
method
1.Installed state of decompression solenoid Check the installed area for looseness or Reinstated by turn-
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Thermistor side
Black/Red - Black/Red
Green/Blue - Green/Blue
Solenoid side
Gray/Red - Gray/Red
Light green - Light green
have pulled out. Decompression solenoid coupler
4.Malfunction in decompression solenoid Replace if defective.
Check the operating sound or that the warn- Refer to “ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM” in
ing light is on 5 times with engine stop chapter 7.
switch ON and start switch ON. Check the resistance value
Malfunction in thermistor Refer to “ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM” in
chapter 7.
Code No. 30 Symptom The motorcycle has overturned.

Used diagnostic code No. 08 (lean angle cut-off switch)
method
1.The motorcycle has overturned. Raise the motorcycle upright. Reinstated by turn-
2.Installed state of the lean angle cut-off Check the installed area for looseness or ing the main switch
switch pinching. ON (however, the
engine cannot be
3.Connected state of connector If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it restarted unless
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may securely. the main switch is
have pulled out. Lean angle cut-off switch coupler first turned OFF).
4.Defective lean angle cut-off switch Replace if defective.
6 - 27
Code No. 37 Symptom Faulty liner control valve or motor is detected.
Used diagnostic code No. 54 (linear control valve)
No. 10 (oil temperature sensor)
method
1-1.Defective linear control valve Replace if defective. Perform diagnos-
Check the operating sound or that the Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in tic code 54 to
warning light is on 3 times with engine chapter 7. check the opera-
stop switch ON. tion of the linear
1-2.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short control valve.
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Red/Black - Red/Black
Brown/Blue - Brown/Blue
White/Green - White/Green
Pink/Blue - Pink/Blue
Red/Green - Red/Green
1-3.Connected state of connector If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it
have pulled out. Main wiring harness linear control valve cou-
Check the locking condition of the coupler. pler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
1-4.Installed state of linear control valve Check the installed area for looseness or
pinching.
2-1.Open or short circuit in wiring harness or Repair or replace if there is an open or short Reinstated by turn-
White - White
have pulled out. Main wiring harness oil temperature sensor
Check the locking condition of the coupler. coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
2-3.Defective oil temperature sensor. Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
Code No. 38 Symptom Open or short circuit is detected from the decompression solenoid.
Used diagnostic code No. 55 (decompression solenoid)
method
sub lead. circuit.
Main wiring harness
Gray/Red - Gray/Red
Light green - Light green
have pulled out. Decompression solenoid coupler
4.Defective decompression solenoid. Replace if defective.
Refer to “ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM” in
chapter 7.
6 - 28
Code No. 41 Symptom Open or short circuit detected in the lean angle cut-off switch.
Used diagnostic code No. 08 (lean angle cut-off switch)
method
1.Open or short circuit in lead wire. Repair or replace if there is an open or short Reinstated by turn-
circuit. ing the main switch
Yellow/Green - Yellow/Green
Red/White - Red/White
have pulled out. Lean angle cut-off switch coupler
3.Defective lean angle cut-off switch Replace if defective.
Code No. 42 Symptom 1 No normal signals are received from the speed sensor.
2 Open or short circuit is detected in the neutral switch.
Used diagnostic code No. 07 (speed sensor)
No. 21 (neutral switch)
method
1-1.Connected state of connector If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it Reinstated by
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may securely. starting the engine,
have pulled out. Speed sensor coupler and inputting the
Check the locking condition of the coupler. Main wiring harness ECU coupler vehicle speed sig-
1-2.Open or short circuit in lead wire. Repair or replace if there is an open or short nals by operating
circuit. the motorcycle at a
Main wiring harness low speed of 20 to
Blue - Blue 30 km/h.
White/Yellow - White/Yellow
Gear for detecting vehicle speed has bro- Replace if defective.
ken. Refer to “TRANSMISSION” in chapter 5.
1-3.Defective speed sensor Replace if defective.
chapter 7.
2-1.Open or short circuit in lead wire Repair or replace if there is an open or short
circuit.
Main wiring harness
Sky blue/Sky blue
have pulled out. Neutral switch coupler
2-3.Faulty shift drum Replace if defective.
(neutral detection area) Refer to “TRANSMISSION” in chapter 5.
2-4.Defective neutral switch Replace if defective.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES” in
chapter 7.
6 - 29
Code No. 43 Symptom The ECU is unable to monitor the battery voltage.
Used diagnostic code No. 50 (fuel injection system relay)
method
1.Malfunction in ECU Fuel injection system relay is on. Reinstated by
2.Open or short circuit in the wiring harness. Repair or replace if there is an open or short starting the engine
circuit. and operating it at
Main wiring harness idle.
Red - Red
Red/Black - Red/Black
Red/Blue - Red/Blue
Blue/Yellow - Blue/Yellow
3.Malfunction or open circuit in fuel injection Replace if defective.
system relay Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in
chapter 7.
If there is no malfunction with the fuel injection
system relay, replace the ECU.
have pulled out. Fuel injection system relay coupler
Check the locking condition of the coupler. ECU coupler
Code No. 50 Symptom Faulty ECU memory. (When this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the
fault code number might not appear on the meter.)
method
1.Malfunction in ECU Replace the ECU. Reinstated by turn-
ing the main switch
ON.
6 - 30
Diagnosis mode troubleshooting 2 (self-diagnostic malfunction not detected)
Troubleshooting the sensors and actuator with no malfunctions detected, and special indications
Even if the malfunctions of some of the sensors do not appear on the meter because they are not
detected by the self-diagnostic function, they can be inspected in the diagnosis mode.
Basic procedure
Check the condition and the symptom of the malfunction of the motorcycle.
Check the errors displayed on the meter.
Estimate the area of the malfunction by referring to the troubleshooting details.

Refer to “Troubleshooting details”.
If there is a diagnostic code number for the inspection method for the probable location of the mal-
function, check the operating condition of the affected sensor or actuator in the diagnosis mode.
Using the results of the diagnosis mode inspection as reference, estimate the cause of the mal-
function and carry out the inspection and repair of the affected area.
Troubleshooting details
Symptom The engine trouble warning light does not illuminate when the start switch is pressed.
Probable mal- • Open or short circuit in start switch
function area • Open or short circuit in wiring harness
• Open circuit in warning light bulb
Inspection method 1 Inspection method 2
Inspection by diagnosis mode Inspection of a malfunction that cannot be identified in the
diagnosis mode, and in case the area of the malfunction has
been narrowed down in the inspection method 1 indicated on
the left.
• Open or short circuit in start switch
Inspect the handlebar switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES” in chapter 7.
Defective: replace
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness

Inspect the wiring harness and couplers for continuity.
Defective: repair or replace
• Open circuit in warning light bulb

Inspect the bulb for continuity.
Defective: replace
6 - 31
Symptom Engine cannot be started or difficult to start.
(Fuel is not supplied to the cylinder.)
Probable mal- • Open or short circuit in injector
diagnosis mode, and in case the are of the malfunction has
been narrowed down in the inspection method 1 given on the
left.
• Execute diagnostic code No. 36 and No. 37 • Open or short circuit in injector
Check the operating sound or that the warning Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in chapter 7.
light is on 5 times with engine stop switch ON.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness
Cylinder #1 - injector
Gray - Gray
White - White
Cylinder #2 - injector
Green - Green
White - White
Symptom The ignition system fails to operate (no spark or intermittent spark)
Probable mal- • Open or short circuit in ignition coil
Inspection by diagnosis mode Open or short circuit in injector
Open or short circuit in wiring harness
• Execute diagnostic code No. 30 and No. 31 • Open or short circuit in ignition coil
Check the operating sound or that the warning Refer to “IGNITION SYSTEM” in chapter 7.
light is on 5 times with engine stop switch ON.
* Use a dynamic spark tester (YM-34487) • Open or short in wire harness of primary coil end
#1
Black/Orange - Black/Orange
#2
Black/White - Black/White
6 - 32
Symptom The headlight does not turn ON or OFF.
Probable mal- • Malfunction in the headlight relay
function area • Malfunction in the headlight
• Open or short circuit in the headlight wiring harness
• Malfunction in the handlebar switch
• Open circuit in the headlight bulb
been narrowed down in the inspection method 1.
• Execute diagnostic code No. 52 (check the • Relay does not operate (as checked by sound or tester).
operation of the headlight relay). Check the headlight relay.
(Check the operation of the headlight.) Refer to “LIGHTING SYSTEM” in chapter 7.
* Classify the malfunctions: Defective: replace
Malfunction related to the relay
Malfunction related to the wiring harness Inspect the wiring harness and the couplers for continuity.
Malfunction in the headlight itself Defective: repair or replace
Replace
• The relay operates but the headlight does not illuminate.

Inspect the headlight bulb.
Blown bulb: replace
Check the headlight relay contact point for continuity.

Refer to “LIGHTING SYSTEM” in chapter 7.
Defective: replace
Check the handlebar switch.

Inspect the wiring harness and the couplers for continuity.

Symptom Clock LCD displays “Er-1”. (No signals are received from the ECU.)
Probable mal- • Open or short circuit in communication line
function area • Malfunction in meter
• Malfunction in ECU
left.
• Inspect ECU coupler
• Inspect meter coupler

6 - 33
Symptom Clock LCD displays “Er-2”. (No signals are received from the ECU within the specified duration.)
Probable mal- • Improper operation of communication line
left.

Symptom Clock LCD displays “Er-3”. (Data from the ECU cannot be received correctly.)
left.

Symptom Clock LCD displays “Er-4”. (Non-registered data has been received from the meter.)
left.

6 - 34
Symptom Sidestand switch does not function (the engine does not stop when the stand is extended).
Probable mal- • Short circuit in the input line to ECU
function area • Malfunction in the starter circuit cut-off relay
left.
• Execute diagnostic code 21 • Meter does not display ON/OFF.
Enable the meter to display the ON/OFF status Inspect the wiring harness and couplers for continuity.
of the sidestand switch (in gear and sidestand is Defective: repair or replace
up, ON is displayed; in gear and sidestand is
down, OFF is displayed). Inspect the sidestand switch.
* To distinguish whether the problem is in the Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES” in chapter 7.
switch or in other areas. Defective: replace
Inspect the neutral switch.

• Execute diagnostic code 20 Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES” in chapter 7.
Enable the meter to display the ON/OFF status Defective: replace
of the neutral switch (in neutral, ON is dis-
played; in gear, OFF is displayed).
* To distinguish whether the problem is in the
switch or in other areas.
6 - 35
Symptom Engine trouble warning light blinks while the start switch is being pressed (to warn that the engine
is unable to start).
Probable mal- • Malfunction in Fuel injection system relay
function area • Open circuit in wiring harness
• Disconnected battery
• Defective crankshaft position sensor (See page 5-59.)
• Defective sidestand switch (See page 6-24.)
• Tripped lean angle cut-off switch (See page 6-28, 6-30.)
• ECU memory check error
been narrowed down in the inspection method 1.
• Execute diagnostic code 50 • Relay unit does not trip.
To trip the relay unit. Inspect the coil side of the relay unit.
Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in chapter 7.
Defective: replace

• Execute diagnostic code 09 • Normal voltage is not displayed.

To check the monitor voltage. Inspect the contact side of the fuel relay unit.
* To distinguish whether the problem is in the Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in chapter 7.
relay or in other areas. Defective: replace

• If a self-diagnostic code is displayed:

Inspect the battery.
Defective: replace or recharge
Inspect and repair the applicable area of the malfunction.
6 - 36
THROTTLE BODIES
6 9
5
6
4
1 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the throttle bodies Remove the parts in the order listed.
Seat Refer to “SEAT AND SIDE COVERS” in
chapter 3.
Fuel tank/Air induction system cover/ Refer to “FUEL TANK” in chapter 3.
air duct
Air filter case Refer to “AIR FILTER CASE” in chapter
3.
Silencer air filter case Refer to “SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE”
in chapter 3.
1 Throttle position sensor coupler 1 Disconnect.
2 A.I.S. vacuum hose 1 Disconnect.
3 Intake vacuum hose 4 Disconnect.
4 Intake vacuum hose bracket 1
6 - 37
6 9
5
6
4
1 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

5 Throttle stop screw 1
6 Throttle body joint screw 2
7 Throttle bodies 1
8 Throttle cable 2 Disconnect.
9 Throttle position sensor 1 Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in
chapter 7.
procedure.
6 - 38
1
5
(2)
3
3 6 New
New 6
2
(2)
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the intake manifolds Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Engine temperature sensor coupler 1 Disconnect.
2 Injection sub-wire harness coupler 1 Disconnect.
3 Fuel hose 2 Disconnect.
4 Linear control valve outlet hose 2 Disconnect.
5 Intake manifolds 1
6 Gasket 2
procedure.
6 - 39
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
New
New
4
5
7 New
New
1
2 7
3
6

Removing the injectors Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Cylinder #1-injector coupler 1 Disconnect.
2 Cylinder #2-injector coupler 1 Disconnect.
3 Injector sub-wire harness 1
4 Fuel pipe 1
5 Injector joint 1 1
6 Injector joint 2 1
7 Injector 2
procedure.
6 - 40
CAUTION:
The throttle bodies should not be disas-
sembled unnecessarily.
CHECKING THE INJECTOR

1. Check:
• injector
Damage → Replace.
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY

1. Check:
• throttle body
Cracks/damage → Replace the throttle
bodies.
2. Check:
• fuel passages
Obstruction → Clean.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Wash the throttle body in a petroleum-
based solvent.
Do not use any caustic carburetor cleaning
solution.
b. Blow out all of passages with compressed
air.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6 - 41
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP AND
PRESSURE REGULATOR OPERATION
1. Check:
• pressure regulator operation
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the air duct.
Refer to “FUEL TANK” in chapter 3.
b. Remove the fuel hose end clamp 1.
c. Disconnect the fuel hose 2 from the fuel
injection pipe 3.
d. Connect the mity vac 4 onto the pipe 5
5 onto the pressure regulator.
e. Connect the fuel pressure adapter 6 to the
pressure gauge 7.
3 f. Connect the fuel pressure adapter between
the fuel hose 2 and fuel injection pipe 3.
2 Mity vac
YB-35956
Pressure gauge
YU-03153
Fuel pressure adapter
YM-03176
g. Start the engine.

h. Measure the fuel pressure.
Fuel pressure
328 kPa (3.28 kg/cm2, 3.28 psi)
i. Use the vacuum pressure pump gauge set

to adjust the fuel pressure in relation to the
vacuum pressure as described below.
NOTE:
The vacuum pressure should not exceed
100 kPa (1 mmHg).
Increase the vacuum pressure →

Fuel pressure is decreased
Decrease the vacuum pressure →
Fuel pressure is increased
Faulty → Replace the pressure regulator.

▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6 - 42
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM FI
EAS00507
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM

AIR INJECTION
The air induction system burns unburned
exhaust gases by injecting fresh air (second-
ary air) into the exhaust port, reducing the
emission of hydrocarbons.
When there is negative pressure at the
exhaust port, the reed valve opens, allowing
secondary air to flow into the exhaust port. The
required temperature for burning the unburned
exhaust gases is approximately 600 to 700 °C
(1,112 to 1,292 °F).
EAS00508
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE
The air cut-off valve is operated by the intake
È gas pressure through the piston valve dia-
phragm. Normally, the air cut-off valve is open
to allow fresh air to flow into the exhaust port.
During sudden deceleration (the throttle valve
suddenly closes), negative pressure is gener-
ated and the air cut-off valve is closed in order
to prevent after-burning.
Additionally, at high engine speeds and when
the pressure decreases, the air cut-off valve
automatically closes to guard against a loss of
performance due to self-EGR.
1 During normal operation, the air cut-off valve is
open.
2 During sudden deceleration (the throttle valve
É É suddenly closes), the air cut-off valve closes.
3 At high engine speeds and when the pressure
decreases, the air cut-off valve is closed.
È From the air cleaner
É From the reed valve
6 - 43
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM HOSES
24 Nm (2.4 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib) 10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
2
3 2
7
6

Removing the air cut-off valve Remove the parts in the order listed.
assembly and hoses
Fuel hose joint 1/air duct Refer to “FUEL TANK” in chapter 3.
1 Fuel hose joint 1 Disconnect.
2 Fuel hose 2
3 A.I.S. vacuum hose 1
4 Resonator hose 1
5 Reed valve case to front cylinder head 1
hose
6 Reed valve case to rear cylinder head 1
hose
7 Air cut-off valve assembly 1
procedure.
6 - 44
REED VALVES
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
2 5

Removing the reed valves Remove the parts in the order listed.
Air cut-off valve assembly/hoses
1 A.I.S. vacuum hose 1
2 Reed valve cover 1
3 Reed valve assembly 1
4 Reed valve case 1
5 Pressure regulator 1
6 A.I.S. bracket 1
procedure.
6 - 45
CHECKING THE PRESSURE REGULATOR
1. Check:
• pressure regulator
Damage → Replace.
EAS00510
CHECKING THE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
1. Check:
• hoses
• pipes
2. Check:
• fiber reed
• fiber reed stopper
• reed valve seat
Cracks/damage → Replace the reed valve.
3. Check:
• air cut-off valve
6 - 46
– +
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ELEC
EAS00729
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1 Ignition coil 2 7 Clutch switch C Decompression solenoid
2 Ignition coil 1 8 Atmospheric pressure sensor D Sidestand switch
3 Intake air pressure sensor 2 9 ECU E Crankshaft position sensor
4 Front brake light switch 0 Battery F Starter motor
5 Main switch
6 Intake air pressure sensor 1
A Fuel pump
B Horn 2
G Horn 1
H Rectifier/regulator 1
4 5
6
7 2
1
8
3
2 3
4
9
0
5
H
6
A
7
G
B
F
E C
D
7-1
– +
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ELEC
1 Intake air temperature sensor A Relay unit
2 Linear control valve B Speed sensor
3 Throttle position sensor C Lean angle cut-off switch
4 Engine temperature sensor D Oil temperature sensor
5 Spark plugs E Neutral switch
6 Fuse box F Stator coil assembly
7 Main fuse G Rear brake light switch
8 Starter relay H Cylinder identification sensor
9 Turn signal relay
0 Headlight relay
3 4
2 5 6
1 7
5 9
H 0
A
G
B
E C
D
7-2
ARRANGEMENT OF THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS – +
AND COUPLERS ELEC
ARRANGEMENT OF THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND COUPLERS
1 Speedometer coupler, tachometer couplers, right handlebar switch coupler and front turn signal/position
connectors
2 Speedometer coupler, main switch coupler and left handlebar switch couplers
3 Headlight coupler
1 Rear turn signal light (left) connectors and license plate light connectors
2 Rear turn signal light (right) connectors
3 Tail/brake light coupler
1 3
2
7-3
AND COUPLERS ELEC
1 Linear control valve 9 Starter motor
2 Ignition coil 1 (rear cylinder) 0 Starter motor lead
3 Atmospheric pressure sensor A Rectifier/regulator coupler
4 Atmospheric pressure sensor coupler B Stator coil assembly coupler
5 Spark plug cap (ignition coil 2 - L spark plug lead) C Horn 1 connectors
6 Spark plug cap (ignition coil 1 - L spark plug lead) D Horn 1
7 Crankshaft position sensor E Rectifier/regulator
8 Sidestand switch F Linear control valve coupler
1 2 3 4 5 6
E
D
7
CB
A
0 9 8
7-4
AND COUPLERS ELEC
1 ECU coupler
2 ECU
3 Tail sub-wire harness coupler, decompression solenoid couplers, cylinder identification coupler, crankshaft
position sensor coupler, speed sensor coupler, neutral switch connector and sidestand switch coupler
4 Fuel pump coupler
5 Horn 2
6 Horn 2 coupler
7 Lean angle cut-off switch coupler
8 Lean angle cut-off switch
7-5
AND COUPLERS ELEC
1 ECU fuse 8 Battery positive lead
2 Fuse box 9 Headlight relay
3 Starter relay coupler 0 Battery negative lead
4 Main fuse A Horn 2
5 Starter relay B Startr motor lead
6 Turn signal relay C Relay unit
7 Battery
4 2
1 2 3
4 6
5 C
A
0
A
9 6
8
7
A
B
7-6
AND COUPLERS ELEC
1 Spark plug cap (ignition coil 1 - R spark plug lead) 0 Rear brake light switch
2 Throttle position sensor A Stator coil
3 Intake air pressure sensor 1 coupler B Cylinder identification sensor
4 Engine temperature sensor coupler C Decompression solenoid
5 Intake air temperature sensor coupler D Neutral switch
6 Intake air pressure sensor 2 coupler E Oil temperature sensor coupler
7 Main switch F Speed sensor
8 Ignition coil 2 (front cylinder) G Ignition sub-wire harness coupler
9 Spark plug cap (ignition coil 2 - R spark plug lead)
3 4 5 6
7
2
1
F
8
E
9
D
C 0
B A
7-7
– +
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY ELEC
EAS00730
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY

Check each switch for continuity with the
pocket tester. If the continuity reading is incor-
rect, check the wiring connections and if nec-
essary, replace the switch.
CAUTION:
_
Never insert the tester probes into the cou-

pler terminal slots 1. Always insert the
probes from the opposite end of the cou-
pler, taking care not to loosen or damage
the leads.
Pocket tester
YU-03112
NOTE:
_
• Before checking for continuity, set the pocket

tester to “0” and to the “Ω × 1” range.
• When checking for continuity, switch back
b and forth between the switch positions a few
times.
R Br/L L/Y L/B
ON
a OFF The terminal connections for switches (e.g.,
main switch, engine stop switch) are shown in
an illustration similar to the one on the left.
R Br/L
The switch positions a are shown in the far
L/Y L/B
left column and the switch lead colors b are
shown in the top row in the switch illustration.
NOTE:
_
“ ” indicates a continuity of electricity

between switch terminals (i.e., a closed circuit
at the respective switch position).
The example illustration on the left shows

that:
There is continuity between red and brown/
blue and between blue/yellow and blue/black
when the switch is set to “ON”.
7-8
– +
CHECKING THE SWITCHES ELEC
EAS00731
CHECKING THE SWITCHES

Check each switch for damage or wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the ter-
minals. Refer to “CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY”.
Damage/wear → Repair or replace the switch.
Improperly connected → Properly connect.
Incorrect continuity reading → Replace the switch.
8 9
1 Y R/Y G
Y G L/Y
Dg Ch B/Y
R Br/L L/Y L/B
(BLUE) R Br/L
ON
OFF L/Y L/B
2 P B
Rr/W P B
R/Y Y/R
3 Ch Br/W Dg B Y/R
(L)
N
(R)
4
B/Y L/Y
(BLACK)
5 R/W R/B 7
6 L/W B
G/Y
Br
G/Y R/B R/W

L/W B Br
(BLACK)
0 A B
Sb
B B B B
(BLUE) (BLUE)
7 - 10
– +
CHECKING THE SWITCHES ELEC
1 Dimmer switch
2 Horn switch
3 Turn signal switch
4 Clutch switch
5 Engine stop switch
6 Start switch
7 Front brake light switch
8 Main switch
9 Fuse
0 Rear brake light switch
A Neutral switch
B Sidestand switch
7 - 11
– +
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS ELEC
EAS00732
CHECKING THE BULBS AND

BULB SOCKETS
Check each bulb and bulb socket for damage
or wear, proper connections, and also for con-
tinuity between the terminals.
Damage/wear → Repair or replace the
bulb, bulb socket or both.
Improperly connected → Properly connect.
No continuity → Repair or replace the bulb,
bulb socket or both.
TYPES OF BULBS
The bulbs used on this motorcycle are shown
in the illustration on the left.
• Bulbs A and B are used for the headlights
and usually use a bulb holder that must be
detached before removing the bulb. The
majority of these types of bulbs can be
removed from their respective socket by
turning them counterclockwise.
• Bulbs C is used for turn signal and tail/
brake lights and can be removed from the
socket by pushing and turning the bulb
counterclockwise.
• Bulbs D and E are used for meter and indi-
cator lights and can be removed from their
respective socket by carefully pulling them
out.
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE

BULBS
bulbs.
1. Remove:
• bulb
7 - 12
– +
WARNING
_
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely

hot, keep flammable products and your
hands away from the bulb until it has
cooled down.
CAUTION:
_
• Be sure to hold the socket firmly when

removing the bulb. Never pull the lead,
otherwise it may be pulled out of the ter-
minal in the coupler.
• Avoid touching the glass part of the head-
light bulb to keep it free from oil, other-
wise the transparency of the glass, the
life of the bulb, and the luminous flux will
be adversely affected. If the headlight
bulb gets soiled, thoroughly clean it with
a cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquer
thinner.
2. Check:
• bulb (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity → Replace.
Pocket tester
YU-03112
NOTE:
_
Before checking for continuity, set the pocket

tester to “0” and to the “Ω × 1” range.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the positive tester probe to termi-
nal 1 and the negative tester probe to ter-
minal 2, and check the continuity.
b. Connect the positive tester probe to termi-
nal 1 and the negative tester probe to ter-
minal 3, and check the continuity.
c. If either of the readings indicate no continu-
ity, replace the bulb.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7 - 13
– +
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB
SOCKETS
bulb sockets.
1. Check:
• bulb socket (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity → Replace.
Pocket tester
YU-03112
NOTE:
_
Check each bulb socket for continuity in the

same manner as described in the bulb section;
however, note the following.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Install a good bulb into the bulb socket.
b. Connect the pocket tester probes to the
respective leads of the bulb socket.
c. Check the bulb socket for continuity. If any
of the readings indicate no continuity,
replace the bulb socket.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7 - 14
– +
CHECKING THE LEDs
The following procedures applies to all of the
1 LEDs.
Dg Lg B
1. Check:
Ch Y Br • LED (for proper operation)
Improper operation → Replace.
Ch Y Br 1 ▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Dg Lg B a. Disconnect the speedometer assembly cou-
pler (speedometer assembly side).
b. Connect two jumper leads 1 from the bat-
tery terminals to the respective coupler ter-
minal as shown.
WARNING
_
• A wire that is used as a jumper lead must

have at least the same capacity of the bat-
tery lead, otherwise the jumper lead may
burn.
• This check is likely to produce sparks,
therefore, make sure no flammable gas or
fluid is in the vicinity.
c. When the jumper leads are connected to

the terminals the respective LED should illu-
minate.
Does not light → Replace the speedometer
assembly.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7 - 15
EAS00735
9 L B/R Lg Br/B
A B
Br/B L B/R L/W1 R/L

Y L B B L Y W W W W
(BLACK) (BLACK)
Sb
R/L G L/G
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
B
B
D B B
(BLUE)
B
B B
G B C
R/L B B
B L/G
IGNITION SYSTEM
W W 5 (BLUE)
1 W W 2 R R R/G
W W
WWW (BLACK)
Gy B/R
R
B/L B/O
R/W L L W/Y W L
B/L B W/Y
Gy B/O S
R/B R/W B/W
B/L L/B
R
B B/L
6 L Y B F Y Y
R L L B/R
R
ON R Q
4 7 L/W Br/L Br/L
B R/W L
B R/B S
P/W B/L L B/L R/B
L/Y W/G R/B R/G
Br/L R P/W P/W
L/Y B
G P
B B 8 P Y/R
L M
P/Y Br
Y/L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
L R/B
P B/L L B/L
N T
å P
B Br
Br/B (BLACK) Gy/R
R I R/L
L/R
Br B B/G Lg Lg B B Gy/R Lg
~ L W/B W L O Gy
W/B (BLACK)
Y/B U
W B
L W Gy
(BLACK)
K Y/G
B/L B/R
7 - 16
B3 V
G B G G W W B W
W G
}
R Gy/R (GRAY)
|
Br/L Br
Br W
{ W
Z
Br P Br
z B [
Gy Gy
Br/L R/Y Br/W Y/R Br/W Br
B G
R/Y R/Y W Y/R B \ 3 Main switch
Br Lg Y/L B
R/G
R/Y
X
Br
L
s Br 4 Battery
R/Y Y/B
R/W B/R Y Y/B

G/Y R/B R/W L/Y ^
Br B/G L/W1 i B/Y G/L P Br/W Y/R G/R Y
G/R
L/W B Br 6 Main fuse
L/R L/R
(L) O 9 Relay unit O
B/Y L/Y (R) b
j (BLACK) Dg
(BLACK)
y R/Y Y/R Y/R G/L R P
C Neutral switch P R
c O Br/Y Br/Y O
Y (RED) (RED)
IGNITION SYSTEM
Y G B Ch Dg
Br Y Y B/G R P
Y
d O Br/Y
D Sidestand switch
L/R Gy
(BLACK) Gy L/R
Y (BLUE) (BLUE)
L A L
Ch
Br Y Ch L/R Gy
L Y Dg B Lg Dg B/L G/R
L
A A (BLUE)
(GREEN)
w L Y Y L Ch Dg K Lean angle cut-off switch
B B Ch B
L L Ch Ch Y Br
Dg Dg
Y G Dg Lg B
(GREEN)
x G B
P ECU
r Y B
q
p o n R Ignition coil
B
B B
B
ELEC
B A B B S Spark plug
B A B B B
B
–
{ Ignition fuse
+
– +
IGNITION SYSTEM ELEC
EAS00737 EAS00738
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Main and ignition fuses
The ignition system fails to operate (no • Check the main and ignition fuses for con-
spark or intermittent spark). tinuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in
Check:
chapter 3.
1. main and ignition fuses
• Are the main and ignition fuses OK?
2. battery
3. spark plugs YES NO
4. ignition spark gap
5. spark plug cap resistance
6. ignition coil resistance Replace the fuse(s).
7. crankshaft position sensor resistance EAS00739
8. main switch 2. Battery

9. engine stop switch
10.neutral switch • Check the condition of the battery.
11.sidestand switch Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
12.lean angle cut-off switch voltage THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
13.relay unit (diode) Minimum open-circuit voltage
14.wiring connections 12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
(of the entire ignition system)
• Is the battery OK?
NOTE:
_
• Before troubleshooting, remove the following YES NO

part(s):
1. seat
2. fuel tank • Clean the battery
3. silencer air filter case terminals.
4. side covers • Recharge or
5. ignition coils replace the battery.
6. headlight lens unit EAS00741
7. horn 2 3. Spark plugs

• Troubleshoot with the following special
tool(s).
spark plugs.
• Check the condition of the spark plug.
Dynamic spark tester • Check the spark plug type.
YM-34487 • Measure the spark plug gap.
Pocket tester Refer to “CHECKING THE SPARK
YU-03112
PLUGS” in chapter 3.
Standard spark plug
DPR7EA-9 (NGK)
X22EPR-U9 (DENSO)
Spark plug gap
0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0354 in)
7 - 17
– +
EAS00745
• Is the spark plug in good condition, is it of
the correct type, and is its gap within spec- 5. Spark plug cap resistance
ification? The following procedure applies to all of the
spark plug caps.
YES NO
• Remove the spark plug cap from the spark
plug lead.
Re-gap or replace • Connect the pocket tester (”Ω × 1k”) to the
the spark plug. spark plug cap as shown.
EAS00743
• Measure the spark plug cap resistance.
4. Ignition spark gap

spark plugs.
• Disconnect the spark plug cap from the
spark plug.
• Connect the ignition checker 1 as shown.
2 Spark plug cap
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the ignition spark gap a. Spark plug cap resistance
• Crank the engine by pushing the starter 10 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
switch and gradually increase the spark
• Is the spark plug cap OK?
gap until a misfire occurs.
YES NO
Replace the spark

plug cap.
Minimum ignition spark gap

6 mm (0.24 in)
• Is there a spark and is the spark gap within

specification?
YES NO
The ignition system

is OK.
7 - 18
– +
EAS00747
• Is the ignition coil OK?
6. Ignition coil resistance
YES NO
ignition coils.
• Disconnect the ignition coil leads from the Replace the ignition
wire harness. coil.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the EAS00748
ignition coil as shown.
7. Crankshaft position sensor resistance
Positive tester probe → black/red
• Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor
coupler from the wire harness.
black/orange (black/white)
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 100) to the
crankshaft position sensor coupler as
shown.
Positive tester probe → gray 1
Negative tester probe → black 2
• Measure the primary coil resistance.

Primary coil resistance
1.31 ~ 1.79 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the

ignition coil as shown. • Measure the crankshaft position sensor
Negative tester probe → spark plug lead 1 resistance.
Positive tester probe → spark plug lead 2 Crankshaft position sensor
resistance
248.0 ~ 372.0 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
(between gray and black)
• Is the crankshaft position sensor OK?
YES NO
Replace the crank-

shaft position sensor.
• Measure the secondary coil resistance.
Secondary coil resistance
12 ~ 18 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
7 - 19
– +
EAS00749
12.Lean angle cut-off switch voltage
8. Main switch
• Remove the lean angle cut-off switch.
• Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
lean angle cut-off switch terminals as
• Is the main switch OK?
shown.
YES NO Positive tester probe → blue
Negative tester probe → yellow/green
Replace the main
switch.
EAS00750
− +
9. Engine stop switch

• Check the engine stop switch for continu-
ity.
• Is the engine stop switch OK?
Lean angle cut-off switch voltage
YES NO Less than 65° a →
Approximately 1 V
More than 65° b →
Replace the right Approximately 4 V
handlebar switch.
EAS00751 a a
10.Neutral switch ON ON
• Check the neutral switch for continuity.
• Is the neutral switch OK?
YES NO
b
Replace the neutral • Is the lean angle cut-off switch OK?
switch.
YES NO
EAS00752
11.Sidestand switch
Replace the lean
• Check the sidestand switch for continuity. angle cut-off switch.
• Is the sidestand switch OK?
YES NO
Replace the side-

stand switch.
7 - 20
– +
EAS00760 EAS00754
13.Relay unit (diode) 14.Wiring

• Remove the relay unit from the wire har- • Check the entire ignition system’s wiring.
ness. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the • Is the ignition system’s wiring properly
relay unit terminals as shown. connected and without defects?
• Measure the diode for continuity as fol-
lows. YES NO

sky blue 1 Replace the ECU. Properly connect or
Negative tester probe → repair the ignition
blue/yellow 2 system’s wiring.
Continuity
blue/green 3
blue/yellow 2
blue/yellow 2
sky blue 1
No continuity
blue/yellow 2
blue/green 3
321
Br/B L B/R L/W R/L

L/R L/G L/Y Sb B/Y Lg
NOTE:
_
When you switch the tester’s positive and

negative probes, the readings in the above
chart will be reversed.
• Are the testing readings correct?
YES NO
Replace the starting

circuit cut-off relay.
7 - 21
EAS00755
9 L B/R Lg Br/B
A B
Br/B L B/R L/W1 R/L

Y L B B L Y W W W W
(BLACK) (BLACK)
Sb
R/L G L/G
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
B
B
D B B
(BLUE)
B
B B
G B C
R/L B B
B L/G
W W 5 (BLUE)
1 W W 2 R R R/G
W W
WWW (BLACK)
Gy B/R
R
B/L B/O
R/W L L W/Y W L
B/L B W/Y
Gy B/O S
R/B R/W B/W
B/L L/B
R
B B/L
6 L Y B F Y Y
R L L B/R
R
ON R Q
4 7 L/W Br/L Br/L
B R/W L
B R/B S
P/W B/L L B/L R/B
L/Y W/G R/B R/G
Br/L R P/W P/W
L/Y B
G P
B B 8 P Y/R
L M
P/Y Br
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

Y/L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
L R/B
P B/L L B/L
N T
å P
B Br
Br/B (BLACK) Gy/R
R I R/L
L/R
~ L W/B W L O Gy
W/B (BLACK)
Y/B U
W B
L W Gy
(BLACK)
K Y/G
B/L B/R
7 - 22
B3 V
G B G G W W B W
W G
}
3 Main switch R Gy/R (GRAY)
|
Br/L Br
4 Battery Br
{ W
Z
Br P Br
Br/L R/W g f B/W
6 Main fuse (BLACK) P e
z B [
Gy
7 Starter relay B
R/Y R/Y W Y/R B \
Br Lg
R/Y
8 Starter motor R/W B/R L/W1 G/L h ]
s Br
R/Y Y/B
R/W B/R Y G/Y R/B R/W Y/B

L/Y ^
9 Relay unit Br B/G L/W1 L/W B Br i B/Y G/L P Br/W Y/R G/R
(BLACK) L/R
(BLACK) B/L
Y G L/Y L/Y G Y a P
Br u v k l m Dg Ch B/Y B/Y Ch Dg Ch R
0 Starting circuit cut-off relay (L) O
t N (BLUE) (BLUE) Br/Y
B/Y L/Y (R) b
j (BLACK) Dg
C Neutral switch (BLACK)
y R/Y Y/R Y/R G/L
c
Y
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
Y G B Ch Dg
D Sidestand switch Br Y Y B/G R P
Y
d O Br/Y
(BLACK)
A (RED)
P ECU Y
L B
A A (BLUE)
T Decompression solenoid (GREEN)
w L Y Y L Ch Dg
B B Ch B
L L Ch Ch Y Br
Dg Dg
j Clutch switch Y G Dg Lg B
x (GREEN)
G B
r Y B
q
u Engine stop switch p o n
B
B B
B
ELEC
v Start switch B A B B
B A B B B
B
{ Ignition fuse
–
} Decompression solenoid
fuse
+
– +
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
EAS00756
STARTING CIRCUIT CUT-OFF SYSTEM
OPERATION
If the engine stop switch is set to “ ” and the
main switch is set to “ON” (both switches are
closed), the starter motor can only operate if at
least one of the following conditions is met:
• The transmission is in neutral (the neutral
switch is closed).
• The clutch lever is pulled to the handlebar
(the clutch switch is closed) and the side-
stand is up (the sidestand switch is closed).
The starting circuit cut-off relay prevents the
starter motor from operating when neither of
these conditions has been met. In this
instance, the starting circuit cut-off relay is
open so current cannot reach the starter
motor. When at least one of the above condi-
tions has been met the starting circuit cut-off
relay is closed and the engine can be started
by pressing the starter switch.
WHEN THE TRANSMISSION IS IN NEUTRAL
WHEN THE SIDESTAND IS UP AND THE
CLUTCH LEVER IS PULLED TO THE HAN-
DLEBAR
1 Battery
2 Main fuse
3 Main switch
4 Ignition fuse
5 Engine stop switch
6 Starting circuit cut-off relay (relay unit)
7 Diode (relay unit)
8 Clutch switch
9 Diode (relay unit)
0 Sidestand switch
A Neutral switch
B Start switch
C ECU
D Starter relay
E Starter motor
F Decompression solenoid fuse
G Decompression solenoid coil
H Decompression solenoid thermistor
7 - 23
– +
EAS00757 EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
The starter motor fails to turn. • Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
Check:
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
1. main, ignition and decompression solenoid
fuses Minimum open-circuit voltage
2. battery 12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
3. starter motor
4. relay unit (starting circuit cut-off relay)
5. relay unit (diode) YES NO
6. starter relay
7. main switch
8. engine stop switch • Clean the battery
9. neutral switch terminals.
10.sidestand switch • Recharge or
11.clutch switch replace the battery.
12.start switch EAS00758
13.decompression solenoid 3. Starter motor

14.wiring connections
(of the entire starting system) • Connect the positive battery terminal 1
and starter motor lead 2 with a jumper
NOTE:
_
lead 3.
• Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part(s):
1. seat
2. headlight lens unit
tool(s).
Pocket tester
YU-03112
EAS00738
WARNING
_
1. Main, ignition and decompression solenoid • A wire that is used as a jumper lead
fuses must have at least the same capacity or
• Check the main, ignition and decompres- more as that of the battery lead, other-
sion solenoid fuses for continuity. wise the jumper lead may burn.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in • This check is likely to produce sparks,
chapter 3. therefore make sure nothing flammable
• Are the main, ignition and decompression is in the vicinity.
solenoid fuses OK?
• Does the starter motor turn?
YES NO
YES NO
Replace the fuse(s).

Repair or replace the
starter motor.
7 - 24
– +
EAS00759
4. Relay unit (starting circuit cut-off relay) sky blue 1
• Remove the relay unit from the wire har- Negative tester probe →
ness. black/yellow 2
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and bat- Positive tester probe →
tery (12 V) to the relay unit terminals as sky blue 1
shown. Continuity
Positive battery terminal → black/red 1 blue/yellow 3
Negative battery terminal → black/yellow 2 Positive tester probe →
Positive tester probe → blue 3 blue/green 4
Negative tester probe → blue/white 4 Negative tester probe →
blue/yellow 3
3 1 2 4 Positive tester probe →
+ black/yellow 2
sky blue 1
Br/B L B/R L/W R/L

L/R L/G L/Y Sb B/Y Lg blue/yellow 3
No continuity
sky blue 1
• Does the starting circuit cut-off relay have
continuity between blue and blue/white?
blue/yellow 3
YES NO Negative tester probe →
blue/green 4
Replace the relay 43 12

unit.
EAS00760
5. Relay unit (diode)

• Remove the relay unit from the wire har- Br/B L B/R L/W R/L
ness. L/R L/G L/Y Sb B/Y Lg

relay unit terminals as shown.
• Measure the diode for continuity as fol- NOTE:
_
lows. When you switch the tester’s positive and

negative probes, the readings in the above
chart will be reversed.
• Are the testing readings correct?
YES NO
Replace the relay

unit.
7 - 25
– +
EAS00761 EAS00750
6. Starter relay 8. Engine stop switch

• Remove the starter relay. • Check the engine stop switch for continu-
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and bat- ity.
tery (12 V) to the starter relay terminals as Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
shown. • Is the engine stop switch OK?
Positive battery terminal → red/white 1 YES NO
Negative battery terminal → blue 2
Positive tester probe → red 3
Replace the right
handlebar switch.
EAS00751
9. Neutral switch
YES NO
• Does the starter relay have continuity Replace the neutral

between red and black? switch.
YES NO EAS00752
10.Sidestand switch
Replace the starter • Check the sidestand switch for continuity.
relay. Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
EAS00749
• Is the sidestand switch OK?
7. Main switch YES NO

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”. Replace the side-
• Is the main switch OK? stand switch.
YES NO EAS00763
11.Clutch switch
Replace the main • Check the clutch switch for continuity.
switch. Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the clutch switch OK?
YES NO
Replace the clutch

switch.
7 - 26
– +
EAS00764
Decompression solenoid
12.Start switch resistance
• Check the start switch for continuity. 1.2 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”. • Check the decompression solenoid for
• Is the start switch OK? continuity.
NO • Is the decompression solenoid OK?
YES
YES NO
Replace the right
handlebar switch. Replace the decom-
pression solenoid.
13.Decompression solenoid
EAS00766
• Disconnect the decompression solenoid

14.Wiring
couplers from the wire harness.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 10) to the • Check the entire starting system’s wiring.
decompression solenoid coupler as Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
shown. • Is the starting system’s wiring properly
connected and without defects?
Positive tester probe → green 1
Negative tester probe → green 2
YES NO
Replace the ECU. Properly connect or

repair the starting
system’s wiring.
• Measure the decompression solenoid

resistance.
Decompression solenoid
resistance (thermistor)
70 Ω at 25 °C (77 °F)
NOTE:
_
The resistance value for the thermistor

changes when the temperature changes;
therefore, measure the decompression sole-
noid resistance at the specified temperature.

decompression solenoid coupler as
shown.
Positive tester prove → black 3
7 - 27
– +
STARTER MOTOR ELEC
EAS00767
STARTER MOTOR
5 Nm (0.5 m • kg, 3.6 ft • Ib)

T.
R.

Removing the starter motor Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Starter motor lead 1
2 Starter motor assembly 1
procedure.
7 - 28
– +
STARTER MOTOR ELEC
LS
1
2
New
3 7
6
5
48
D New
F
A
0
B
D
C
New
9

Disassembling the starter motor Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Circlip 1
2 Starter motor gear 1
3 Starter motor rear cover 1
4 Lock washer 1
5 Washer set 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE STARTER
6 Oil seal 1 MOTOR”.
7 Bearing 1
8 Circlip 1
9 Starter motor front cover 1
0 Brush 2
7 - 29
– +
STARTER MOTOR ELEC
LS
1
2
New
3 7
6
5
48
D New
F
A
0
B
D
C
New
9

A Brush holder (along with the brushes) 1
B Brush seat (along with the brushes) 1
C Bearing 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE STARTER
D Gasket 2 MOTOR”.
E Armature assembly 1
F Starter motor yoke 1
procedure.
7 - 30
– +
STARTER MOTOR ELEC
EAS00770
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR
1. Check:
• commutator
Dirt → Clean with 600 grit sandpaper.
2. Measure:
• commutator diameter a
Out of specification → Replace the starter
motor.
Commutator wear limit

27.5 mm (1.08 in)
3. Measure:
• mica undercut a
Out of specification → Scrape the mica to
the proper measurement with a hacksaw
blade that has been grounded to fit the
commutator.
Mica undercut
1.5 mm (0.06 in)
NOTE:
_
The mica of the commutator must be undercut

to ensure proper operation of the commutator.
7 - 31
– +
STARTER MOTOR ELEC
4. Measure:
• armature assembly resistances (commuta-
tor and insulation)
Out of specification → Replace the starter
motor.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Measure the armature assembly resis-
tances with the pocket tester.
Pocket tester
YU-03112
Armature coil
Commutator resistance 1
0.0081 ~ 0.0099 Ω at
20 °C (68 °F)
Insulation resistance 2
Above 1 MΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
b. If any resistance is out of specification,

replace the starter motor.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5. Measure:
• brush length a
Out of specification → Replace the brushes
as a set.
Brush length wear limit

5 mm (0.2 in)
6. Measure:
• brush spring force
Out of specification → Replace the brush
springs as a set.
Brush spring force

7.36 ~ 11.04 N (736 ~ 1,104 gf)
7. Check:
• gear teeth
Damage/wear → Replace the gear.
8. Check:
• bearing
• oil seal
part(s).
7 - 32
– +
STARTER MOTOR ELEC
EAS00772
ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR
b 1. Install:
• bearing
• brush seat 1
a
NOTE:
_
Align the slot a on the brush seat with the tab

1 b in the starter motor front cover.
2. Install:
1 • brush holder (along with the brushes) 1
3. Install:
• armature assembly 1
4. Install:
• gasket New
• starter motor yoke 1
• circlip
NOTE:
1 _
b Align the tab a on the brush holder with the

slot b in the starter motor yoke.
5. Install:
• bearing
• oil seal
1 • washer set
• lock washer 1
7 - 33
– +
STARTER MOTOR ELEC
6. Install:
a b • gasket 1 New
• starter motor cover 2
• bolts
NOTE:
_
Align the match marks a on the starter motor

yoke with the match marks b on the starter
2 motor rear cover.
1 New
7. Install:
• O-rings 1 New
• starter motor gear 2
• circlip 3
3
1 2
7 - 34
– +
CHARGING SYSTEM ELEC
EAS00773
CHARGING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
9 L B/R Lg Br/B
A B
0 A Br/B L
L
Y L B B L Y W W W W
(BLACK) (BLACK)
Sb
R/L G L/
B
B
B
B B
G B C B
R/L B
W W 5
1 W W 2 R R R/G
W W
B R
WWW Gy
(BLACK)
(GRAY) B R R
R/W L L W/Y W L
R R Gy B/L B Gy E B/L B
R/B
B/L
R
6 L Y B F
B
Y
3 R
L (BLACK)
L
R Br/L R R
ON R
OFF L/Y L/B
4 7
B R/W L
B R/B P/W B/L L B/L
L/Y
Br/L R P/W
Br/L L/B L/B L/Y B
B
B (BLACK)
G
B B 8
L M
P/Y B/L L B/L B/L
P/Y
(GRAY) H B/L Br/W B
(BLACK) (BLA
L
å P B/L L B/L
P
N
(BLACK) B
R Br/B I
Br B
~ L W/B W L
J
L
W/B (BLACK)
O
R/B R/B B/L B B/L B
(BLACK) (BLACK)
W B
L
(BLACK)
L Y/G B/L
K Y/G
B/L
}
R Gy/R
|
Br/L Br
{ Br
Br/L R/W Br P
(BLACK)
g P
f
z
Br/L R/Y
R/Y R/Y
R/Y
s Br R/W B/R L/W1 G/L h

R/Y Y/B
Y/B
R/W B/R Y G/Y R/B R/W L/Y
Br B/G L/W1 L/W B Br i B/Y G/L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
Br u v k l
t
j B/Y L/Y
(BLACK)
B
(BLACK)
B
y
Y G
Br Y Y B/G
Y
(BLACK)
A
Y 1 Generator
L A L
L
L Y 2 Rectifier/regulator
w L Y Y L 4 Battery
B B
6 Main fuse Y G
x G
7 - 35
– +
EAS00774 EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
The battery is not being charged. • Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
Check:
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
1. main fuse
2. battery Minimum open-circuit voltage
3. charging voltage 12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
4. stator coil resistance
5. wiring connections
(of the entire charging system) YES NO
NOTE:
_

• Clean the battery
part(s):
terminals.
1. seat
• Recharge or
2. battery compartment
tool(s). EAS00775
3. Charging voltage
Inductive tachometer • Connect the inductive tachometer to the
YU-8036-A spark plug lead of cylinder #1.
Pocket tester • Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
YU-03112 battery as shown.
EAS00738 Positive tester probe →
1. Main fuse positive battery terminal
• Check the main fuse for continuity.
negative battery terminal
chapter 3.
• Are the main fuse OK?
YES NO
Replace the fuse.
• Start the engine and let it run at approxi-

mately 5,000 r/min.
• Measure the charging voltage.
Charging voltage
14 V at 5,000 r/min
NOTE:
_
Make sure the battery is fully charged.
7 - 36
– +
EAS00779
• Is the charging voltage within specifica-
tion? 5. Wiring
• Check the wiring connections of the entire
NO YES charging system.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
The charging circuit • Is the charging system’s wiring properly
is OK. connected and without defects?
EAS00776
YES NO
4. Stator coil resistance
• Remove the generator cover. Replace the rectifier/ Properly connect or
• Disconnect the stator coil assembly cou- regulator. repair the charging
pler from the rectifier/regulator. system’s wiring.
stator coil assembly coupler as shown.
Positive tester probe → white 1
Negative tester probe → white 2
Ω ×1
+
1 2
3
W W W
• Measure the stator coil resistances.

Stator coil resistance
0.12 ~ 0.20 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Is the stator coil OK?
YES NO
Replace the stator

coil assembly.
7 - 37
3 Main switch
EAS00780
4 Battery
9 L B/R Lg Br/B
6 Main fuse
A B
Br/B L B/R L/W1 R/L

P ECU
Y L B B L Y W W W W X Tachometer
(BLACK) (BLACK)
WIREHARNESS TAIL SUB-WIREHARNESS WIREHARNESS INJECTION SUB-WIREHARNESS L/R Y Tachometer light
Sb ] Speedometer
R/L G L/G
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
B
B c High beam indicator light
D B B
(BLUE)
B
B B d Speedometer light
G B C
R/L B B
B L/G
W W 5 (BLUE)
LIGHTING SYSTEM
1 W W 2 R R R/G
h Headlight relay
W W
WWW Gy B/R
Rk Dimmer switch
(BLACK) Br/L P/L G/R Y/G R/W Y/L R/B Br B/L Y/B L/R W Gy Y/R R/L Y/R L/W B3 B/Y B/G
B/L B/O
R/W L L W/Y W L
B/L B W/Y
n Front turn signal/position
Gy B/O S
R/B R/W B/W
B/L L/B
R
B B/L
6 L Y B F Y Y
light (left
R L L B/R
R
ON R Q
OFF L/Y L/B W/G W/G B/W o Front turn signal/position
4 7 L/W Br/L Br/L
B R/W L
B R/B S
P/W B/L L B/L R/B
L/Y W/G R/B R/G
Br/L R P/W P/W light (right
L/Y B
G P
B B 8 P Y/R
L M r Headlight
P/Y Br
Y/L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
L R/B
w Tail/brake light
P B/L L B/L
N T
å P
B Br
Br/B (BLACK) Gy/R
R I x License plate light
R/L
L/R
~ L W/B W L O Gy
W/B (BLACK)
z Headlight fuse
Y/B U
W B
L W Gy
| Signaling system fuse
(BLACK)
K Y/G
B/L B/R
7 - 38
B3 V
G B G G W W B W
W G
}
R Gy/R (GRAY)
|
Br/L Br
Br W
{ W
Z
Br P Br
z B [
Gy Gy
Br/L R/Y Br/W Y/R Br/W Br G
B
R/Y R/Y W Y/R B \
Br Lg Y/L B
R/G
R/Y Br X
L
s Br
R/Y Y/B
R/W B/R Y Y/B

G/Y R/B R/W L/Y ^
L/W B Br
L/R L/R
(L) O O
B/Y L/Y (R) b
j (BLACK) Dg
(BLACK)
c O Br/Y Br/Y O
Y (RED) (RED)
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Y G B Ch Dg
Br Y Y B/G R P
Y
d O Br/Y L/R Gy
(BLACK) Gy L/R
Y (BLUE) (BLUE)
L B
A A (BLUE)
(GREEN)
w L Y Y L Ch Dg
B B Ch B
L L Ch Ch Y Br
Dg Dg
Y G Dg Lg B
x (GREEN)
G B
r Y B
q
p o n
B
B B
B
ELEC
B A B B
B A B B B
B
–
+
– +
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELEC
EAS00781 EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
Any of the following fail to light: head- • Check the condition of the battery.
light, high beam indicator light, taillight, Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
position light, license plate light or meter THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
light.
Minimum open-circuit voltage
Check: 12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
1. main, headlight and signaling system fuses
2. battery
3. main switch YES NO
4. dimmer switch
5. headlight relay
6. wiring connections • Clean the battery
(of the entire lighting system) terminals.
• Recharge or
NOTE:
part(s): EAS00749
1. seat 3. Main switch

2. headlight lens unit
tool(s).
• Is the main switch OK?
YES NO
Pocket tester
YU-03112
EAS00738
Replace the main
switch.
1. Main, headlight and signaling system
EAS00784
fuses
4. Dimmer switch
• Check the main, headlight and signaling
system fuses for continuity. • Check the dimmer switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
chapter 3. • Is the dimmer switch OK?
• Are the main, headlight and signaling sys-
tem fuses OK? YES NO
YES NO
The dimmer switch is
faulty. Replace the
Replace the fuse(s). left handlebar switch.
7 - 39
– +
EAS00788
5. Headlight relay CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM
• Remove the headlight relay from the wire 1. The headlight and the high beam indicator
harness. light fail to come on.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and bat- 1. Headlight bulb and socket
tery (12 V) to the headlight relay terminal
• Check the headlight bulb and socket for
as shown.
continuity.
• Check the headlight relay for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
Positive battery terminal → red/yellow 1 BULB SOCKETS”.
Negative battery terminal → • Are the headlight bulb and socket OK?
yellow/black 2
YES NO
Positive tester probe → red/yellow 3
Negative tester probe → green/blue 4
3 Replace the head-
light bulb, socket or
4 + both.
2 1 2. High beam indicator light LED

Y/B R/Y • Check the LED of the high beam indicator
G/L light.
R/Y Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
• Does the headlight relay have continuity • Are the high beam indicator light LED OK?
between red/yellow and green/blue?
YES NO
YES NO
Replace the speed-
Replace the head- ometer assembly.
light relay.
EAS00787
3. Voltage
6. Wiring • Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

headlight and speedometer assembly cou-
• Check the entire lighting system’s wiring.
plers as shown.
• Is the lighting system’s wiring properly È When the dimmer switch is set to “ ”
connected and without defects? É When the dimmer switch is set to “ “
Headlight coupler
YES NO
Check the condition Properly connect or

of each of the lighting repair the lighting
system’s circuits. system’s wiring.
Refer to “CHECK-
ING THE LIGHTING
SYSTEM”.
7 - 40
– +
EAS00789
Headlight 2. The tachometer and speedometer light fails
Positive tester probe → to come on.
yellow 1 or green 2
Negative tester probe → black 3 1. Tachometer and speedometer light LED
High beam indicator light • Check the LED of the tachometer and
Positive tester probe → yellow 4 speedometer light.
Negative tester probe → black 5 Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Speedometer assembly coupler • Are the tachometer and speedometer light
LED OK?
YES NO
Dg Lg B
Ch Y Br Replace the tachom-
Ch Y Br eter assembly or
Dg Lg B 5 speedometer assem-
4 bly.
• Set the main switch to “ON”. 2. Voltage

• Set the dimmer switch to “ ” or “ ”.
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of yellow
tachometer and speedometer assembly
1 or green 2 on the headlight coupler,
couplers as shown.
and yellow 4 on the speedometer assem-
bly coupler. Tachometer assembly coupler
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES NO
This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit Y/L B 2

L Br
from the main switch 1
L Br
to the headlight cou- Y/L B
pler is faulty and
must be repaired.
Tachometer light
Positive tester probe → brown 1
Speedometer light
7 - 41
– +
Speedometer assembly coupler 2. Voltage
tail/brake light assembly coupler (tail sub-
wire harness side) as shown.
4
Dg Lg B Positive tester probe → blue 1
Ch Y Br 3 Negative tester probe → black 2
Ch Y Br
Dg Lg B
1
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown
1 on the tachometer and speedometer L Y Y L
light couplers. B B
• Is the voltage within specification? 2
YES NO • Set the main switch to “ON”.

• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of blue 1
This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit on the tail/brake light assembly coupler
from the main switch (tail sub-wire harness side).
to the tachometer • Is the voltage within specification?
and speedometer
YES NO
light couplers is faulty
and must be
repaired. Replace the tail/ The wiring circuit
EAS00790 brake light assembly. from the main switch
3. The tail/brake light fails to come on. to the tail/brake light
assembly coupler is
1. Tail/brake light LED
faulty and must be
• Check the LED of the tail/brake light. repaired.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND EAS00791
BULB SOCKETS”. 4. The license plate light fails to come on.
• Are the tail/brake light LED OK?
1. License plate light bulb and socket
YES NO • Check the license plate light bulb and
socket for continuity.
Replace the tail/ Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
brake light assembly. BULB SOCKETS”.
• Are the license plate light bulb and socket
OK?
YES NO
Replace the license

plate light bulb,
socket or both.
7 - 42
– +
2. Voltage • Check the front turn signal/position light
bulb and socket for continuity.
license plate light connectors (wire har-
BULB SOCKETS”.
ness side) as shown.
• Are the front turn signal/position light bulb
Positive tester probe → blue 1 and socket OK?
YES NO
1 Replace the front

turn signal/position
L L
light bulb, socket or
B B both.
2 2. Voltage
• Set the main switch to “ON”. front turn signal/position light connectors
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of blue 1 (wire harness side) as shown.
on the license plate light connectors (wire
Positive tester probe → blue 1
harness side).
1
YES NO Ch Ch
L
B
L
This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit
from the main switch B
B
to the license plate L
Dg Dg
light connectors is
2
faulty and must be
repaired. • Set the main switch to “ON”.
EAS00791
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of blue 1
5. The front turn signal/position light fails to on the front turn signal/position light con-
come on. nectors (wire harness side).
1. Front turn signal/position light bulb and
socket
YES NO

from the main switch
to the front turn sig-
nal/position light con-
nectors is faulty and
must be repaired.
7 - 43
EAS00793
9 L B/R Lg Br/B
A B
Br/B L B/R L/W1 R/L

Y L B B L Y W W W W
(BLACK) (BLACK)
Sb
R/L G L/G
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
B
B
D B B
(BLUE)
B
B B
G B C
R/L B B
B L/G
W W 5 (BLUE)
1 W W 2 R R R/G
W W
SIGNALING SYSTEM
WWW (BLACK)
Gy B/R
R
B/L B/O
R/W L L W/Y W L
B/L B W/Y
Gy B/O S
R/B R/W B/W
B/L L/B
R
B B/L
6 L Y B F Y Y
R L L B/R
R
ON R Q
4 7 L/W Br/L Br/L
B R/W L
B R/B S
P/W B/L L B/L R/B
L/Y W/G R/B R/G
Br/L R P/W P/W
L/Y B
G P
B B 8 P Y/R
L M
P/Y Br
Y/L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
L R/B
P B/L L B/L
N T
å P
B Br
Br/B (BLACK) Gy/R
R I R/L
L/R
B/G
~ L W/B W L O Gy
W/B (BLACK)
Y/B U
W B
L W Gy
(BLACK)
K Y/G
B/L B/R
7 - 44
B3 V
G B G G W W B W
W G
}
R Gy/R (GRAY)
|
Br/L Br
Br W
{ W
Z
Br P Br
z B [
Gy Gy
B G
R/Y R/Y W Y/R B \
Br Lg Y/L B
R/G
R/Y Br X
L
s Br
R/Y Y/B
R/W B/R Y Y/B

G/Y R/B R/W L/Y ^
L/W B Br
L/R L/R
(L) O O
B/Y L/Y (R) b
j (BLACK) Dg
(BLACK)
c O Br/Y Br/Y O
Y (RED) (RED)
SIGNALING SYSTEM
Y G B Ch Dg
Br Y Y B/G R P
Y
d O Br/Y L/R Gy
(BLACK) Gy L/R
Y (BLUE) (BLUE)
L B
A A (BLUE)
(GREEN)
w L Y Y L Ch Dg
B B Ch B
L L Ch Ch Y Br
Dg Dg
Y G Dg Lg B
x (GREEN)
G B
r Y B
q
p o n
B
B B
B
ELEC
B A B B
B A B B B
B
–
+
– +
SIGNALING SYSTEM ELEC
3 Main switch
4 Battery
5 Backup fuse (odometer and clock)
6 Main fuse
9 Relay unit
B Fuel pump
C Neutral switch
P ECU
X Tachometer
[ Engine trouble warning light
\ Neutral indicator light
] Speedometer
_ Fuel level warning light
a Left turn signal indicator light
b Right turn signal indicator light
e Turn signal relay
f Horn 1
g Horn 2
l Horn switch
m Turn signal switch
n Front turn signal/position light (left)
o Front turn signal/position light (right)
p Rear turn signal light (right)
q Rear turn signal light (left)
t Front brake light switch
w Tail/brake light
y Rear brake light switch
| Signaling system fuse
7 - 45
– +
EAS00794 EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
• Any of the following fail to light: turn • Check the condition of the battery.
signal light, brake light or an indicator Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
light. THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
• The horn fails to sound.
Minimum open-circuit voltage
Check: 12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
1. main, signaling system and backup fuses
2. battery
3. main switch YES NO
4. wiring connections
(of the entire signaling system)
• Clean the battery
NOTE:
_
terminals.
• Recharge or
part(s):
1. seat
• Troubleshoot with the following special 3. Main switch

tool(s).
Pocket tester • Is the main switch OK?
YU-03112
YES NO
EAS00738
1. Main, signaling system and backup fuses

Replace the main
• Check the main, signaling system and switch.
backup fuses for continuity. EAS00795
4. Wiring
chapter 3.
• Are the main and ignition fuses OK? • Check the entire signal system’s wiring.
YES NO • Is the signaling system’s wiring properly
connected and without defects?
Replace the fuse(s). YES NO
Check the condition Properly connect or

of each of the signal- repair the signaling
ing system’s circuits. system’s wiring.
Refer to “CHECK-
ING THE SIGNAL-
ING SYSTEM”.
7 - 46
– +
EAS00796
CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM 3. Horn 1
1. The horn 1 fails to sound. • Disconnect the black connector at the horn
1. Horn switch 1 terminal.
• Connect a jumper lead 1 to the horn 1 ter-
• Check the horn switch for continuity.
minal and ground the jumper lead.
• Is the horn switch OK?
• Push the horn switch.
YES NO • Does the horn 1 sound?
B/W
Replace the left han-
dlebar switch. 1
2. Voltage
horn 1 connector at the horn 1 terminal as
shown.
Positive tester probe → black/white 1
NO YES
Negative tester probe → ground
Replace the horn 1. The horn 1 is OK.

B/W B
1

• Push the horn switch.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of black/
white at the horn 1 terminal.
YES NO
The wiring circuit

to the horn connector
is faulty and must be
repaired.
7 - 47
– +
EAS00796
2. The horn 2 fails to sound. 3. Horn 2
1. Horn switch • Disconnect the horn 2 coupler at the horn
2.
• Check the horn switch for continuity.
• Connect a jumper lead 1 to the brown ter-
minal in the horn coupler and the horn ter-
• Is the horn switch OK?
minal.
YES NO • Connect a jumper lead 2 to the horn ter-
minal and ground the jumper lead.
Replace the left han- • Push the horn switch.
dlebar switch. • Does the horn 2 sound?
2. Voltage
horn 2 coupler as shown.
Negative tester probe → ground
NO YES
Replace the horn 2. The horn 2 is OK.

EAS00797
3. The tail/brake light fails to come on.
• Set the main switch to “ON”. 1. Tail/brake light LED

• Push the horn switch. • Check the LED of the tail/brake light.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
1 at the horn 2 coupler. BULB SOCKETS”.
• Is the voltage within specification? • Are the tail/brake light LED OK?
YES NO YES NO
The wiring circuit Replace the tail/

from the main switch brake light assembly.
to the horn coupler is
faulty and must be
repaired.
7 - 48
– +
EAS00799
2. Brake light switches 4. The turn signal light, turn signal indicator
• Check the brake light switches for continu- light or both fail to blink.
ity. 1. Turn signal light bulb and socket
• Check the turn signal light bulb and socket
• Is the brake light switch OK?
for continuity.
YES NO Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
• Is the turn signal light bulb and socket OK?
Replace the brake
light switch. YES NO
3. Voltage
Replace the turn sig-
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the nal light bulb, socket
tail/brake light assembly coupler (tail sub- or both.
wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe → yellow 1 2. Turn signal indicator light LED
Negative tester probe → black 2 • Check the LED of the turn signal light.
BULB SOCKETS”.
• Are the turn signal light LED OK?
1
YES NO
L Y Y L
B B Replace the speed-
2 ometer assembly.
• Set the main switch to “ON”. 3. Turn signal switch

• Pull in the brake lever or push down on the • Check the turn signal switch for continuity.
brake pedal. Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of yellow • Is the turn signal switch OK?
1 on the tail/brake light assembly coupler
(tail sub-wire harness side). YES NO
YES NO Replace the left han-

dlebar switch.

to the tail/brake light
assembly coupler is
faulty and must be
repaired.
7 - 49
– +
4. Voltage 5. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the • Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
turn signal relay coupler (wire harness turn signal relay coupler (wire harness
side) as shown. side) as shown.
Positive tester probe → brown 1 Positive tester probe → brown/white 1
Negative tester probe → ground Negative tester probe → ground
• Set the main switch to “ON”. • Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) on brown • Set the turn signal switch to “ ” or “ ”.
1 at the turn signal relay coupler (wire • Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) on brown/
harness side). white 1 at the turn signal relay coupler
• Is the voltage within specification? (wire harness side).
YES NO
YES NO
The wiring circuit

from the main switch The turn signal relay
to the turn signal is faulty and must be
relay coupler is faulty replaced.
and must be
repaired.
7 - 50
– +
6. Voltage • Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Set the turn signal switch to “ ” or “ ”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of the
turn signal light connectors or speedome-
chocolate 1 or dark green 2 at the turn
ter assembly coupler (wire harness side)
signal light connectors or the speedometer
as shown.
assembly coupler (wire harness side).
È Turn signal light • Is the voltage within specification?
É Turn signal indicator light
YES NO
Left turn signal light
Positive tester probe → chocolate 1
Negative tester probe → ground This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit
Right turn signal light from the turn signal
Positive tester probe → dark green 2 switch to the turn sig-
Negative tester probe → ground nal light connector or
È the speedometer
coupler are faulty
and must be
repaired.
EAS00800
5. The neutral indicator light fails to come on.
1. Neutral indicator light LED
• Check the LED of the neutral indicator
light.
É
BULB SOCKETS”.
• Are the neutral indicator light LED OK?
Br B B Br
YES NO
Y Lg Lg Y
Ch Dg Dg Ch Replace the speed-
2 1 ometer assembly.
2. Neutral switch
YES NO
Replace the neutral

switch.
7 - 51
– +
EAS00803
3. Voltage 6. The fuel level indicator light fails to come
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the on.
speedometer assembly coupler (wire har- 1. Fuel level indicator light LED
ness side) as shown.
• Check the LED of the fuel level indicator
Positive tester probe → brown 1 light.
Negative tester probe → light green 2 Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
• Are the fuel level indicator light LED OK?
YES NO
1
Br B B Br
Y Lg Lg Y Replace the speed-
Ch Dg Dg Ch
ometer assembly.
2
2. Fuel pump (fuel sender)
• Set the main switch to “ON”. • Drain the fuel from the fuel tank and
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown remove the fuel pump from the sub fuel
1 and light green 2 at the speedometer tank.
assembly coupler (wire harness side). • Disconnect the fuel pump coupler from the
• Is the voltage within specification? fuel pump.
NO • Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the
YES
fuel pump terminal as shown.
This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit Negative tester probe → black 2
to the speedometer
assembly coupler is 1
2
faulty and must be
repaired. G B
R/L B
• Measure the fuel sender resistance.

Fuel sender resistance
900 ~ 2,050 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Is the fuel sender OK?
YES NO
Replace the fuel

pump.
7 - 52
– +
3. Voltage 2. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC V 20) to the • Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
speedometer assembly coupler (wire har- speedometer assembly coupler (wire har-
ness side) as shown. ness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe → brown 1 Positive tester probe → brown 1
Negative tester probe → black 2 Negative tester probe → gray 2
1
Br B B Br
Y Lg Lg Y
2 Ch Dg Dg Ch
2
Br B B Br 1
Y Lg Lg Y Gy G/R G/R Gy
Ch Dg Dg Ch L/R B/L B/L L/R
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown • Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown
1 and black 2 at the speedometer 1 and gray 2 at the speedometer assem-
assembly coupler (wire harness side). bly coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification? • Is the voltage within specification?
YES NO YES NO
Replace the speed- The wiring circuit This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit
ometer assembly. from the main switch from the main switch
to the speedometer to the speedometer
assembly coupler is assembly coupler is
faulty and must be faulty and must be
repaired. repaired.
EAS00800
7. The engine trouble warning light fails to
come on.
1. Engine trouble warning light LED
• Check the LED of the engine trouble warn-
ing light.
BULB SOCKETS”.
• Are the engine trouble warning light LED
OK?
YES NO
Replace the speed-

ometer assembly.
7 - 53
9 L B/R Lg Br/B
A B
Br/B L B/R L/W1 R/L

Y L B B L Y W W W W
(BLACK) (BLACK)
Sb
R/L G L/G
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
B
B
D B B
(BLUE)
B
B B
G B C
R/L B B
B L/G
W W 5 (BLUE)
1 W W 2 R R R/G
W W
WWW (BLACK)
Gy B/R
R
B/L B/O
R/W L L W/Y W L
B/L B W/Y
Gy B/O S
R/B R/W B/W
B/L L/B
R
B B/L
6 L Y B F Y Y
R L L B/R
R
ON R Q
4 7 L/W Br/L Br/L

B R/W L
B R/B S
P/W B/L L B/L R/B
L/Y W/G R/B R/G
Br/L R P/W P/W
L/Y B
G P
B B 8 P Y/R
L M
P/Y Br
Y/L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
L R/B
P B/L L B/L
N T
å P
B Br
Br/B (BLACK) Gy/R
R I R/L
L/R
B/G
~ L W/B W L O Gy
W/B (BLACK)
Y/B U
W B
L W Gy
(BLACK)
K Y/G
B/L B/R
7 - 54
B3 V
G B G G W W B W
W G
}
R Gy/R (GRAY)
|
Br/L Br
Br W
{ W
Z
Br P Br
z B [
Gy Gy
B G
R/Y R/Y W Y/R B \
Br Lg Y/L B
R/G
R/Y Br X
L
s Br
R/Y Y/B
R/W B/R Y Y/B

G/Y R/B R/W L/Y ^
L/W B Br
L/R L/R
(L) O O
B/Y L/Y (R) b
j (BLACK) Dg
(BLACK)
c O Br/Y Br/Y O
Y (RED) (RED)
Y G B Ch Dg
Br Y Y B/G R P
Y
d O Br/Y L/R Gy
(BLACK) Gy L/R
Y (BLUE) (BLUE)
L B
A A (BLUE)
(GREEN)
w L Y Y L Ch Dg
B B Ch B
L L Ch Ch Y Br
Dg Dg
Y G Dg Lg B
x (GREEN)
G B
r Y B
q
p o n
B
B B
B
ELEC
B A B B
B A B B B
B
–
+
– +
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ELEC
3 Main switch
4 Battery
6 Main fuse
B Fuel pump
L Speed sensor
P ECU
U Cylinder #1-injector
V Cylinder #2-injector
{ Ignition fuse
~ ECU fuse
å Fuel injection system fuse
7 - 55
– +
EAS00821 EAS00738
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Main, ignition, ECU and fuel injection sys-
If the fuel injection system fails to oper- tem fuses
ate. • Check the main, ignition, ECU and fuel
Check: injection system fuses for continuity.
1. main, ignition, ECU and fuel injection Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in
system fuses chapter 3.
2. battery • Are the main, ignition, ECU and fuel injec-
3. main switch tion system fuses OK?
4. engine stop switch YES NO
5. relay unit (fuel injection system relay)
6. cylinder #1-injector resistance
7. cylinder #2-injector resistance Replace the fuse(s).
8. fuel pump resistance EAS00739
9. crankshaft position sensor resistance

2. Battery
10.cylinder identification sensor output voltage
11.speed sensor output voltage • Check the condition of the battery.
12.intake air temperature sensor resistance Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
13.intake air pressure sensor 1 output voltage THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
14.intake air pressure sensor 2 output voltage Minimum open-circuit voltage
15.atmospheric pressure sensor output 12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
voltage
16.engine temperature sensor resistance • Is the battery OK?
17.oil temperature sensor resistance
YES NO
18.wiring connections
(of the entire carburetor heating system)
NOTE: • Clean the battery
_
• Before troubleshooting, remove the following terminals.

part(s): • Recharge or
1. seat replace the battery.
3. fuel tank 3. Main switch

4. air induction system cover
5. air filter case • Check the main switch for continuity.
6. silencer air filter case Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
7. muffler and exhaust pipes • Is the main switch OK?
8. intake manifold
YES NO
tool(s).
Replace the main
switch.
Pocket tester
YU-03112
7 - 56
– +
EAS00750
6. Cylinder #1-injector resistance
4. Engine stop switch
• Disconnect the injection sub-wire harness
• Check the engine stop switch for continu-
coupler from the cylinder #1-injector.
ity.
cylinder #1-injector terminal as shown.
• Is the engine stop switch OK?
YES NO Negative tester probe → white 2
Replace the right 1 2

handlebar switch.
EAS00759
W Gy
5. Relay unit (fuel injection system relay)
• Remove the relay unit from the wire har-
ness.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and bat-
tery (12 V) to the relay unit terminals as • Measure the cylinder #1-injector resis-
shown. tance.
Positive battery terminal → black/red 1 Cylinder #1-injector resistance
Negative battery terminal → blue/red 2 14.2 ~ 14.8 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
Positive tester probe → brown/black 3 • Is the cylinder #1-injector OK?
Negative tester probe → red/blue 4
YES NO
2 1
+ Replace the cylinder
#1-injector.
4
3
Br/B L B/R L/W R/L
L/R L/G L/Y Sb B/Y Lg
• Does the fuel injection system relay have

continuity between brown and red/blue?
YES NO
Replace the relay

unit.
7 - 57
– +
EAS00817
7. Cylinder #2-injector resistance
8. Fuel pump resistance
• Disconnect the injection sub-wire harness
• Disconnect the fuel pump coupler from the
coupler from the cylinder #2-injector.
fuel pump.
cylinder #2-injector terminal as shown.
fuel pump terminal as shown.
Positive tester probe → red/blue 1
1 2
G B
W G
R/L B
2 1
• Measure the cylinder #2-injector resis-

• Measure the fuel pump resistance.
tance.
Fuel pump resistance
Cylinder #2-injector resistance
0.2 ~ 3.0 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
14.2 ~ 14.8 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Is the fuel pump OK?
• Is the cylinder #2-injector OK?
YES NO
YES NO
Replace the fuel

Replace the cylinder
pump.
#2-injector.
7 - 58
– +
EAS00748
10.Cylinder identification sensor output volt-
9. Crankshaft position sensor resistance
age
• Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor
coupler from the wire harness.
cylinder identification sensor coupler as
shown.
crankshaft position sensor coupler as
shown. Positive tester probe → white 1
1
W L L W/B
B B/L

• Measure the cylinder identification sensor
• Measure the crankshaft position sensor
output voltage.
resistance.
Cylinder identification sensor
Crankshaft position sensor output voltage
resistance When sensor is on
248 ~ 372 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F) DC 4.8 V or more
(between gray and black) When sensor is off
DC 0.8 V or less
• Is the crankshaft position sensor OK?
• Is the cylinder identification sensor OK?
YES NO
YES NO
Replace the crank-
shaft position sensor. Replace the cylinder
identification sensor.
7 - 59
– +
11.Speed sensor output voltage
• Measure the speed sensor output voltage. 3
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the B B
1
speed sensor coupler as shown.
2
1
• Measure the intake air temperature sensor
resistance.
W L L W/Y
Intake air temperature sensor
B B/L resistance
290 ~ 390 Ω at 80 °C (176 °F)
2
WARNING
• Measure the speed sensor output voltage. • Handle the intake air temperature sensor
Speed sensor output voltage with special care.
When sensor is on • Never subject the intake air temperature
DC 4.8 V or more sensor to strong shocks. If the intake air
When sensor is off temperature sensor is dropped, replace
DC 0.6 V or less it.
• Is the speed sensor OK?
Intake air temperature sensor
YES NO 15 Nm (1.5 m · kg, 11 ft · lb)
T.
R.
• Is the intake air temperature sensor OK?

Replace the speed
YES NO
sensor.
12.Intake air temperature sensor resistance Replace the intake

air temperature sen-
• Remove the intake air temperature sensor
sor.
from the silencer air filter case.
intake air temperature sensor coupler as
shown.
• Immerse the intake air temperature sensor
1 in a container filled with water 2.
NOTE:
_
Make sure that the intake air temperature

sensor terminals do not get wet.
• Place a thermometer 3 in the water.

• Slowly heat the water, then let it cool down
to the specified temperature.
7 - 60
– +
13.Intake air pressure sensor 1 output volt- 14.Intake air pressure sensor 2 output volt-
age age
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the • Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
intake air intake air pressure sensor 1 cou- intake air intake air pressure sensor 2 cou-
pler as shown. pler as shown.
Positive tester probe → blue 1 Positive tester probe → blue 1
Negative tester probe → black/blue 2 Negative tester probe → black/blue 2
2 1 2 1
P/W B/L L P/Y B/L L
• Measure the intake air pressure sensor 1 • Measure the intake air pressure sensor 2
output voltage. output voltage.
Intake air pressure sensor output Intake air pressure sensor output
voltage voltage
4.75 ~ 5.25 DCV 4.75 ~ 5.25 DCV
• Is the intake air pressure sensor 1 OK? • Is the intake air pressure sensor 2 OK?
YES NO YES NO
Replace the intake Replace the intake

air pressure sensor air pressure sensor
1. 2.
15.Atmospheric pressure sensor output volt-

age
atmospheric pressure sensor coupler as
shown.
7 - 61
– +
Negative tester probe → black/blue 2 3
1
2 1
P B/L L 2
• Measure the engine temperature sensor

resistance.
• Set the main switch to “ON”. Engine temperature sensor
• Measure the atmospheric pressure sensor resistance
output voltage. 898 ~ 1,098 Ω at 100 °C (212 °F)
Atmospheric pressure sensor WARNING

output voltage
4.75 ~ 5.25 DCV • Handle the engine temperature sensor
with special care.
• Is the atmospheric pressure sensor OK? • Never subject the engine temperature
YES NO sensor to strong shocks. If the engine
temperature sensor is dropped, replace
it.
Replace the atmo-
spheric pressure Engine temperature sensor
18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)
sensor.
T.
R.
• Is the engine temperature sensor OK?

16.Engine temperature sensor resistance
YES NO
• Remove the engine temperature sensor
from the front cylinder head.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 100) to the Replace the engine
engine temperature sensor terminal as temperature sensor.
shown.
• Immerse the engine temperature sensor
1 in a container filled with water 2.
NOTE:
_
Make sure that the engine temperature sen-

sor terminals do not get wet.
• Place a thermometer 3 in the water.

• Slowly heat the water, then let it cool down
to the specified temperature.
7 - 62
– +
EAS00818
17.Oil temperature sensor resistance
18.Wiring
• Remove the oil temperature sensor from
• Check the entire fuel injection system’s
the oil tank.
wiring.
oil temperature sensor terminal as shown.
• Is the fuel injection system’s wiring prop-
• Immerse the oil temperature sensor 1 in a
erly connected and without defects?
container filled with engine oil 2.
NOTE:
_
YES NO
Make sure that the oil temperature sensor ter-
minals do not get wet.
Replace the ECU. Properly connect or
• Place a thermometer 3 in the engine oil. repair the fuel injec-
• Slowly heat the engine oil, then let it cool tion system’s wiring.
down to the specified temperature.
3
1
• Measure the oil temperature sensor resis-

tance.
Oil temperature sensor
resistance
308 ~ 339 Ω at 150 °C (302 °F)
209 ~ 231 Ω at 170 °C (338 °F)
WARNING
• Handle the oil temperature sensor with
special care.
• Never subject the oil temperature sensor
to strong shocks. If the oil temperature
sensor is dropped, replace it.
Oil temperature sensor

18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)
T.
R.
• Is the oil temperature sensor OK?
YES NO
Replace the oil tem-

perature sensor.
7 - 63
– +
EAS00819
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP
WARNING
@
Gasoline is extremely flammable and under

certain circumstances there can be a dan-
ger of an explosion or fire. Be extremely
careful and note the following points:
• Stop the engine before refueling.
• Do not smoke, and keep away from open
flames, sparks, or any other source of
fire.
• If you do accidentally spill gasoline, wipe
it up immediately with dry rags.
• If gasoline touches the engine when it is
hot, a fire may occur. Therefore, make
sure the engine is completely cool before
performing the following test.
1. Check:
• fuel pump operation
G B
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
R/L B
a. Fill the fuel tank.
1 b. Put the end of the fuel hose into an open
2
container.
+ c. Connect the battery (12 V) to the fuel pump
coupler as shown.
Positive battery lead → red/blue 1

Negative battery lead → black 2
d. If fuel flows out of the fuel hose, the fuel

pump is OK. If fuel does not flow, replace
the fuel pump.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS00502
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
NOTE:
Before adjusting the throttle position sensor,
the engine idling speed should be properly
adjusted.
7 - 64
– +
1. Check:
• throttle position sensor
2 3 1 (installed on the throttle body)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Disconnect the throttle position sensor cou-
pler from the throttle position sensor.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the
B Y L throttle position sensor.

c. Measure the maximum throttle position sen-

sor resistance.
Out of specification → Replace the throttle
position sensor.
Maximum throttle position sensor

resistance
4.0 ~ 6.0 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
(blue — black)
d. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the

throttle position sensor.
Positive tester probe → yellow 3

e. While slowly opening the throttle, check that

the throttle position sensor resistance is
within the specified range.
NOTE:
Check mainly that the resistance changes
gradually when turning the throttle, since the
readings (from closed to wide-open throttle)
may differ slightly from those specified.
Out of specification or the resistance
changes abruptly → Go to step 2 below.

resistance
(520 ~ 900 Ω) ~ (4.0 ~ 6.0 kΩ) at
20 °C (68 °F)
(yellow — black)
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7 - 65
– +
2. Check:
• throttle position sensor
2 3 1 (removed from the throttle body)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
b. Remove the throttle position sensor from
B Y L the throttle body.
c. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the

d. Measure the maximum throttle position sen-

sor resistance.
Out of specification → Replace the throttle
position sensor.
Maximum throttle position sensor

resistance
4.0 ~ 6.0 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
(blue — black)
e. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the


f. While slowly opening the throttle, check that

the throttle position sensor resistance is
within the specified range.
The resistance does not change or it
changes abruptly → Replace the throttle
position sensor.
The slot is worn or broken → Replace the
NOTE:
Check mainly that the resistance changes
gradually when turning the throttle, since the
readings (from closed to wide-open throttle)
may differ slightly from those specified.

resistance
0 ~ 5 ± 1.0 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
(yellow — black)
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7 - 66
– +
3. Adjust:
• throttle position sensor angle
2 3 1
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the
B Y L
c. Measure the throttle position sensor maxi-

mum resistance.
d. Calculate the throttle position sensor maxi-
mum resistance when the throttle is closed.
Throttle position sensor maximum

resistance (throttle is fully closed) =
Maximum resistance × (0.13 ~ 0.15)
Example:
If the maximum resistance = 5 kΩ, then the
throttle position sensor’s maximum resistance
4 when the throttle is fully closed should be:
5 kΩ × (0.13 ~ 0.15) = 650 ~ 750 Ω
Lift the throttle body assembly slightly out of
4 the intake manifolds. Loosen the throttle posi-
tion sensor screws 4.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 100) to the

e. Adjust the throttle position sensor angle so

the measured resistance is within the speci-
fied range.

resistance
650 ~ 750 Ω
(yellow — black)
After adjusting the throttle position sensor

angle, tighten the throttle position sensor
screws.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7 - 67
TRBL
STARTING FAILURES SHTG
EAS00844
TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:
_
The following guide for troubleshooting does not cover all the possible causes of trouble. It should
be helpful, however, as a guide to basic troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in this man-
ual for checks, adjustments, and replacement of parts.
STARTING FAILURES
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
Cylinder(s) and cylinder head(s) Fuel tank
• Loose spark plug • Empty fuel tank
• Loose cylinder head or cylinder • Clogged fuel filter
• Damaged cylinder head gasket • Clogged fuel strainer
• Damaged cylinder gasket • Clogged fuel tank drain hose
• Worn or damaged cylinder • Clogged rollover valve
• Incorrect valve clearance • Clogged rollover valve hose
• Improperly sealed valve • Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
• Incorrect valve-to-valve-seat contact Fuel pump
• Incorrect valve timing • Faulty fuel pump
• Faulty valve spring • Faulty fuel pump relay
• Seized valve Throttle body(-ies)
Piston(s) and piston ring(s) • Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
• Improperly installed piston ring • Sucked-in air
• Damaged, worn or fatigued piston ring • Improperly adjusted starter cable
• Seized piston ring
• Seized or damaged piston
Air filter
• Improperly installed air filter
• Clogged air filter element
Crankcase and crankshaft
• Improperly assembled crankcase
• Seized crankshaft
8-1
STARTING FAILURES/ TRBL
INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING SPEED SHTG
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Battery Ignition system
• Discharged battery • Faulty ECU
• Faulty battery • Faulty crankshaft position sensor
Fuse(s) • Broken generator rotor woodruff key
• Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse Switches and wiring
• Improperly installed fuse
Spark plug(s)
• Incorrect spark plug gap
• Faulty main switch
• Faulty engine stop switch
• Broken or shorted wiring
1
• Incorrect spark plug heat range • Faulty neutral switch
• Fouled spark plug • Faulty start switch
• Worn or damaged electrode
• Worn or damaged insulator
• Faulty spark plug cap
• Faulty sidestand switch
• Faulty clutch switch
• Improperly grounded circuit
2
Ignition coil(s) • Loose connections
• Cracked or broken ignition coil body Starting system
• Broken or shorted primary or secondary
coils
• Faulty spark plug lead
• Faulty starter motor
• Faulty starter relay
• Faulty starting circuit cut-off relay
3
• Faulty starter clutch
EAS00846
INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING SPEED

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4
Cylinder(s) and cylinder head(s) Battery
• Incorrect valve clearance • Discharged battery
• Damaged valve train components
Air filter
• Faulty battery
Spark plug(s)
• Incorrect spark plug gap
5
FUEL SYSTEM • Incorrect spark plug heat range
Throttle body(-ies) • Fouled spark plug
• Damaged or loose throttle body joint
• Improperly synchronized throttle bodies
• Improperly adjusted engine idling speed
• Worn or damaged electrode
• Worn or damaged insulator
• Faulty spark plug cap
6
(throttle stop screw) Ignition coil(s)
• Improper throttle cable free play • Broken or shorted primary or secondary
• Flooded throttle body
• Faulty air induction system
coils
• Faulty spark plug lead 7
• Cracked or broken ignition coil
Ignition system
• Faulty ECU
• Faulty crankshaft position sensor
• Broken generator rotor woodruff key
8
8-2
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE/ TRBL
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING/FAULTY CLUTCH SHTG
EAS00848
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE

Refer to “STARTING FAILURES”.
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter Fuel pump
• Clogged air filter element • Faulty fuel pump
EAS00850
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING

SHIFTING IS DIFFICULT JUMPS OUT OF GEAR
Refer to “CLUTCH DRAGS”. Shift shaft
SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE • Incorrect shift pedal position
Shift shaft • Improperly returned stopper lever
• Improperly adjusted shift rod Shift forks
• Bent shift shaft. • Worn shift fork
Shift drum and shift forks Shift drum
• Foreign object in a shift drum groove • Incorrect axial play
• Seized shift fork • Worn shift drum groove
• Bent shift fork guide bar Transmission
Transmission • Worn gear dog
• Seized transmission gear
• Foreign object between transmission gears
• Improperly assembled transmission
EAS00851
FAULTY CLUTCH
CLUTCH SLIPS CLUTCH DRAGS
Clutch Clutch
• Improperly assembled clutch • Unevenly tensioned clutch springs
• Improperly adjusted clutch cable • Warped pressure plate
• Loose or fatigued clutch spring • Bent clutch plate
• Worn friction plate • Swollen friction plate
• Worn clutch plate • Bent clutch push rod
Engine oil • Broken clutch boss
• Incorrect oil level • Burnt primary driven gear bushing
• Incorrect oil viscosity (low) • Match marks not aligned
• Deteriorated oil Engine oil
• Incorrect oil level
• Incorrect oil viscosity (high)
• Deteriorated oil
8-3
OVERHEATING/POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE/ TRBL
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS SHTG
EAS00854
OVERHEATING
ENGINE CHASSIS
Cylinder head(s) and piston(s) Brake(s)
• Heavy carbon buildup • Dragging brake
Engine oil ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
• Incorrect oil level Spark plug(s)
• Incorrect oil viscosity • Incorrect spark plug gap
• Inferior oil quality • Incorrect spark plug heat range
FUEL SYSTEM Ignition system
Throttle body(-ies) • Faulty ECU
• Faulty throttle body(-ies)
• Damaged or loose throttle body joint
Air filter
EAS00857
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE

• Worn brake pad • Loose union bolt
• Worn brake disc • Damaged brake hose
• Air in hydraulic brake system • Oil or grease on the brake disc
• Leaking brake fluid • Oil or grease on the brake pad
• Faulty brake caliper kit • Incorrect brake fluid level
• Faulty brake caliper seal
EAS00861
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS

LEAKING OIL MALFUNCTION
• Bent, damaged or rusty inner tube • Bent or damaged inner tube
• Cracked or damaged outer tube • Bent or damaged outer tube
• Improperly installed oil seal • Damaged fork spring
• Damaged oil seal lip • Worn or damaged outer tube bushing
• Incorrect oil level (high) • Bent or damaged damper rod
• Loose damper rod assembly bolt • Incorrect oil viscosity
• Damaged damper rod assembly bolt copper • Incorrect oil level
washer
• Cracked or damaged cap bolt O-ring
8-4
TRBL
UNSTABLE HANDLING SHTG
EAS00862
UNSTABLE HANDLING
Handlebar Rear shock absorber assembly(-ies)
• Bent or improperly installed handlebar • Faulty rear shock absorber spring
Steering head components • Leaking oil or gas
• Improperly installed upper bracket Tire(s)
• Improperly installed lower bracket • Uneven tire pressures (front and rear)
(improperly tightened ring nut) • Incorrect tire pressure
• Bent steering stem • Uneven tire wear
• Damaged ball bearing or bearing race Wheel(s)
Front fork leg(s) • Incorrect wheel balance
• Uneven oil levels (both front fork legs) • Deformed cast wheel
• Unevenly tensioned fork spring (both front • Damaged wheel bearing
fork legs) • Bent or loose wheel axle
• Broken fork spring • Excessive wheel runout
• Bent or damaged inner tube Frame
• Bent or damaged outer tube • Bent frame
Swingarm • Damaged steering head pipe
• Worn bearing or bushing • Improperly installed bearing race
• Bent or damaged swingarm
8-5
TRBL
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM SHTG
EAS00866
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM

HEADLIGHT DOES NOT COME ON TURN SIGNAL DOES NOT COME ON
• Wrong headlight bulb • Faulty turn signal switch
• Too many electrical accessories • Faulty turn signal relay
• Hard charging • Burnt-out turn signal bulb
• Incorrect connection • Incorrect connection
• Improperly grounded circuit • Damaged or faulty wire harness
• Poor contacts (main switch) • Improperly grounded circuit
• Burnt-out headlight bulb • Faulty battery
• Faulty headlight relay • Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
• Faulty ECU TURN SIGNAL BLINKS SLOWLY
HEADLIGHT BULB BURNT OUT • Faulty turn signal relay
• Wrong headlight bulb • Faulty main switch
• Faulty battery • Faulty turn signal switch
• Faulty rectifier/regulator • Incorrect turn signal bulb
• Improperly grounded circuit TURN SIGNAL REMAINS LIT
• Faulty main switch • Faulty turn signal relay
• Headlight bulb life expired • Burnt-out turn signal bulb
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON TURN SIGNAL BLINKS QUICKLY
• Wrong tail/brake light LED • Incorrect turn signal bulb
• Too many electrical accessories • Faulty turn signal relay
• Incorrect connection • Burnt-out turn signal bulb
• Burnt-out tail/brake light LED HORN DOES NOT SOUND
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT LED BURNT OUT • Improperly adjusted horn
• Wrong tail/brake light LED • Damaged or faulty horn
• Faulty battery • Faulty main switch
• Incorrectly adjusted rear brake light switch • Faulty horn switch
• Tail/brake light LED life expired • Faulty battery
• Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
• Faulty wire harness
8-6
XV1700P/XV1700PC WIRING DIAGRAM
1 Generator | Signaling system fuse
2 Rectifier/regulator } Decompression solenoid fuse
3 Main switch ~ ECU fuse
4 Battery å Fuel injection system fuse
5 Backup fuse (odometer and clock)
6 Main fuse
7 Starter relay
8 Starter motor
9 Relay unit
0 Starting circuit cut-off relay
B Fuel pump
C Neutral switch
D Sidestand switch
L Speed sensor
P ECU
R Ignition coil
S Spark plug
T Decompression solenoid
U Cylinder #1 - injector
V Cylinder #2 - injector
W Tachometer assembly
X Tachometer
Y Tachometer light
Z Speedometer assembly
[ Engine trouble warning light
\ Neutral indicator light
] Speedometer
_ Fuel level warning light
a Left turn signal indicator light
b Right turn signal indicator light
c High beam indicator light
d Speedometer light
e Turn signal relay
f Horn 1
g Horn 2
h Headlight relay
i Left handlebar switch
j Clutch switch
k Dimmer switch
l Horn switch
m Turn signal switch
n Front turn signal/position light (left)
o Front turn signal/position light (right)
p Rear turn signal light (right)
q Rear turn signal light (left)
r Headlight
s Right handlebar switch
t Front brake light switch
v Start switch
w Tail/brake light
x License plate light
y Rear brake light switch
z Headlight fuse
{ Ignition fuse
YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
2500 SHINGAI IWATA SHIZUOKA JAPAN
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
XV1700P/XV1700PC 9
WIRING DIAGRAM (For USA)
0 A
A B
(BLACK) (BLACK)
B
WIRE HARNESS TAIL SUB-WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS INJECTION
SUB-WIRE HARNESS
D (BLUE)
C
(BLUE)
5
1 2
R
(BLACK)
(GRAY)
(BLACK)
E L
S
6 F
3 R
(BLACK)
ON Q
P
OFF
4 7
S
(BLACK)
G
8 P
M
(GRAY)
H
(BLACK) (BLACK)
N T
å (BLACK)
I
~ J (BLACK)
O (BLACK) (BLACK)
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
B B
(BLACK)
K (DARK GRAY)
V
B B
}
(GRAY)
|
W
{ Z
(BLACK)
g f e
z [
\
s h X
]
(BLACK) (BLACK)
u i k l m ^ Y
v (L)
t N
j (R)
(BLUE) (BLUE) a
(BLACK)
y (BLACK)
b
c
(BLACK) A
A (RED)
A A d (RED)
(RED)
w
r (BLUE)
x q (GREEN) (BLUE)
(BLUE)
p o n
A
A (GREEN)
COLOR CODE
Black Dark green Orange White Black/Orange Blue/Black Blue/Yellow Brown/Yellow Gray/Red Red/Black Red/Yellow Yellow/Black
Blue Green Pink Yellow Black/Red Blue/Green Brown/Black Green/Blue Pink/Blue Red/Green White/Black Yellow/Green
Brown Gray Red Black/Green Black/White Blue/Red Brown/Blue Green/Red Pink/White Red/Blue White/Green Yellow/Blue
Chocolate Light green Sky blue Black/Blue Black/Yellow Blue/White Brown/White Green/Yellow Pink/Yellow Red/White White/Yellow Yellow/Red

Warrior Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Warrior Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Warrior Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XV1700P

Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

IMPORTANT MANUAL INFORMATION

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Symbols G to L in the exploded diagrams

New M Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ELEC 7

MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................1-1

CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS ................................................................1-34

SPECIAL TOOLS ..........................................................................................1-35

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................................2-2

CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................2-13

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................2-17

CONVERSION TABLE ..................................................................................2-20

GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ...............................2-20

LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES.....................................2-27

ENGINE OIL LUBRICATION CHART ...........................................................2-29

ENGINE OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS ..................................................................2-30

TRANSFER GEAR OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS .................................................2-34

CABLE ROUTING .........................................................................................2-36

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART

GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART ............................3-2

SEAT AND SIDE COVERS .............................................................................3-4

HEADLIGHT AND METER ASSEMBLIES......................................................3-5

FUEL TANK .....................................................................................................3-7

AIR FILTER CASE...........................................................................................3-8

SILENCER AIR FILTER CASE .......................................................................3-9

FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS ............................................................4-1

REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC, AND REAR WHEEL PULLEY.....................4-11

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES.......................................................................4-23

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM ...........................................4-80

DRIVE BELT AND DRIVE SPROCKET ........................................................4-89

ROCKER ARMS, PUSH RODS AND VALVE LIFTERS ..............................5-11

CYLINDER HEADS .......................................................................................5-34

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS .................................................................5-39

CYLINDERS AND PISTONS .........................................................................5-49

SHIFT SHAFT AND STOPPER LEVER ........................................................5-70

GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH......................................................5-73

TRANSFER GEAR CASE .............................................................................5-79

ENGINE OIL PUMP .....................................................................................5-102

CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS ...............................................5-109

FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ............................................................................6-1

ARRANGEMENT OF THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND

CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY ................................................................7-8

CHECKING THE SWITCHES ........................................................................7-10

CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS ........................................7-12

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ..................................................................7-22

STARTER MOTOR ........................................................................................7-28

CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................................................................7-35

FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ..........................................................................7-54

STARTING FAILURES ....................................................................................8-1

INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING SPEED...........................................................8-2

POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE .................................8-3

FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING ..............................................................................8-3

FAULTY CLUTCH ...........................................................................................8-3

POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE................................................................8-4

FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS........................................................................8-4

FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM..............................................8-6

1 Fuel pump 7 Intake air pressure sensor È Fuel system

An FI warning light is provided on meter panel.